Become a Member
  • Track your favourite stocks
  • Create & monitor portfolios
  • Daily portfolio value
Sign Up
Quickpicks
Add shares to your
quickpicks to
display them here!

Annual Financial Report - Part 1

18th Mar 2011 07:30

RNS Number : 1832D
Santander UK Plc
18 March 2011
 



 

Part 1

 

Santander UK plc

Annual Report and Accounts 2010

 

 

The Company announces that a copy of the above document has been submitted to the National Storage Mechanism and will shortly be available for inspection at www.Hemscott.com/nsm.do

 

In fulfilment of its obligations under the Disclosure and Transparency Rules, Santander UK plc hereby releases the unedited full text of its Annual Report & Accounts.

 

A printer-friendly PDF version of the accounts will also be made available on the Company's website:

 

www.aboutsantander.co.uk

 

For further details, please contact:

 

Anthony Frost

(Head of UK Corporate Communications)

020 7756 5536

Israel Santos

(Head of Investor Relations)

020 7756 4275

 

 

The full text of the accounts follows:

 

Chief Executive Officer's Review

Overview

 

In 2010, Santander UK produced another strong performance; all business units reported strong results and overall profits increased despite the challenging operating environment in the UK. Statutory profit after tax increased by 27%, the sixth consecutive year of double digit growth, while trading profit before tax increased by 12%. Our trading income was 5% higher at £4,870m and trading expenses were marginally higher than 2009 resulting in a further improvement to our cost-to-income ratio to 41% maintaining Santander UK's strong position relative to our UK peers.

This efficiency has given us a significant competitive advantage which we have utilised to deliver a market leading range of value-for-money products. Innovation and rewarding customers who do more business with us have been trademarks of our proposition as seen by our 'Super' products and Loyalty range. Through products such as the Santander Zero Current Account and the Zero Credit Card, and a range of competitive mortgage, savings and other product offers Santander UK has achieved more best-buy mentions than any of our UK competitors and delivered strong levels of new business growth.

As part of our progress towards becoming a full-service commercial bank we are investing in and growing our small and medium sized enterprise ('SME') franchise, with lending to this sector up over 26%. In 2010 we announced that we had reached an agreement to acquire 318 branches and more than 40 banking centres from The Royal Bank of Scotland. On completion, this is expected to increase our SME lending market share from its current level of about 3% to more than 8% and provide us with a strong platform to continue to challenge in this market.

In recent years we have made good progress in developing Santander UK's franchise. Looking ahead, we must build on the solid platform we have established and a key part of our strategy will be to diversify our business mix. It will still be underpinned by our strong position in retail banking, but will include more premium and private banking services and expand on business and corporate banking, and further strengthening our SME franchise.

 

Key financial highlights

 

Santander UK's trading profit before tax (management's preferred profit measure, described in the Business Review - Summary on page 21) increased by 12% to £2,141m. Statutory profit after tax of £1,583m for 2010 increased by 27% over 2009.

 

Trading income increased by 5% largely due to balanced growth in customer loans and deposits and effective margin management. Higher lending margins and healthy underlying new business activity were partially offset by the increased costs of deposit acquisition, market funding and liquid asset balances to meet new regulatory requirements;

 

Trading expenses were only 2% higher than last year (flat excluding the impact of acquired businesses) as a result of a successful and ongoing cost management strategy. The synergy benefits realised from the Alliance & Leicester integration have been re-invested to fund growth initiatives across the bank, including the ongoing recruitment in Retail operations to support business growth and improve customer service;

 

The combination of tightly controlled costs and revenue growth resulted in a further improvement in the trading cost:income ratio to 41% from 42% a year earlier; and

 

Trading provisions of £752m were £50m lower than last year. This was a reflection of the low interest rate environment and better than expected unemployment trends in the UK, as well as our continued collection efforts and the overall quality of our mortgage portfolio. We have preserved conservative levels of coverage, and our arrears and repossession levels have remained significantly better than industry benchmarks from the Council of Mortgage Lenders.

 

In terms of financial performance in 2011, revenue performance is expected to be subdued given the persistent low interest rate environment, cost of term funding and the full year impact cost of holding higher liquid asset balances required by recent regulatory changes. We continue to seek opportunities to improve our cost efficiency, but remain cautious on the outlook and speed of economic recovery in terms of provisioning given the expected impact of increases in unemployment and interest rates on arrears levels.

 

Business performance

 

Our increased commercial franchise has meant that Santander has become increasingly familiar throughout the UK. Our distribution network across more than 1,400 branches (including agencies) and 25 Corporate Business Centres is a powerful platform for generation of significant new business as well as servicing existing customers. For the second year in succession we opened over one million new bank accounts. In the year we also opened 432,000 new credit card accounts, reached investment sales of £3.5bn and increased lending to SME businesses.

Despite a slowing housing market we continued to support home buyers with gross mortgage lending of £24.2bn in 2010, which equates to almost 1 in 5 mortgages and is well ahead of our market share of mortgage stock of 14%. Our sustained focus on the quality of new lending based on affordability and robust risk management continues to be effective as evidenced by our low levels of mortgage arrears. The strength of the Santander brand has been demonstrated by our ability to attract retail and commercial deposits of more than £9bn. Competitive pricing and new products such as our Loyalty Bond and the 'Super' range have increased the range and value of term deposits on our balance sheet.

Our organic growth in Corporate Banking reflects an ongoing aim to increase our presence in this sector. Our network of Corporate Business Centres offers an increasing range of products to businesses of different sizes and provides both SMEs and large corporates with a tailored banking service reflecting their very different requirements. SME lending balances have increased by over 26% and we have attracted £2bn of corporate deposits with favourable maturity profiles.

Global Banking & Markets produced a strong result in 2010 especially given a less favourable trading environment, with increased customer transactions, particularly in the final quarter.

 

Integration, expansion and rebranding

 

The rebranding of Bradford & Bingley's savings business and Abbey branches to Santander was completed in January 2010, with the rebranding of Alliance & Leicester branches completed in December 2010. In the back office, the planned integration of systems, processes and management structures was also completed: all personal customers' data has now been transferred onto Partenon, Santander's proprietary IT platform. Further work is ongoing in relation to corporate and SME systems, but we are on track to deliver and exceed the targeted £180m of cost savings by the end of 2011, as stated at the time of the Alliance & Leicester acquisition.

We further expanded our network in the year through the Santander Universities programme, and also by extending our agency channel having acquired the Halifax agency network which were successfully rebranded to Santander and open for business by the end of 2010. These agencies extend our geographical spread and target growth opportunities. In many cases these agencies represent the 'last branch in town' and the transfer to the Santander UK network reinforces our support for communities across the UK.

 

Rewarding customer loyalty

 

One of our key strategic aims is to do more business with our customers and to offer them rewards for their loyalty. During 2010 we:

 

launched the Santander Zero Current Account to reward eligible customers with the lowest fees in the market, no overdraft charges and fee-free access to ATMs worldwide. Originally available to mortgage customers the offering was subsequently expanded to eligible customers with an investment or savings product and by the end of the year almost 200,000 customers held a Santander Zero Current Account;

 

introduced the Loyalty Tracker Bond which offered market-leading fixed-term rates to eligible customers, attracting deposit flows of £1.3bn during the year;

 

waived the 3% balance transfer fee on the Zero Credit Card for all existing customers with a mortgage or a current account with Santander UK or Alliance & Leicester;

 

kept the Flexi-ISA open for Santander UK Current Account customers; and

 

increased the loan to value ('LTV') to 90% on mortgages exclusively available to customers who hold their primary current account with Santander UK, while maintaining prudent lending policies.

 

Investing for growth and improving customer service

 

We are committed to tackling service issues within our business and a key priority for management is to increase the level of customer satisfaction. To improve customer service levels and support our ongoing growth, the creation of 600 UK-based customer-facing roles was announced in July 2010 and a further 400 in September 2010. Recruitment is well under way with over 740 new employees deployed in our UK branches and call centres and the remaining 260 are expected to be in place by the end of March 2011. We survey 20,000 customers each month to measure customer satisfaction and the results of this analysis show that we have made progress in the last 12 months. The way we handle complaints was overhauled in 2010; we now typically resolve around 80% of complaints within 48 hours and the volume of complaints reportable to the FSA in the second half of the year was 20% lower than in the first half.

 

 "Best Bank" awards

 

For the third year in succession, we have been recognised by Euromoney as the "Best Bank in United Kingdom" and for the second year running received the "Bank of the Year in the United Kingdom" award from The Banker. These important achievements reflect the progress we have made in the last five years in transforming our business, but equally they are testament to the outstanding contribution all of our staff have made towards delivering our vision to be the best commercial bank in the UK. Nevertheless, we are fully aware that there remain significant challenges ahead as we continue to develop Santander UK into a full service commercial bank, and deliver improved customer service levels.

 

 

Funding, liquidity and capital

 

Prudent management of our balance sheet is a cornerstone of our strategy. During 2010 we funded growth in our lending portfolio to our retail and SME customers (balances increased by 6% to £202.1bn), by attracting new customer deposits (balances increased by 7% to £153.5bn) and ended the year with an improved net commercial funding position and an improvement in the loan-to-deposit ratio to 123% (2009: 126%). We also continued our programme to reduce our portfolio of non-core assets in 2010 with Corporate non-core balances 22% lower at £3.8bn and the Treasury asset portfolio 46% lower at £5.1bn. Further material reductions have been delivered already in 2011, helping to reduce our short-term funding needs.

Market conditions remain difficult in terms of access to credit and liquidity. Despite this, we were able to leverage our strong financial position and brand to raise over £20bn of medium-term wholesale funding at attractive rates during 2010. During the same period, the holdings of core liquid assets increased significantly from £14bn to £40bn in response to new regulatory requirements.

 

The economy and UK regulation

 

The UK economy saw positive economic growth in 2010, and the unemployment rate remained steady through the year. The economic environment heading into 2011, remains challenging especially given uncertainty surrounding the implications of announced UK Government spending cuts and as a result demand for credit is likely to remain subdued. Despite these challenges, we expect the recovery to continue in 2011 with positive GDP growth.

The UK Government's recent announcements on regulatory reform imply considerable change ahead for the banking industry. We believe Santander UK is well-placed to respond to these challenges.

 

Looking ahead

 

Our transition to becoming a full-service commercial bank took a step forward in 2010, thanks in large part to the support, dedication and commitment of all our staff who I would like to personally thank for their efforts. We enter 2011 with confidence, and we anticipate further progress despite the continued challenges within the UK economy and the stricter regulatory environment.

We expect to see further improvements in customer service, and this remains a key priority across our business. We have invested in new customer-facing roles, overhauled our complaints procedures and implemented new processes across the network. We believe these measures will have a positive impact on service quality.

Our support for homeowners was maintained throughout the recent economic downturn and we expect to continue this support in the year ahead. The Loyalty strategy we introduced has been very successful and we anticipate further progress in 2011 as we continue to encourage customers to do more business with us.

We are working towards completing the acquisition of 318 Royal Bank of Scotland Group branches, a key step in fulfilling our ambition to be a full-service commercial bank as we complement our strong retail offering with an increased presence for SMEs.

We are fully supportive of the principles of the UK Government's lending growth targets which formed part of the 'Merlin' agreement and have committed to £6.7bn of gross new lending to businesses in 2011. We expect that almost £4bn of this new lending will be to SMEs, an increase of 25% in 2011.

Our aim is to increase our lending to UK businesses and retail customers, and create new jobs as we open more business centres to serve them.

 

 

Ana Botín

Chief Executive Officer

 

Forward Looking Statements

 

Santander UK plc (the 'Company') and its subsidiaries (together 'Santander UK' or the 'Group') may from time to time make written or oral forward-looking statements. Examples of such forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to:

projections or expectations of revenues, costs, profit (or loss), earnings (or loss) per share, dividends, capital structure or other financial items or ratios;

statements of plans, objectives or goals of Santander UK or its management, including those related to products or services;

statements of future economic performance; and

statements of assumptions underlying such statements.

 

Words such as 'believes', 'anticipates', 'expects', 'intends', 'aims', 'plans', 'targets' and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements but are not the exclusive means of identifying such statements.

By their very nature, forward-looking statements are not statements of historical or current facts; they cannot be objectively verified, are speculative and involve inherent risks and uncertainties, both general and specific, and risks exist that the predictions, forecasts, projections and other forward-looking statements will not be achieved. Santander UK cautions readers that a number of important factors could cause actual results to differ materially from the plans, objectives, expectations, estimates and intentions expressed in such forward-looking statements made by Santander UK or on Santander UK's behalf. Some of these factors, which could affect the Group's business, financial condition and/or results of operations, are considered in detail in the Risk Management section on page 67 and the Risk Factors section on page 266 and they include:

the effects of UK economic conditions (e.g. recent decline in housing market, rising unemployment, increased taxation and reduced public spending);

the effects of conditions in global financial markets (e.g. increased market volatility, reduced credit availability and increased commercial and consumer loan delinquencies);

the credit quality of borrowers and the soundness of other financial institutions;

the Group's ability to access liquidity and funding on financial terms acceptable to it;

the extent to which regulatory capital and liquidity requirements and any changes to these requirements may limit the Group's operations;

the effects of any changes to the credit rating assigned to the Group, any member of the Group or any of their respective debt securities;

the effects of fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, basis spreads, bond and equity prices and other market factors;

the extent to the Group may be required to record negative fair value adjustments for its financial assets due to changes in market conditions;

the ability of the Group to manage any future growth effectively (e.g. efficiently managing the operations and employees of expanding businesses and maintaining or growing its existing customer base);

the ability of the Group to realise the anticipated benefits of its business combinations and the exposure, if any, of the Group to any unknown liabilities or goodwill impairments relating to the acquired businesses;

the effects of competition, or intensification of such competition, in the financial services markets in which the Group conducts business and the impact of customer perception of the Group's customer service levels on existing or potential new business;

the extent which the Group may be exposed to operational losses (e.g. failed internal or external processes, people and systems);

the ability of the Group to recruit, retain and develop appropriate senior management and skilled personnel;

the effects of any changes to the reputation of the Group, any member of the Group or any affiliate operating under the Group's brands;

the effects of the financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies and any changes thereto in each location in which the Group operates;

the effects of taxation requirements and any changes thereto in each location in which the Group operates (e.g. the bank levy in the UK);

the effects of the proposed reform and reorganisation of the structure of the UK financial regulatory authorities and of the UK regulatory framework that applies to members of the Group;

the effects of any new reforms to the UK mortgage lending market;

the power of the UK Financial Services Authority (or any overseas regulator) to intervene in response to attempts by customers to seek redress from financial service institutions, including the Group, in case of industry-wide issues;

the extent to which members of the Group may be responsible for contributing to compensation schemes in the UK in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers;

the effects which the UK Banking Act 2009 may have, should the HM Treasury, the Bank of England and/or the FSA exercise their powers under this Act in the future against the Company;

the Group's dependency on its information technology systems;

the risk of third parties using the Group as a conduit for illegal activities without the Group's knowledge;

the effects of any changes in the pension liabilities and obligations of the Group; and

Santander UK's success at managing the risks to which the Group is exposed, including the items above.

 

Undue reliance should not be placed on forward-looking statements when making decisions with respect to Santander UK and/or its securities. Investors and others should take into account the inherent risks and uncertainties of forward-looking statements and should carefully consider the foregoing non-exhaustive list of important factors. Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date on which they are made and are based on the knowledge, information available and views taken on the date on which they are made; such knowledge, information and views may change at any time. Santander UK does not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

Written forward-looking statements may appear in documents filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission, including this Annual Report and Accounts, reports to shareholders and other communications. The US Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 contains a safe harbour for forward-looking statements on which Santander UK relies in making such disclosures.

This Business and Financial Review contains forward-looking statements that involve inherent risks and uncertainties. Actual results may differ materially from those contained in such forward-looking statements. See "Forward-looking Statements" on page 5.

 

 

Business Overview

General

 

Santander UK plc (the 'Company') and its subsidiaries (together, 'Santander UK' or the 'Group') operate primarily in the UK, under UK law and regulation and are part of Banco Santander, S.A. (together with its subsidiaries, 'Santander'). Santander UK is a significant financial services provider in the UK, being the second largest residential mortgage lender and the second largest savings brand[i], operating across the full range of personal financial services.

The principal executive office and registered office of Santander UK plc and Abbey National Treasury Services plc is 2 Triton Square, Regent's Place, London NW1 3AN. Santander UK's telephone number is +44 (0) 870-607-6000. The designated agent for service of process on Santander UK in the US is Abbey National Treasury Services (Connecticut branch), 400 Atlantic Street, Stamford, CT 06901. See "Business and Financial Review - Tangible fixed assets" for information on our properties.

 

 

Summary history

 

The Abbey National Building Society (the 'Society') was formed in 1944 with the merger of two long-standing building societies. In 1988, Abbey National plc was incorporated as a bank and in 1989 the Society transferred business to Abbey National plc as part of the conversion and listing on the London Stock Exchange. In 2003, the brand name was shortened to Abbey. In 2010, the Company changed its name to Santander UK plc and now operates under the Santander brand name. A list of the Company's principal subsidiaries and their country of incorporation can be found on page 204.

On 12 November 2004, Banco Santander, S.A. completed the acquisition of the entire issued ordinary share capital of the Company, implemented by means of a scheme of arrangement under Section 425 of the Companies Act 1985, making the Company a wholly-owned subsidiary of Banco Santander, S.A.. Banco Santander, S.A. is one of the largest banks in the world by market capitalisation. Founded in 1857, Banco Santander, S.A. has more than 90 million customers and over 14,000 branches.

In September 2008, following the announcement by HM Treasury to take Bradford & Bingley plc into public ownership, the retail deposits, branch network and related employees transferred, under the provisions of the Banking (Special Provisions) Act 2008, to the Company. All of Bradford & Bingley plc's customer loans and treasury assets, including all its mortgage assets, were taken into public ownership. The transfer to the Company consisted of the £20bn retail deposit base with 2.7 million customers, as well as Bradford & Bingley plc's direct channels including 197 retail branches, 141 agencies (distribution outlets in third party premises) and related employees. The acquisition price was £612m, including the transfer of £208m of capital relating to offshore entities. The transfer of Bradford & Bingley plc's customers and their retail deposits further strengthened the Group's retail customer deposit base and franchise.

In December 2008, following the acquisition by Banco Santander, S.A. of Alliance & Leicester plc, the Company injected £950m of capital into Alliance & Leicester plc through a subscription for new Alliance & Leicester plc ordinary shares and undated subordinated notes. Previously, in October 2008, the Company subscribed for US$100m undated floating rate subordinated notes issued by Alliance & Leicester plc. As a result of the subscription for ordinary shares, the Company held 35.6% of the issued ordinary share capital of Alliance & Leicester plc at 31 December 2008.

On 9 January 2009, in order to optimise the capital, liquidity funding and overall financial efficiency of the enlarged Santander group,Banco Santander, S.A. transferred all of its Alliance & Leicester plc shares to the Company in exchange for newly issued ordinary shares of the Company. Accordingly, the Company is now the immediate parent company of Alliance & Leicester plc. The Company accounted for the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc with effect from 10 October 2008, the date on which Alliance & Leicester plc was acquired by Banco Santander, S.A..

These business combinations allow the Group to deliver increased critical mass in the UK through greater market share. In January 2010, the Company, which includes the Bradford & Bingley savings business, was rebranded as Santander. In December 2010, the rebranding of Alliance & Leicester branches was completed, as information technology changes ensured any Santander customer in the UK could transact in all its UK branches. The move delivered a significant advantage for customers as they can now use more than 1,400 branches (including agencies). The change also reflected Santander's policy to operate under a single brand.

On 28 May 2010, Alliance & Leicester plc transferred its business and certain associated liabilities to the Company pursuant to a court-approved business transfer scheme under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

On 3 August 2010, Banco Santander S.A., through a wholly-owned Spanish-based subsidiary Santusa Holding, S.L., injected £4,456m of equity capital into Santander UK plc. The capital was used to support the reorganisation of certain Banco Santander, S.A. group companies in the UK and will be used to support organic and inorganic growth.

On 4 August 2010, the Company announced its agreement to acquire (subject to certain conditions) 318 branches and associated assets and liabilities from the Royal Bank of Scotland Group for a premium of £350m to net assets at closing. The consideration will be paid in cash and is subject to certain closing adjustments. The transaction includes 311 Royal Bank of Scotland branches in England and Wales; seven NatWest branches in Scotland; the retail and SME customer accounts attached to these branches; the Direct SME business; and certain mid-corporate businesses. EC/UK merger control clearance was received on 15 October 2010 and HMRC clearance was also received during the fourth quarter. The separation and transfer process is underway. The long stop contractual date is 31 March 2012. In October and November 2010, the Group acquired for total consideration of £1,451m:

 

Santander Cards Limited and Santander Cards (UK) Limited (and its subsidiaries), which conduct Santander's provision of credit cards and related financial products, store cards and other unsecured consumer finance products in the UK, and Santander Cards Ireland Limited, which conducts Santander's provision of credit finance by way of store cards and credit cards in the Republic of Ireland;

Santander Consumer (UK) plc (of which the Group already held 49.9%), which carries on Santander's provision of finance facilities and the contract purchase of motor vehicles and equipment in the UK and also provides wholesale funding which is a facility that offers preferential dealers funding in the UK; and

Santander PB UK (Holdings) Limited (and its subsidiaries) (of which the Group already held 51% of its subsidiary, Santander Private Banking UK Limited), which carries on Santander's provision of private banking services in the UK.

The principal purpose of the acquisitions was to bring these interests of Banco Santander, S.A. in the UK under the corporate structure of the Group in furtherance of the Group's objective to become a full-service commercial bank.

In 2010, the Company won Euromoney's 'Best Bank in the United Kingdom' award for the third successive year. In addition, in 2010 and 2009 the Company won The Banker Award for 'Bank of the Year in the United Kingdom'. Banco Santander, S.A. won Euromoney's 'Best Bank in Western Europe' award in 2009 and its 'Best Bank in the World' award in 2008.

 

 

Corporate purpose and strategy

 

Santander UK's purpose is to maximise value for its shareholders, Banco Santander, S.A. and its subsidiary company Santusa Holding, S.L., by focusing on offering a full commercial banking service in the UK providing good service and value-for-money products to customers. With the continuing support of Banco Santander, S.A., Santander UK aims to be the best commercial bank in the UK.

 

 

Executive responsibility

 

Santander UK's management structure is headed by Ana Botín, Chief Executive Officer, who was appointed on 1 December 2010 following the resignation of António Horta-Osório. The management structure consists of a number of business and support divisions. The business divisions consist of:

 

Retail Banking - offers residential mortgages, savings and banking and other personal financial products to customers throughout the UK, as well as private banking and other specialist services. Alison Brittain heads retail distribution, business banking, e-commerce and the intermediary channel, while Rami Aboukhair is responsible for private banking.

 

Corporate Banking - offers banking services principally to small and medium-sized ('SME') UK companies. It also contains certain non-core portfolios. This division is headed by Steve Pateman.

 

Global Banking & Markets - provides financial markets sales, trading and risk management services, as well as manufacturing retail structured products. This division is headed by Luis de Sousa.

 

Group Infrastructure - This unit includes Asset & Liability Management, Economics, Group Capital and Funding and is headed by Justo Gómez.

 

The support divisions consist of:

 

Retail Products and Marketing - responsible for integrating and gaining the maximum value from Santander UK's products, marketing and brand communications to serve Santander UK's customers better. This division is headed by Miguel-Ángel Rodríguez-Sola.

 

Human Resources - responsible for delivering the human resources strategy and personnel support. This division is headed by Karen Fortunato.

 

Manufacturing - responsible for all information technology, cost control and operations activity, including service centres. This division is headed by Juan Olaizola.

 

Risk - responsible for ensuring that the board of directors (the 'Board') and senior management team of Santander UK are provided with an appropriate risk policy and control framework, and to report any material risk issues to the Risk Committee and the Board. This division is headed by José María Nus.

 

Internal Audit - responsible for supervising the compliance, effectiveness and efficiency of Santander UK's internal control systems to manage its risks. This division is headed by Jorge de la Vega.

 

 

In addition there are a number of corporate units:

 

Financial Planning, Financial Reporting and Tax, Cost Management & Control - This unit is headed by Mónica Cueva.

 

Corporate Services - This unit includes Legal, Secretariat, Compliance and Regulatory Risk Management is headed by Karen Fortunato.

 

Service Quality - This unit is headed by Miguel-Ángel Rodríguez-Sola, with Chief Executive Officer oversight given the importance of service quality.

 

Communications - This unit reports to Ana Botín.

 

Santander Universities in the UK - This unit reports to Rami Aboukhair, with Chief Executive Officer oversight in line with the global Universities structure.

 

 

Competitive environment, future trends and outlook

 

The economic environment in the UK in 2010 remained uncertain, albeit more stable than in 2009, with unemployment, arrears levels and house prices all relatively stable.

Santander UK's main competitors are other UK retail banks, building societies and other financial services providers such as insurance companies, supermarket chains and large retailers. The market remains highly competitive, driven largely by market incumbents. Management expects such competition to continue in response to competitor behaviour, consumer demand, technological changes, the impact of consolidation, regulatory actions and other factors.

2011 is expected to be another difficult year for the UK economy, but one in which we expect to see signs of recovery as we progress through the year. However, unemployment is predicted to remain high, resulting in continuing difficulties for banks, homeowners and savers, and the outlook for interest rates remains uncertain. Management remains confident of Santander UK's strength and potential to continue growing despite continuing challenging conditions in some of its core personal financial services markets. A detailed description of management's basis for concluding that Santander UK remains a going concern is set out in the Directors' Report - Going Concern on page 138.

 

 

Business divisions

 

The overview below reflects the reporting structure in place during 2010 in accordance with which the segmental information in the Business and Financial Review and in the segmental note to the Consolidated Financial Statements has been presented.

 

Retail Banking

 

Retail Banking consists of residential mortgages, savings, banking and consumer credit, online banking and financial services through cahoot, general insurance, Santander Business Banking, asset management and credit cards.

 

Residential Mortgages

Santander UK is the second largest provider of residential mortgages in the UK measured by outstanding balancesi, providing mortgage loans for house purchases as well as home improvement loans to new and existing mortgage customers.

Mortgage loans are offered in two payment types. Repayment mortgages require both principal and interest to be repaid in monthly instalments over the life of the mortgage. Interest-only mortgages require monthly interest payments and the repayment of principal at the end of the mortgage term. This can be arranged via a number of investment products including Individual Savings Accounts and pension policies, or by the sale of the property.

Santander UK's mortgage loans are usually secured by a first ranking mortgage over property and are typically available over a 25-year term, although there is no minimum term. Variable rate products charge interest at variable rates, including trackers which track the Bank of England base rate and those determined at the discretion of Santander UK by reference to the general level of market interest rates and competitive forces in the UK mortgage market. Fixed rate products offer a predetermined interest rate, generally fixed for between two and five years, after which they bear interest at standard variable rates. In 2010, the majority of new business was through variable rate products, normally with an incentive period for the first two to five years. In line with the rest of the UK market, a significant proportion (although reduced compared with the previous year) of mortgages are repaid at the end of the fixed or incentive period, with the customer moving to a new incentive product. The remainder stay on Santander UK's standard variable rate.

 

Savings

Santander UK is the second largest deposit taker in the UKi and provides a wide range of retail savings accounts in the UK, including on-demand, notice, and investment accounts, Individual Savings Accounts, and capital guaranteed products. Interest rates on savings in the UK are primarily set with reference to the general level of market interest rates and the level of competition for such funds.

 

Banking and Consumer Credit

Santander UK offers a range of personal banking services including current accounts, credit cards and unsecured personal loans. Credit scoring is used for initial lending decisions. Behavioural scoring is used for certain products for further lending decisions. In November 2010, the Group acquired Santander Consumer (UK) plc (in which the Group already held a 49.9% shareholding), which carries on Santander's provision of finance facilities and the contract purchase of motor vehicles and equipment in the UK and also provides wholesale funding which is a facility that offers preferential dealers funding in the UK.

 

cahoot

cahoot is the Group's separately branded, e-commerce retail banking and financial services provider.

 

General Insurance

The range of non-life insurance products distributed by Santander UK includes property (buildings and contents) and payment protection. Residential home insurance remains the primary type of policy offered and is sold through the branch network, the internet and over the telephone, as well as being sold by mortgage intermediaries, often at the time a mortgage is taken out.

 

Santander Business Banking

Santander Business Banking offers a range of banking services to small businesses in the UK, typically with turnover of less than £1m.

 

Private Banking

Santander UK offers private banking and other specialist banking services in the UK, through Cater Allen and Abbey Sharedealing, and offshore banking through Abbey National International Limited, Alliance & Leicester International Limited and Bradford & Bingley International Limited. Prior to its sale in 2010, Santander UK also offered other specialist banking services in the UK through James Hay.

On 10 March 2010, Santander Private Banking UK Limited completed the disposal of James Hay Holdings Limited, together with its five subsidiary companies, by the sale of 100% of James Hay Holdings Limited's shares to IFG UK Holdings Limited, a subsidiary of IFG Group for a cash considerationof approximately £29m. The IFG Group provides independent financial advisory, fund management and pension administration services in Ireland and the UK.

On 17 December 2007, Santander UK sold 49% of its shareholding in Santander Private Banking UK Limited (consisting of James Hay, Cater Allen Limited and Abbey Stockbrokers Limited) to Santander PB UK (Holdings) Limited, a direct subsidiary of Banco Santander, S.A., for a total cash consideration of £203m. The companies affected were Cater Allen Limited, Abbey Stockbrokers Limited, James Hay Holdings Limited and their subsidiaries. Subsequently, on 29 October 2010, Santander UK plc acquired 100% of Santander PB UK (Holdings) Limited.

 

Asset Management

Retail Banking earns a commission on products sold through its agreement with a fellow subsidiary outside the Group, Santander Asset Management UK Limited.

 

Credit Cards

Santander UK credit cards are issued through Santander Cards Limited. Prior to October 2010, Santander Cards Limited was a fellow subsidiary outside the Group and Retail Banking earned a commission from Santander Cards Limited on every credit card sold. In October 2010, Santander Cards Limited was acquired by the Group.

 

 

Corporate Banking

 

Santander UK started to develop its corporate banking capability in 2006, with the acquisition of Alliance & Leicester significantly increasing this capability in 2008. The investment in, and development of these operations has been significant, with good progress being made ahead of the upcoming acquisition of certain customers from the Royal Bank of Scotland Group.

Corporate Banking provides a range of banking services through its network of 25 Corporate Business Centres and specialist businesses, including loans, current accounts, deposits, treasury services, asset finance, cash transmission, trade finance and invoice discounting. The Corporate Business Centres have seen significant growth in their customer base in 2009 and 2010 and primarily service SME UK companies. The specialist businesses within Corporate Banking service customers in various business sectors including Real Estate, Social Housing and Infrastructure.

Corporate Banking is also responsible for managing certain non-core portfolios, including aviation and shipping. Prior to its disposal on 8 December 2008, it was also responsible for Porterbrook, its rolling stock leasing business.

 

 

Global Banking & Markets

 

Global Banking & Markets is a financial markets business focused on providing value added financial services to large corporates not serviced by Corporate Banking (being, in general, very large multinationals) and financial institutions, as well as to the rest of Santander UK's business (including the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking divisions). It is structured into five main product areas: Rates, Foreign exchange and money markets, Equity, Credit and Transaction Banking. In addition, large and complex clients are covered by teams organised along industry lines. Rates covers sales and trading activity for fixed income products. Foreign exchange offers a range of foreign exchange products and money markets runs the securities lending/borrowing and repurchase ('repo') businesses. Equity covers equity derivatives, property derivatives and commodities. Equity derivatives activities include the manufacture of structured products sold to retail and corporate customers of both the Group and of other financial institutions who sell them on to their customers. Credit originates loan and bond transactions in primary markets as well as their intermediation in secondary markets. Transaction Banking provides lending and cash management services, including deposit taking and trade finance.

 

 

Group Infrastructure

 

Group Infrastructure consists of Asset and Liability Management ('ALM'), which is also responsible for Group capital, funding and the Treasury asset portfolio that is being run down. ALM is responsible for managing the Group's structural balance sheet shape and strategic and tactical liquidity risk management. This includes short-term and medium-term funding, covered bond and securitisation programmes. ALM's responsibilities also include Santander UK's banking product and structural exposure to interest rates. ALM recommends and helps to implement Board, Asset and Liability Management Committee and Risk Committee policies for all aspects of balance sheet management - formulating guidance for, and monitoring, the overall balance sheet shape, including maturity profile. It is also responsible for the return on the Group's capital, reserves, preference shares and subordinated debt. The Treasury asset portfolio assets were acquired as part of the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Group in 2008 and as part of an alignment of portfolios across the Banco Santander, S.A. group in 2010.

Santander UK plc and Abbey National Treasury Services plc had a shelf registration statement with the US Securities and Exchange Commission, which expired in December 2008. It is intended to file a shelf registration statement with the US Securities and Exchange Commission in the first half of 2011. Additionally, as part of its prudent contingent funding arrangements, ALM ensures that Santander UK has access to the central bank facilities made available by the Bank of England, the Swiss National Bank, and the US Federal Reserve. Further information is set out in the "Balance Sheet Business Review - Sources of Funding and Liquidity" on page 63.

 

 

Business Review - Summary

 

The results discussed below are not necessarily indicative of Santander UK's results in future periods. The following information contains certain forward-looking statements. See "Forward-looking Statements" on page 5. The following discussion is based on and should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements elsewhere in this Annual Report and Accounts.

 

Executive Summary

 

Santander UK has prepared this Business and Financial Review in a manner consistent with the way management views the business as a whole. As a result, Santander UK presents the following key sections to the Business and Financial Review:

 

Business Review Summary - this contains an explanation of the basis of Santander UK's results and any potential changes to that basis in the future; a summarised consolidated income statement with commentary thereon by line item for each segment; a summary of the nature of adjustments between Santander UK's statutory basis of accounting (as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements) and Santander UK's management basis of accounting (known as the "trading" basis);

 

Key Performance Indicators - this contains a description of the key measures used by management in assessing the success of the business against its strategies and objectives;

 

Divisional results - this contains a supplementary summary of the results, and commentary thereon, for each segment. Additional information is provided for the Retail Banking segment due to its significance to the Group's results;

 

Other Material Items - this contains information about the statutory to trading basis adjustments; and

 

Balance Sheet Business Review - this contains a description of Santander UK's significant assets and liabilities and its strategy and reasons for entering into such transactions, including:

Summarised consolidated balance sheet - together with commentary on key movements, as well as analyses of the principal assets and liabilities;

Off-Balance Sheet disclosures - a summary of Santander UK's off-balance sheet arrangements, their business purpose, and importance to Santander UK;

Capital disclosures - an analysis of Santander UK's capital needs and composition; and

Liquidity disclosures - an analysis of Santander UK's sources and uses of liquidity and cash flows.

 

Basis of results presentation

 

The Group's business is managed and reported on the basis of the following segments:

 

Retail Banking;

Corporate Banking;

Global Banking & Markets; and

Group Infrastructure.

 

In 2010, the results of the businesses that previously comprised the Private Banking operating segment ceased being reported separately to the Board. The results of the James Hay business that was sold in March 2010 were reclassified from Private Banking to Group Infrastructure, and the results of the remaining businesses in Private Banking were reported as part of Retail Banking.

In addition, a new transfer pricing mechanism was implemented in 2009 to calculate the profitability of customer assets and deposits in each business segment to reflect the market environment and rates at that point. The changes applied a higher funding cost/return to new customer assets/deposits respectively, taking into consideration both customer type and term.

In the second half of 2010, a further refinement of these adjustments was made to reflect the persistently low interest rates, higher cost of new term funding and the increased cost of higher regulatory liquidity balances. These changes have been applied to all periods, but had a more material impact in 2009 and 2010. The impact was to improve income reported in Group Infrastructure, offset by reduced income in Retail Banking and Corporate Banking. The positive earnings reported in Group Infrastructure include the benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital. This was previously reported in Retail Banking and Corporate Banking. The positive earnings reported in Group Infrastructure also include the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business. In addition, the cost allocations process has been further refined to recharge more costs previously held centrally from Group Infrastructure to the other business segments.

Further, the management of services to small and medium-sized companies was refined to ensure that companies with revenues of less than £1m were principally managed within Retail Banking, Corporate Banking principally manages companies with revenues of between £1m and £25m, and large multinationals and financial institutions were managed within Global Banking & Markets.

Prior years' segmental analyses have been adjusted to reflect the fact that reportable segments have changed.

 

Critical Factors Affecting Results

 

Critical accounting policies and areas of significant management judgement

The preparation of Santander UK's Consolidated Financial Statements requires management to make estimates and judgements that affect the reported amount of assets and liabilities at the date of the Consolidated Financial Statements and the reported amount of income and expenses during the reporting period. Management evaluates its estimates and judgements on an ongoing basis. Management bases its estimates and judgements on historical experience and on other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

Estimates and judgements that are considered important to the portrayal of Santander UK's financial condition including, where applicable, quantifications of the effects of reasonably possible ranges of such estimates and judgements are set out in "Critical Accounting Policies" in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Impact of the current credit environment

Further information about the impact of the current credit environment is contained in the Risk Management Report on page 124, in addition to information relating to the valuation of financial instruments included in the Group's critical accounting policies disclosures referred to above.

 

Profit on part sale and revaluation of subsidiaries

 

Profits of £39m were made on the disposal of Group undertakings (2009: £nil, 2008: £40m) during the year. In addition a profit of £87m arose on the revaluation of the Group's original holding in Santander Consumer (UK) plc on the acquisition of the remaining shares by the Group. There were no such revaluation profits in 2009 or 2008.

 

Significant acquisitions and disposals

 

The 2010 and 2009 results included significant contributions from Alliance & Leicester (transferred to the Company in January 2009) and the Bradford & Bingley savings business (acquired in September 2008) as described in the Business Overview.

 

Current and future accounting developments under IFRS

 

Details can be found in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

Group Summary

 

Summarised consolidated statutory income statement and selected ratios

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net interest income

3,814

3,412

1,772

Non-interest income

1,220

1,284

1,232

Total operating income

5,034

4,696

3,004

Administrative expenses

(1,793)

(1,848)

(1,343)

Depreciation and amortisation

(275)

(260)

(202)

Total operating expenses excluding provisions and charges

(2,068)

(2,108)

(1,545)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(712)

(842)

(348)

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

(129)

(56)

(17)

Total operating provisions and charges

(841)

(898)

(365)

Profit before tax

2,125

1,690

1,094

Taxation charge

(542)

(445)

(275)

Profit for the year

1,583

1,245

819

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

1,544

1,190

811

Non-controlling interest

39

55

8

Core Tier 1 capital ratio (%)

11.5%

6.8%

6.2%

Tier 1 capital ratio (%)

14.8%

9.5%

8.5%

Risk weighted assets(1)

73,563

67,438

63,425

(1) In accordance with the requirements of the UK Financial Services Authority, this included 35.6% of Alliance & Leicester plc's risk weighted assets at 31 December 2008, reflecting Santander UK's ownership of that percentage of Alliance & Leicester plc's ordinary share capital on that date, as described in Business Overview - Summary history.

 

In this Business Review - Summary section, information about our reportable segments is presented on a statutory basis which represents the trading basis of results together with the non-trading adjustments, both of which are set out in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Profit before tax of £2,125m increased from £1,690m in 2009 (2008: £1,094m). Material movements by line include:

 

Net interest income

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Retail Banking

3,138

2,840

1,606

Corporate Banking

191

182

(3)

Global Banking & Markets

6

7

2

Group Infrastructure

479

383

167

3,814

3,412

1,772

 

2010 compared to 2009

Net interest income of £3,814m increased by £402m from £3,412m in 2009. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking net interest income of £3,138m increased by £298m from £2,840m in 2009, an increase of 10%. The increase was largely driven by balanced growth in customer lending and deposits across a mix of products combined with effective margin management. Retail Banking customer assets increased by £10.1bn or 6% (of which £5.7bn or 3% reflected the inclusion of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses acquired in October and November 2010, respectively). Retail Banking customer liabilities increased by £6.8bn or 5%.

The key drivers of the increase in net interest income were improved margins on existing mortgage balances as more customers reverted to standard variable rate mortgages in the current low interest rate environment, and improved margins on new and retained business in both the mortgage and unsecured loan portfolios. These increases more than offset a higher cost of retail deposits, the impact of low interest rates, the cost of new term funding and higher liquid asset balances in response to new regulatory requirements. Retail Banking net interest income also included £75m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

In terms of mortgage lending, the Group achieved an 18% share of the gross mortgage lending market in the UK in 2010, similar to 2009 and significantly ahead of our market share of mortgage stock of 14%. Lending was written at margins above stock margin and with a continued emphasis on lower loan-to-value segments. In total, net lending was £5.6bn.

The growth of customer deposits benefited from a 22% increase in private banking deposits, and a 9% increase in personal bank account liability balances, as well as a good performance in core savings underpinned by a strong tax year and "loyalty" offers.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Corporate Banking net interest income of £191m increased by £9m from £182m in 2009. The increase was primarily driven by growth in customer loans and deposits to the UK SME market through our network of 25 Corporate Business Centres (SME lending balances increased by 26% and total deposit balances increased by 14%). Net interest margins on loans continued to improve during 2010 as market pricing better reflected incremental higher funding and liquidity costs applied to the business unit.

This was in part offset by a reduced contribution of £20m from the non-core portfolio as Corporate Banking continued to reduce balances of the non-core assets.

 

Global Banking & Markets net interest income of £6m decreased by £1m from £7m in 2009. The decrease was due to increased funding costs offsetting customer asset growth.

 

Group Infrastructure net interest income of £479m increased by £96m from £383m in 2009. The income reflected the benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital, and the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business.

This was partially offset by a decrease in net interest income from the James Hay business which was sold in March 2010. In addition, net interest income from the run-down Treasury asset portfolio decreased due to the continued de-leveraging process, with balances reduced by 46% in the year, to £5.1bn at the year end.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Net interest income of £3,412m increased by £1,640m from £1,772m in 2009. Of the total increase, £840m represented the inclusion of the net interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking net interest income of £2,840m increased by £1,234m from £1,606m in 2008. Of the total increase, £690m represented the inclusion of the net interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining increase of £544m was largely driven by balanced growth in customer lending and deposits across a mix of products combined with effective margin management, as well as a 17% growth in bank account liability balances and hedging strategies which helped to offset the impact of lower interest rates.

In terms of lending, unsecured lending balances continued to decline, but were more than offset by net mortgage lending of £7.6bn in 2009. The increase in mortgage lending resulted in the Group taking an 18% share of the gross mortgage lending market in the UK in 2009, with new lending written at margins above the existing loan stock margin and with an emphasis on lower Loan-to-Value segments.

In addition, income from existing mortgage balances increased as more customers reverted to standard variable rate mortgages, and margins improved in both the mortgage and unsecured loan portfolios in the low interest rate environment which more than offset the cost of new deposits.

 

Corporate Banking net interest income of £182m increased by £185m from (£3m) in 2008. Of the total increase, £88m represented the inclusion of the net interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining increase of £97m reflected in part the sale of the Porterbrook businesses early in December 2008 (net interest income in 2008 included interest expense of £76m incurred by the Porterbrook businesses, whereas its associated leasing income was classified as non-interest income).

In addition, 2009 reflected some benefit from higher asset margins as new business lending and pricing was altered to reflect the market environment in terms of increased funding costs. Net interest income also improved as a result of robust growth of both assets and liabilities. However, this was partly offset by the adverse impact of changes to transfer pricing arrangements to reflect higher costs of new term funding and liquid asset balances.

 

Global Banking & Markets net interest income of £7m increased by £5m from £2m in 2008. Net interest income increased by £6m as a result of the inclusion of the net interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. However, this was partially offset by a reduction in loan balances during the year.

 

Group Infrastructure net interest income of £383m increased by £216m from £167m in 2008. Of the total increase, £56m represented the inclusion of the net interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining increase of £160m reflected the benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital, and the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business.

 

 

 

 

Non-interest income

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Retail Banking

596

689

611

Corporate Banking

194

202

249

Global Banking & Markets

412

382

326

Group Infrastructure

18

11

46

1,220

1,284

1,232

 

 

2010 compared to 2009

Non-interest income of £1,220m decreased by £64m from £1,284m in 2009. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking non-interest income of £596m decreased by £93m from £689m in 2009. The decrease was largely due to lower investment fees as a result of the mix of sales shifting away from structured investment products towards managed funds (which will yield a trail income in future periods rather than an upfront commission).

In addition, unsecured lending-related fees reduced, driven by lower volumes (which decreased by 20%), while mortgage fees were adversely affected by lower redemption volumes in line with the market and banking fees were affected by the introduction of the Santander Zero account.

Retail Banking non-interest income included £8m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

 

Corporate Banking non-interest income of £194m decreased by £8m from £202m in 2009. Asset growth in the core business and strong sales of Global Banking & Markets products resulted in higher fees. However, this was more than offset by lower fees in non-core businesses as Corporate Banking continued to reduce balances in the non-core portfolio.

 

Global Banking & Markets non-interest income of £412m increased by £30m from £382m in 2009, reflecting the strong development of underlying customer revenue streams and a number of non-recurring releases of fair value adjustments following the successful de-risking of underlying positions. These benefits were partly offset by a less favourable trading environment resulting from lower spread volatility.

 

Group Infrastructure non-interest income of £18m increased by £7m from £11m in 2009. The increase reflected non-recurring gains reported in 2010. These gains included a profit of £87m on the revaluation of the Group's original holding in Santander Consumer (UK) plc on the acquisition of the remaining shares by the Group, and the profit on disposal of certain businesses in the period of approximately £39m, including James Hay.

This was largely offset by hedge ineffectiveness in 2010. In 2009, mark-to-market gains that arose in 2008 reversed but credit spreads did not change significantly, resulting in the recognition of losses. In addition, 2009 included certain one-off benefits not repeated in 2010 (including profits earned on the buy-back of securitisation debt in 2009) and higher losses on disposals of assets in the Treasury asset portfolio which is being run down.

In addition, there was a decrease in non interest income from the James Hay business which was sold in March 2010.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Non-interest income of £1,284m increased by £52m from £1,232m in 2008. The inclusion of the non-interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester resulted in an increase of £413m. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking non-interest income of £689m increased by £78m from £611m in 2008. Of the total increase, £174m represented the inclusion of the non-interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining decrease of £96m was largely due to lower fees on unsecured lending products, as part of our stated strategy to reduce unsecured lending exposures, as well as lower fees from current accounts due to repricing.

In addition, mortgage fees were adversely impacted by a reduction in the volume of mortgage redemptions given decreased activity in the market as a result of declining house prices and lower levels of supply.

 

Corporate Banking non-interest income of £202m decreased by £47m from £249m in 2008. Non-interest income increased by £161m as a result of the inclusion of the non-interest income in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. However, this was more than offset by a decrease of £265m reflecting the inclusion in non-interest income in 2008 of the leasing income relating to the Porterbrook businesses which were sold early in December 2008.

In addition, new business lending generated increases in both fees and cross-selling of Global Banking & Markets products.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Global Banking & Markets non-interest income of £382m increased by £56m from £326m in 2008. Non-interest income increased by £1m as a result of the inclusion of the non-interest income of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining increase of £55m reflected strong performances in the equity business (linked to sales of retail products through the branch network) and short term markets business, which benefited from a favourable trading environment available from wider spreads in an illiquid market.

 

Group Infrastructure non-interest income of £11m decreased by £35m from non interest income of £46m in 2008. Alliance & Leicester contributed £77m of non-interest income in 2009. The remaining decrease of £112m in the year reflected mark-to-market losses and lower gains in 2009 on the buy-back of debt securities compared to 2008.

Substantial mark-to-market gains arose in the second half of 2008 from movements in interest rates, which were more than offset by losses due to widening asset spreads. In 2009, the mark-to-market gains reversed, but the credit spreads did not change significantly, resulting in the recognition of losses. In addition, 2008 included the profit on disposal of the Porterbrook business not repeated in 2009.

 

 

Administrative expenses

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Retail Banking

1,473

1,533

1,151

Corporate Banking

144

168

45

Global Banking & Markets

128

101

104

Group Infrastructure

48

46

43

1,793

1,848

1,343

 

2010 compared to 2009

Administrative expenses of £1,793m decreased by £55m from £1,848m in 2009. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking administrative expenses of £1,473m decreased by £60m from £1,533m in 2009. The decrease was largely due to the removal of duplication across back office and support functions due to the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the Bradford & Bingley savings business. Within this framework, the synergy benefits realised have been re-invested to fund growth initiatives across the Group, including the ongoing recruitment in Retail Banking operations to support business growth and improve customer service. Retail Banking administrative expenses included £35m of expenses relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

 

Corporate Banking administrative expenses of £144m decreased by £24m from £168m in 2009. The decrease was due to operational efficiencies arising from the integration of Alliance & Leicester, partially offset by investment in the Corporate Business Centre network. The investment included hiring an additional 136 staff over the last twelve months and an increase of 70% in the floor space of the Corporate Business Centre network.

 

Global Banking & Markets administrative expenses of £128m increased by £27m from £101m in 2009, reflecting ongoing investment in growth initiatives relating to new products, markets and customer segments. There was a 38% increase in headcount across the customer transaction businesses including the new Gilt Edge Market Making desk.

 

Group Infrastructure administrative expenses of £48m increased by £2m from £46m in 2009, reflecting non-recurring expenditure relating to the rebranding of Abbey and the Bradford & Bingley savings business as Santander in January 2010. In addition, higher expenses resulted from the process of transferring the business of Alliance & Leicester plc to Santander UK plc under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 in May 2010. However, these additional expenses were partially offset by savings due to the sale of the James Hay business in March 2010.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Administrative expenses of £1,848m increased by £505m from £1,343m in 2008. Of the total increase, £501m represented the inclusion of the administrative expenses in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking administrative expenses of £1,533m increased by £382m from £1,151m in 2008. Of the total increase, £373m represented the inclusion of the administrative expenses in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. A further £61m of the increase was due to expenses related to the Bradford & Bingley savings business since its acquisition in September 2008. The remaining administrative expenses decrease was largely due to the removal of duplications across back office and support functions due to the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

 

Corporate Banking administrative expenses of £168m increased by £123m from £45m in 2008. Of the total increase, £128m represented the inclusion of the administrative expenses in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining decrease of £5m was due to operational efficiencies arising from the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the sale of the Porterbrook business.

 

Global Banking & Markets administrative expenses of £101m were slightly lower than £104m in 2008, reflecting strong expense management while increasing income.

 

Group Infrastructure administrative expenses of £46m increased by £3m from £43m in 2008, reflecting a slight increase in central costs following the Transfer of Alliance & Leicester and the acquisition of the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

 

 

 

Depreciation and amortisation

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Retail Banking

201

170

82

Corporate Banking

72

87

117

Global Banking & Markets

2

3

3

275

260

202

 

2010 compared to 2009

Depreciation and amortisation of £275m increased by £15m from £260m in 2009. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking depreciation and amortisation of £201m increased by £31m from £170m in 2009. The increase resulted from the continued investment in IT systems in Santander UK in 2009 and 2010 and the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

 

Corporate Banking depreciation and amortisation of £72m decreased by £15m from £87m in 2009. The decrease reflected lower operating lease depreciation due to lower balances in the non-core portfolio following the continued de-leveraging process.

 

Global Banking & Markets depreciation and amortisation of £2m was broadly flat compared with 2009.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Depreciation and amortisation of £260m increased by £58m from £202m in 2008. Of the total increase, £122m represented the inclusion of the depreciation and amortisation in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking depreciation and amortisation of £170m increased by £88m from £82m in 2008. Of the total increase, £35m represented the inclusion of the depreciation and amortisation in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. The remaining increase of £53m was largely driven by a full year of depreciation of, and further investment in, our IT platform Partenon and increased depreciation costs as a result of growing our lending to SMEs.

 

Corporate Banking depreciation and amortisation of £87m decreased by £30m from £117m in 2008. Alliance & Leicester contributed £87m in 2009. The remaining decrease reflected the sale of the Porterbrook businesses which had contributed depreciation expense of £117m in 2008.

 

Global Banking & Markets depreciation and amortisation of £3m was unchanged from £3m in 2008.

 

 

 

Impairment losses on loans and advances

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Retail Banking

615

714

309

Corporate Banking

97

31

(6)

Group Infrastructure

-

97

45

712

842

348

 

2010 compared to 2009

Impairment losses on loans and advances of £712m decreased by £130m from £842m in 2009. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking impairment losses on loans and advances of £615m decreased by £99m from £714m in 2009, with the most significant reduction relating to mortgages. This improving performance in difficult economic conditions has been delivered as a result of a high quality mortgage book, effective collection handling and reductions in arrears levels, particularly in the second half of 2010.

Similarly, performance across the unsecured portfolios improved during the year. However, the commercial mortgages book demonstrated some stress from adverse market conditions with the charge for the year increasing to £63m (2009: £31m). Retail Banking impairment losses on loans and advances included £33m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

 

Corporate Banking impairment losses on loans and advances of £97m increased by £66m from £31m in 2009. The increase reflected growth and maturity in asset balances over the last two years and some deterioration arising from market conditions. The non-core Corporate Banking portfolios continued to perform in line with our original expectations, with existing impairment loss allowances expected to be sufficient to cover losses inherent in the portfolios.

 

Group Infrastructure impairment losses on loans and advances decreased to £nil from £97m in 2009. The overall loss of £nil in 2010 was due to losses and recoveries on disposals of assets in the Treasury asset portfolio offsetting each other whereas in 2009 there were overall losses on disposal.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Impairment losses on loans and advances of £842m increased by £494m from £348m in 2008. Of the total increase, £195m represented the inclusion of the Impairment losses on loans and advances in 2009 of Alliance & Leicester. By segment, the movements were:

 

Retail Banking impairment losses on loans and advances of £714m increased by £405m from £309m in 2008. Of the total increase, £94m represented the inclusion of Alliance & Leicester's impairment losses in 2009. The remaining increase of £311m was distributed across all products with the largest increase relating to mortgages, as the impact of falling house prices and the lagging effect of unemployment, as expected, started to emerge. Most of the impact came through in the first half of the year, with the second half performance stabilising and in some areas improving.

With respect to mortgages, the second half of the year saw a slower rate of growth in arrears, with fewer losses than observed earlier in the year, in part as a result of collection activities and mitigating actions taken, but also due to the low interest rate environment and the slight upturn in house prices. A strong mortgage coverage ratio of close to 20% was preserved.

 

Corporate Banking impairment losses on loans and advances of £31m increased by £37m from a £6m release in 2008. Of the total increase, £4m represented the inclusion of Alliance & Leicester's impairment losses in 2009. The low level of impairment losses was a reflection of prudent lending criteria on the relatively immature growth businesses and portfolios (such as SME lending within Corporate Banking). It also reflected impairment loss allowances made on acquisition relating to the non-core portfolios (including aviation and shipping) to reflect expected losses in those portfolios as required under acquisition accounting. The remaining increase of £33m reflected the non-recurrence in 2009 of Corporate Banking impairment loss allowance releases in 2008 relating to non-core businesses and some deterioration arising from market conditions.

 

Group Infrastructure impairment losses on loans and advances of £97m increased by £52m from £45m in 2008. Alliance & Leicester contributed £97m in 2009 in respect of the Treasury asset portfolio. The remaining decrease of £45m principally relates to the non-recurrence in 2009 of other impairment loss charges incurred in 2008.

 

 

Non-performing loans

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Total non-performing loans ('NPLs')

3,717

3,613

2,378

Total Group customer assets(1, 2)

202,090

190,067

183,345

Total impairment loss allowances

1,655

1,299

1,001

%

%

%

NPLs as a % of customer assets

1.84

1.90

1.30

Coverage ratio(3)

44.53

35.95

42.09

Mortgages:

NPLs as a % of customer assets

1.41

1.52

0.97

Coverage ratio(3)

22.45

19.87

24.03

(1) Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

(2) Customer assets include social housing loans and finance leases, and exclude trading assets.

(3) Impairment loss allowances as a percentage of NPLs.

 

2010 compared to 2009

In 2010, the value of non-performing loans increased slightly to £3,717m (2009: £3,613m) while non-performing loans as a percentage of customer assets reduced to 1.84% (2009: 1.90%). Mortgage and unsecured non-performing loans have reduced by £113m relative to 2009 (this included £84m of additional non-performing loans resulting from the acquisition of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses in October and November 2010, respectively). This was offset by an increase in corporate non-performing loans due to the deterioration of the economic conditions in this market. The mortgage NPL ratio of 1.41% is considerably below the industry average.

The overall coverage ratio increased to 44.53% from 35.95% (of this increase 6.1% was generated from the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses acquired in 2010), reflecting our conservative stance, given unpredictability of future market conditions. Secured coverage remained strong at 22%, reflecting the point in the economic cycle. Combined with conservative risk appetite of new business and stock LTV, we believe that the business is well positioned to absorb adverse impacts from any further negative market movements.

 

2009 compared to 2008

In 2009, the value of non-performing loans increased to £3,613m from £2,378m in 2008 and non-performing loans as a percentage of customer assets increased to 1.90% (2008: 1.30%). The non-performing loan ratio increased due to rising secured (residential and commercial properties) and corporate arrears reflecting continued market deterioration. However, the retail unsecured arrears decreased by £137m, in part due to de-leveraging of this portfolio.

The overall coverage ratio decreased from 42.09% to 35.95%, impacted by the mix of the non-performing assets due to the increase in the secured mortgage component, which has a lower impairment loss allowance requirement because of inherent security.

 

 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Retail Banking

129

56

17

129

56

17

 

2010 compared to 2009

Provisions for other liabilities and charges in Retail Banking of £129m increased by £73m, from £56m in 2009, principally reflecting ongoing restructuring costs in relation to the integration of Alliance & Leicester, and customer remediation administration costs and payments in respect of settlement of certain claims.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Provisions for other liabilities and charges in Retail Banking of £56m increased by £39m from £17m in 2008, principally representing redundancy costs relating to the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

 

Taxation

 

The tax on the Group's profit before tax differs from the theoretical amount that would arise using the basic corporation tax rate of the Company as follows:

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Profit before tax

2,125

1,690

1,094

Tax calculated at a tax rate of 28% (2009: 28%, 2008: 28.5%)

595

473

310

Non taxable gain on sale of subsidiary undertakings

(11)

(5)

(11)

Non deductible preference dividends paid

8

8

8

Non taxable gain on revaluation of investment in Santander Consumer (UK) plc

(24)

-

-

Effect of non-allowable impairment losses, provisions and other non-equalised items

-

51

19

Non-taxable dividend income

-

(4)

(5)

Effect of non-UK profits and losses

(6)

(8)

(8)

Utilisation of capital losses for which credit not previously recognised

-

(3)

-

Effect of change in tax rate on deferred tax provision

11

-

-

Adjustment to prior year provisions

(31)

(67)

(38)

Tax expense

542

445

275

Effective tax rate

25.5%

26.3%

25.1%

 

2010 compared to 2009

The effective tax rate for 2010, based on profit before tax was 25.5% (2009: 26.3%, 2008: 25.1%). The effective tax rate differed from the UK corporation tax rate of 28% (2009: 28%) principally because of the non-taxable profit of £87m that arose on the revaluation of the Group's original holding in Santander Consumer (UK) plc on the acquisition of the remaining shares by the Group, adjustment to prior year provisions, non-taxable gains on sales of subsidiary undertakings, and the reduction in deferred tax asset as a result of the change in the tax rate.

 

2009 compared to 2008

The effective tax rate for 2009 was 26.3% (2008: 25.1%). The effective tax rate differed from the UK corporation tax rate of 28% (2008: 28.5%) principally because of the effect on non-allowable impairment losses, provisions and other non-equalised items, the benefit from adjustment to prior year provisions, and the effects of non-UK profits and losses arising principally in Jersey and the Isle of Man.

 

 

Capital

 

Discussion and analysis of the Core Tier 1 capital ratio, the Tier 1 capital ratio and risk-weighted assets is set out in the "Balance Sheet Business Review - Capital management and resources" on pages 59 to 61.

 

Adjustments between the statutory basis and the trading basis

 

Santander UK's Board reviews discrete financial information for each of its reporting segments that includes measures of operating results, assets and liabilities which are measured on a "trading" basis. The trading basis differs from the statutory basis as a result of the application of various adjustments, as presented below. Management considers that the trading basis provides the most appropriate way of reviewing the performance of the business.

The adjustments consist of:

 

Alliance & Leicester pre-acquisition trading basis results - Following the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Company in January 2009, the statutory results for the years ended 31 December 2010 and 2009 include the results of the Alliance & Leicester business, whereas the statutory results for the year ended 31 December 2008 do not. In order to enhance the comparability of the results for the three periods, management reviews the 2008 results including the pre-acquisition results of the Alliance & Leicester business for that period.

 

Reorganisation and other costs - These comprise implementation costs in relation to strategic change and cost reduction projects, including integration-related expenses, certain impairment losses taken centrally, as well as costs in respect of customer remediation. Management needs to understand the underlying drivers of the cost base that will remain after these exercises are complete, and does not want this view to be clouded by these costs, which are managed independently.

 

Depreciation of operating lease assets - The operating lease businesses are managed as financing businesses and, therefore, management needs to see the margin earned on the businesses. Residual value risk is separately managed. As a result, the depreciation is netted against the related income.

 

Profit on part sale and revaluation of subsidiaries - These profits are excluded from the results to allow management to understand the underlying performance of the business. In 2010, the profit that arose on the revaluation of the Group's original holding in Santander Consumer (UK) plc on the acquisition of the remaining shares by the Group was excluded from the trading results. In addition, profits on the sale of James Hay and certain other businesses were excluded. In 2009 there were no such profits. In 2008, the profit on the sale of the Porterbrook businesses was excluded from the trading results.

 

Hedging and other variances - The Balance Sheet and Income Statement are subject to mark-to-market volatility including that arising from the accounting for elements of derivatives deemed under IFRS rules to be ineffective as hedges. Volatility also arises on certain assets previously managed on a fair value basis, and hence classified as fair value through profit or loss under IFRS, that are now managed on an accruals basis. Where appropriate, such volatility is separately identified to enable management to view the underlying performance of the business. In addition, other variances include the reversal of coupon payments on certain equity instruments which are treated as interest expense in the trading results but are reported below the profit after tax line for statutory purposes.

 

Capital and other charges - These principally comprise internal nominal charges for capital invested in the Group's businesses. Management implemented this charge to assess the effectiveness of capital investments.

 

 

For a detailed explanation of these items, see "Other Material Items" in the Business and Financial Review.

In Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements that reconciles the segment measures to the consolidated totals, the Group totals the income statement line items for individual segments as part of the reconciliation required under IFRS 8, such as trading profit before tax. These total segment measures are also presented and discussed as part of the supplementary summary of the results in the 'Business Review - Divisional results' section that follows. Outside the reconciliation required by IFRS 8 in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, these totals are non-GAAP financial measures. A body of generally accepted accounting principles such as IFRS is commonly referred to as 'GAAP'. A non-GAAP financial measure is defined as one that measures historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows but which excludes or includes amounts that would not be so adjusted in the most comparable GAAP measures. These non-GAAP financial measures are not a substitute for GAAP measures, for which management has responsibility.

 

Key performance indicators relevant to the Group during the years ended, and at, 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008 are set out below. This information describes the key measures used by management in assessing the success of the business against its strategies and objectives.

The management objectives set forth below are subject to significant change and uncertainties including as described in "Shareholder Information - Risk Factors" and may not be achieved. In particular, macro-economic factors such as UK unemployment and property values, and regulatory changes are outside of management's control, and could prevent achievement of these objectives.

 

Key performance indicator

Note

2010

2009

2008

Trading income

1

£4,870m

£4,658m

£3,894m

Trading cost:income ratio

2

41%

42%

50%

Profit for the year

3

£1,583m

£1,245m

£819m

Commercial Banking margin

4

1.91%

1.76%

1.33%

Total number of employees

5

19,848

19,483

22,669

Market share of mortgage stock

6

13.88%

13.50%

12.90%

Loan-to-deposit ratio

7

123%

126%

136%

Loan-to-value ratio of mortgage stock (indexed)

8

51%

52%

51%

Risk-weighted assets (1)

9

£73,563m

£67,438m

£63,425m

(1) In accordance with the requirements of the UK Financial Services Authority, this included 35.6% of Alliance & Leicester plc's risk weighted assets at 31 December 2008, reflecting Santander UK's ownership of that percentage of Alliance & Leicester plc's ordinary share capital on that date, as described in Business Overview - Summary history.

 

1.

Trading income

 

Trading income comprises net interest income and non-interest income of Santander UK's businesses on a trading basis. Discussion and analysis of this data is set out in the "Business Review - Divisional results" on pages 25 to 38.

Management reviews trading income in order to assess the Group's effectiveness in obtaining new customers and business. Management's target for trading income has historically been growth of between 5% and 10% per annum. Trading revenue growth in 2010 compared with 2009 was just under 5%, and in 2009 compared with 2008 was 20%. Performance has been adversely impacted by the prolonged low interest rate environment, cost of medium term funding and cost of higher liquidity holdings as a result of new regulatory requirements. This impact is expected to increase in future periods resulting in slower revenue growth relative to recent trends.

 

2.

Trading cost:income ratio

 

Trading cost:income ratio is defined as trading expenses divided by trading income. Discussion and analysis of trading income and expenses for each business division is set out in the "Business Review - Divisional results" on pages 25 to 38.

Management reviews the trading cost:income ratio in order to measure the operating efficiency of the Group. Management's target for the trading cost:income ratio is to achieve sustained improvements from the level of 50% (including the impact of Alliance & Leicester) achieved in 2008. In 2009 and 2010, this target was met and the cost:income ratio decreased to 42% and 41% respectively. Management expects to maintain the cost:income ratio at similar levels, although the recently acquired Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses are expected to initially increase this ratio, as is the adverse impact of increased regulatory liquid asset balances on revenue performance.

 

3.

Profit for the year

 

Profit for the year is the statutory consolidated profit after tax for the year. Discussion and analysis of this data is set out in the Group Summary in the "Business Review - Summary" on pages 11 to 21.

Management reviews the profit for the year in order to monitor the effectiveness of the Group's strategy and to increase the strength of its capital base and its capacity to pay dividends. Management's target for the profit for the year is to achieve sustained growth over the previous year, and this was achieved in 2010, 2009 and 2008.

 

 

 

In order to ensure that targets related to the above three key performance indicators were met, management also evaluated other measures which are set out below as critical drivers towards achieving the three key performance indicators above on a sustainable basis.

 

4.

Commercial Banking margin

 

Commercial Banking margin is defined as the trading net interest income (adjusted to remove net interest income from the run-down Treasury asset portfolio) over average commercial assets (mortgages, unsecured personal loans, corporate loans and overdrafts). Discussion and analysis of this data is set out in the "Business Review - Divisional results" on pages 25 to 38.

Management reviews the Commercial Banking margin in order to assess the economic sustainability of its commercial banking products and operations. Management's target for the Commercial Banking margin is to ensure that it is appropriate for the current market conditions and profit targets. This target was met in 2010, 2009 and 2008 given the improvements in the margin and strong reported profit growth, despite margins in the second half of 2010 being negatively impacted by the increased cost of holding higher liquid asset balances in response to new regulatory requirements, which is expected to continue in 2011.

 

5.

Total number of employees

 

Total number of employees is measured at the year-end and calculated on a full-time equivalent basis. As part of the planning process, headcount targets are set for each division and reviewed on a monthly basis. Further information about employees on a segmental basis is contained in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Management reviews the total number of employees in order to support the continuing overall control of the Group's cost base and the trading cost:income ratio. Management's targets for the total number of employees are to ensure that staffing levels are optimal for the nature and size of the Group's business.

In 2010, headcount was increased by 365 full-time equivalents, principally as a result of the investment in Retail Banking operations to support business growth and improve customer service together with the acquisition of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses in October and November 2010. This growth was partially offset by further headcount reductions from removing duplicated back office and support functions following the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc, the acquisition of the Bradford & Bingley savings business and the sale of James Hay in March 2010. In 2009, headcount was reduced by 3,186 full-time equivalents in line with our stated intentions to remove duplicated back office and support functions following the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc and the acquisition of the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

 

6.

Market share of mortgage stock

 

Market share of mortgage stock represents the book value of the Group's mortgage assets as a percentage of the total book value of mortgages in the UK market, and is measured at the year-end. Market share of mortgage stock is calculated by reference to data on the size of the UK mortgage market produced by the Bank of England. Discussion and analysis of this data is set out in the "Business Review - Divisional results" on pages 25 to 38.

Management reviews market share of mortgage stock as one of the measures to assess the Group's effectiveness in obtaining new customers. Management's target for market share of mortgage stock in 2008 was to maintain the Group's historical market share of mortgage stock of approximately 10%, subject to earning an appropriate margin. Following the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Group in 2009, the Group's target for market share of mortgage stock was updated to 15% over the medium term, to reflect the Group's combined market share (approximately 13% at 31 December 2009). In 2010 and 2009, market share increased by 0.38% and 0.6%, respectively, driven by profitable new business acquisition and successful retention strategies.

 

7.

Loan-to-deposit ratio

 

Management places a significant emphasis on the loan-to-deposit ratio as part of its focus on maintaining a sustainable funding model. The loan-to-deposit ratio represents the book value of the Group's commercial assets (i.e. retail and corporate assets) divided by its commercial liabilities (i.e. retail and corporate deposits) and shareholders' equity, and is measured at the year-end. Discussion and analysis of the loan-to-deposit ratio is set out in the Chief Executive Officer's Review on page 2 and in the Directors' Report on page 138.

Management reviews the loan-to-deposit ratio in order to assess the Group's ability to fund its commercial operations with commercial borrowings, reducing reliance on sourcing funding from the wholesale markets while improving its customer product holdings. Management's target for the Loan-to-Deposit ratio is sustained improvements in future years subject to competitive conditions. During 2010 and 2009, Santander UK continued to achieve strong commercial net lending growth which was more than matched by a larger increase in net deposit flows, resulting in further improvements in our Loan-to-Deposit ratio to 123% (2009: 126%, 2008: 136%).

 

 

8.

Loan-to-value ('LTV') ratio on mortgage stock (indexed)

 

As a result of the difficult economic environment, management placed a significant emphasis on the LTV ratio on mortgage stock in order to ensure that the profit target be achieved. The LTV ratio is calculated as the book value of the Group's residential mortgages as a percentage of the estimated current market value of the properties against which the mortgages are secured. The current market value is estimated from house price indices by adjusting the value of the property at the time of the origination of the mortgage for changes in house prices from that date to the balance sheet date. The LTV ratio is a measure of the estimated current level of security that the Group possesses on its mortgage loans.

Management reviews the LTV ratio in order to assess the Group's potential resilience to future declines in property prices. Management's target for the LTV ratio is, subject to market conditions, to sustain a LTV ratio of less than 60%. During 2010 and 2009, the Group has continued to focus on the quality of new lending based on affordability and lower LTV segments.

The average LTV on stock value at 31 December 2010 of 51% was slightly lower than at the end of the previous year (2009: 52%) due to the continuing focus on managing the portfolio in line with Santander UK's risk appetite. The average LTV on mortgage stock at 31 December 2009 was slightly higher than at the end of 2008 at 52% (2008: 51%), due to the effects of falling house prices more than offsetting lower LTVs on new business.

 

9.

Risk-weighted assets

 

Risk-weighted assets are a measure of a bank's assets adjusted for their associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel Capital Accord as implemented by the UK Financial Services Authority. In accordance with those requirements, risk-weighted assets at 31 December 2008 included 35.6% of Alliance & Leicester plc's risk weighted assets at that date, reflecting Santander UK's ownership of that percentage of Alliance & Leicester plc's ordinary share capital on that date.

Management reviews risk-weighted assets in order to determine how the regulatory capital of the Group is being utilised, and to understand the risk-adjusted trends of the Group's assets. Management's target for risk-weighted assets is for modest growth consistent with maintaining a strong Tier 1 ratio.

At 31 December 2010, risk-weighted assets of £73,563m increased by 9.1% from 31 December 2009. In 2010, although core business volumes increased, these increases were offset by de-leveraging of certain non-core portfolios. There was an additional increase in risk weighted assets due to the acquisition of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses. At 31 December 2009, risk-weighted assets of £67,438m increased by 6.3% from 31 December 2008. Although core business volumes increased, the increases were offset by de-leveraging of certain non-core portfolios and enhancements to retail IRB models.

 

Business Review - Divisional Results

 

This section contains a summary of the results, and commentary thereon, by Income Statement line item on a trading basis for each segment within the business, together with reconciliations from the trading basis to the statutory basis. Additional information is provided on the adjustments between the trading basis and the statutory basis in the "Business Review - Other Material Items".

 

Trading profit before tax by segment

 

31 December 2010

Retail Banking

£m

Corporate Banking

£m

Global Banking

& Markets

£m

Group Infrastructure

£m

Total

£m

Net interest income

3,237

212

6

302

3,757

Non-interest income

627

129

412

(55)

1,113

Total trading income

3,864

341

418

247

4,870

Total trading expenses

(1,649)

(151)

(130)

(48)

(1,978)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(615)

(97)

-

(40)

(752)

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

1

-

-

-

1

Trading profit before tax

1,601

93

288

159

2,141

Adjust for:

- Reorganisation and other costs

(155)

-

-

40

(115)

- Profit on part sale and revaluation of subsidiaries

-

-

-

126

126

- Hedging and other variances

(31)

-

-

4

(27)

- Capital and other charges

(99)

(21)

-

120

-

Profit before tax

1,316

72

288

449

2,125

 

 

31 December 2009

Retail

Banking

£m

Corporate Banking

£m

Global Banking

& Markets

£m

Group Infrastructure

£m

Total

£m

Net interest income

2,886

212

7

236

3,341

Non-interest income

720

128

382

87

1,317

Total trading income

3,606

340

389

323

4,658

Total trading expenses

(1,613)

(181)

(104)

(46)

(1,944)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(714)

(31)

-

(57)

(802)

Trading profit before tax

1,279

128

285

220

1,912

Adjust for:

- Reorganisation and other costs

(146)

-

-

(40)

(186)

- Hedging and other variances

(17)

-

-

(19)

(36)

- Capital and other charges

(60)

(30)

-

90

-

Profit before tax

1,056

98

285

251

1,690

 

 

31 December 2008

Retail

 Banking

£m

Corporate Banking

£m

Global Banking

& Markets

£m

Group Infrastructure

£m

Total

£m

Net interest income/(expense)

2,253

149

11

(24)

2,389

Non-interest income

848

240

327

90

1,505

Total trading income

3,101

389

338

66

3,894

Total trading expenses

(1,551)

(239)

(107)

(43)

(1,940)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(442)

(44)

-

(3)

(489)

Trading profit before tax

1,108

106

231

20

1,465

Adjust for:

- A&L pre-acquisition trading basis results

(254)

(2)

(10)

102

(164)

- Reorganisation and other costs

(121)

-

-

(42)

(163)

- Profit on part sale and revaluation of subsidiaries

-

-

-

40

40

- Hedging and other variances

(8)

-

-

(76)

(84)

- Capital and other charges

(67)

(14)

-

81

-

Profit before tax

658

90

221

125

1,094

 

2010 compared to 2009

Trading profit before tax of £2,141m increased by £229m on the previous year (2009: £1,912m), driven by strong income growth and reduced impairment losses.

 

Retail Banking trading profit before tax increased by £322m to £1,601m (2009: £1,279m) driven by a strong increase in trading income and reduced impairment losses, with the most significant reduction in impairment losses relating to mortgages. Trading income benefited from balanced growth in customer lending and deposits, combined with effective margin management. In addition, more customers reverted to standard variable rate mortgages, and margins on new business improved in both the mortgage and unsecured loan portfolios in the low interest rate environment. This more than offset the higher cost of retail deposits, the impact of low interest rates, the cost of new term funding and higher costs of liquidity under the UK's new liquidity regime.

 

These positive income trends were partly offset by lower investment fees combined with lower volume-driven fees on unsecured lending products and mortgage redemptions, and lower banking fees due to the introduction of the Santander Zero account. Retail Banking trading profit before tax includes £14m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010 respectively.

 

Corporate Banking trading profit before tax decreased by £35m to £93m (2009: £128m). This movement was due to higher impairment losses reflecting the growth and maturity in asset balances over the last two years and some deterioration arising from market conditions, partially offset by lower operating expenses benefiting from integration synergies. Trading income was flat, largely due to the reduction in the non-core portfolio which resulted in income £30m lower than the prior year. This was offset by growth in lending balances to SMEs, and deposits from core corporate customers.

 

Global Banking & Markets trading profit before tax increased by £3m to £288m (2009: £285m). Trading income increased, reflecting the strong development of underlying customer revenue streams and a number of non-recurring releases of fair value adjustments following the successful de-risking of underlying positions. These benefits were partly offset by a less favourable trading environment resulting from lower spread volatility. Trading expenses reflected ongoing investment in growth initiatives relating to new products, markets and customer segments.

 

Group Infrastructure trading profit before tax decreased by £61m to £159m (2009: £220m). This movement reflected the sale of James Hay in March 2010, and less income earned on the run-down Treasury asset portfolio due to the continued de-leveraging process, with balances reduced by 46% in the year. In addition, certain one-off benefits in 2009 were not repeated in 2010, including profits earned on the buy-back of securitisation debt in 2009. This was offset by the benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital, and the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Trading profit before tax of £1,912m increased by £447m on the previous year (2008: £1,465m), driven by strong income growth which exceeded the increase in impairment losses, as well as continued cost control. Trading expenses showed a small increase, due to the inclusion of £98m of Bradford & Bingley savings business related costs following its acquisition in September 2008, which was partially offset by a reduction in other trading expenses resulting from integration benefits from Alliance & Leicester. Santander UK remains on track to deliver targeted cost savings of £180m by 2011.

 

Retail Banking trading profit before tax increased by £171m to £1,279m (2008: £1,108m) driven by a strong increase in trading income, partly offset by higher trading expenses and impairment losses. Trading income benefited from a significant improvement in mortgage margins both in terms of new lending and retention of existing business, as well as increased retention levels on standard variable rate and other longer term products. In addition, the Retail Banking business delivered strong growth in customer deposits, together with effective management of deposit margins in a low interest rate environment. There was also a significant increase in bank account openings and investment product sales. These positive income trends were partly offset by lower fee income from current accounts, a reduction in the volume of mortgage redemptions and lower unsecured lending volumes. Trading expenses increased mainly due to the inclusion of a full year of Bradford & Bingley savings business related expenses. The increase in impairment losses was largely attributable to the residential mortgage and unsecured personal loans portfolios reflecting the impact of market conditions, albeit with mortgage arrears tracking better than expectations and significantly better than our UK peers.

 

Corporate Banking trading profit before tax increased by £22m to £128m (2008: £106m). This movement was due to lower operating expenses benefiting from integration synergies and lower impairment losses. Trading income benefitted from higher asset margins as well as robust growth of both assets and liabilities of the core business, albeit this was more than offset by a reduction of £29m caused by reduced balances in the non-core book and the significant increase in the cost of funding being incurred on both the core and non-core books.

 

Global Banking & Markets trading profit before tax increased by £54m to £285m (2008: £231m) due predominantly to strong income performances in the equity business (linked to sales of retail products through the branch network) and short term markets business, which benefited from a favourable trading environment available from wider spreads in an illiquid market.

 

Group Infrastructure trading profit before tax increased by £200m to £220m (2008: £20m) reflecting the benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital and the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business.

 

 

 

Business volumes

 

Business volumes are used by management to assess the sales performance of the Group, both absolutely and relative to its UK Retail Banking peer group, and to inform management of product trends in the market.

Balances in the 2008 column in the table below reflect the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Company ('the Transfer'), which was accounted for with effect from 10 October 2008. The business volumes for 2008 were unaffected by the transfer. However, in order to provide more meaningful and relevant comparatives between 2009 and 2008, Alliance & Leicester pre-acquisition business volumes for the year ended 31 December 2008 have been combined with Santander UK and presented together in the 'Combined volumes 2008' column. These measures are non-GAAP financial measures. These non-GAAP financial measures are not a substitute for GAAP measures, for which management has responsibility.

In addition, information related to market share and bank account openings for 2008 have also been presented on a combined basis in the 'Combined volumes 2008' column.

 

2010

2009

2008(1)

Combined volumes(2)

 2008

Mortgages:(3)

Gross mortgage lending in the year

£24.2bn

£26.4bn

£31.8bn

£35.2bn

Capital repayments in the year

£18.6bn

£18.8bn

£20.7bn

£29.1bn

Net mortgage lending in the year

£5.6bn

£7.6bn

£11.1bn

£6.1bn

Mortgage stock balance

£172.4bn

£166.9bn

£159.3bn

-

Market share - gross mortgage lending(4)

18.0%

18.4%

12.4%

13.9%

Market share - capital repayments(4)

14.6%

14.3%

9.5%

13.7%

Market share - mortgage stock(4)

13.9%

13.5%

12.9%

-

Unsecured personal lending:

Gross unsecured personal lending in the year

£1.3bn

£1.5bn

£0.9bn

£2.4bn

  Unsecured personal lending stock balance(5)

£4.0bn

£5.0bn

£6.3bn

-

SME lending:

SME lending stock balance

£8.5bn

£6.7bn

£5.8bn

-

Market share - SME lending stock balance

3.6%

2.7%

2.3%

-

Deposits and investments:

Customer deposits flows:

Net deposit flows in the year(6)

£9.6bn

£14.9bn

£9.5bn

£12.6bn

- Of which Retail Banking

£6.8bn

£5.6bn

£5.3bn

£7.2bn

 

Customer(6, 7) assets and deposits:

Customer asset stock balance (8)

£202.1bn

£190.1bn

£183.3bn

-

Customer deposit stock balance(9)

£153.5bn

£143.9bn

£129.0bn

-

 

Investment and pensions annual premium income(10)

 

£3.5bn

£3.5bn

£2.2bn

£2.8bn

Banking:

Bank account openings (000's)

1,005

1,093

606

904

Market share - Bank account stock balance

9.1%

8.9%

8.5%

-

Credit card sales(8) (000's)

773

387

395

475

(1) Balances at 31 December 2008 reflect the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Company with effect from 10 October 2008. 2008 business volumes do not reflect the Transfer.

(2) Includes Alliance & Leicester pre-acquisition business volumes for the year ended 31 December 2008 in order to provide more meaningful comparatives.

(3) Includes Social Housing loans.

(4) Mortgage market shares are estimated internally by reference to data on the size of the UK mortgage market produced by the Bank of England.

(5) Includes UPLs, overdrafts and cahoot and excludes consumer finance and Santander Cards credit cards.

(6) Comprises Retail Banking, Corporate Banking and Global Banking & Markets customer deposits.

(7) Includes Bradford & Bingley savings business net deposit flows from its acquisition in September 2008.

(8) Includes flows (from 1 November 2010) and stock (at 31 December 2010) for the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses acquired in 2010.

(9) Includes Bradford & Bingley deposits acquired in September 2008 and subsequent net inflows.

(10) Annualised equivalent of monthly premiums generated from new business during the year.

 

Mortgages

 

2010 compared to 2009

Gross mortgage lending was £24.2bn, representing an estimated market share of 18%, well ahead of our market share of mortgage stock of 13.9%. We continue to focus on the quality of new lending, based on affordability and lower LTV segments. The average LTV on new business completions in 2010 was 62% compared to 61% in 2009.

Capital repayments of £18.6bn were broadly in line with 2009, with an estimated market share of capital repayments of 14.6%. This performance reflected a market backdrop of continued heightened competition in low LTV segments, demonstrating our effective retention strategies in key segments and was a strong performance relative to our share of gross lending.

Net mortgage lending of £5.6bn was lower than for 2009 (£7.6bn), representing an estimated market share of 61.6%.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Gross mortgage lending was £26.4bn, representing a market share of 18.4%. Our mortgage performance remained strong against a backdrop of a much smaller re-mortgage market, in part, due to the decline in house prices. We continued to be driven by a competitive pricing strategy, targeting high quality new lending based on affordability and lower LTV segments with good margins. The average LTV on new business completions in 2009 was slightly lower at 61% (2008: 65%).

Capital repayments were £18.8bn, considerably lower than the level of repayments in 2008, as more customers reverted to standard variable rate loans, as well as successful retention activity. Our estimated market share of capital repayments increased slightly to 14.3%.

Net mortgage lending of £7.6bn represented a market share of 67.1% of mortgage lending in the UK during the year as the Group continued to be a consistent lender in difficult times.

 

 

Unsecured Personal Lending

 

2010 compared to 2009

Unsecured personal lending comprises unsecured personal loans, credit cards and overdrafts. Total gross unsecured personal lending in the year decreased by 13% to £1.3bn as a result of our ongoing focus on only lending to high quality customer segments. Credit cards and overdraft performance was broadly consistent year on year. The de-leveraging of the remaining unsecured personal loans book (i.e. excluding credit cards and overdrafts) resulted in a 19% reduction in the asset to £3.4bn.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Total gross unsecured personal lending in the year decreased to £1.5bn, representing a 38% decrease from 2008 (on a combined basis including Alliance & Leicester) following the same trend as the previous year, reflecting our continued cautious stance. The unsecured personal lending stock balance reduced 21% compared to 2008. Our continued focus on existing customers and decreased unsecured lending in line with our stated policy again contributed to higher margins on the overall portfolio.

 

 

SME Lending

 

2010 compared to 2009

SME lending balances were higher than at the end of 2009 driven by a strong performance via our 25 Corporate Business Centres and a broader product offering. We have continued to build on our growing SME franchise, with lending stock balances to this group totalling £8.5bn at 31 December 2010, up more than 26% compared to 31 December 2009, equating to an estimated 3.6% market share, and building on the momentum created in 2009.

 

2009 compared to 2008

SME lending was higher than the previous year driven by a strong performance via our 25 Corporate Business Centres. We have continued to build our presence in this key market, with lending to this group totalling £6.7bn up more than 16% compared to 31 December 2008.

 

Deposits and Investments

 

2010 compared to 2009

Net deposit inflows of £9.6bn were achieved through a strong performance across all business units. Retail Banking delivered strong inflows, in increasingly competitive market conditions, and benefited from the alignment of product marketing and pricing strategies across the brands, a strong Individual Savings Accounts ('ISA') sales season. In addition, there was a 22% increase in private banking deposits and a 7% increase in bank account liabilities for Retail Banking customers. Corporate Banking flows were lower than in 2009, though still positive despite a difficult economic environment, and benefitted from longer term deposits being taken and an improvement in customer mix.

Investment annual premium income was approximately 2% higher than in 2009, although the product mix changed from 85% structured products and 15% managed funds in 2009 to 47% structured products and 53% managed funds in 2010. Growth in sales was strong relative to a market which decreased in the same period.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Net deposit inflows of £14.9bn were underpinned by strong performances from the Retail and Corporate Banking businesses. Retail Banking inflows benefitted from the alignment of product marketing and pricing strategies across the brands, including the introduction of Abbey products, such as fixed rate bonds and Individual Savings Accounts, and promotional activity in Bradford & Bingley branches. Corporate Banking saw further growth in flows, driven by strong levels of investment as customers sought to invest with banks with strong credit ratings.

Investment annual premium income of £3.5bn was up 25% in the year (on a combined basis including Alliance & Leicester) compared to a wider market decline estimated at 8% for the same period. This strong performance primarily reflected the ongoing attractiveness of offering capital guaranteed investment products as customers continue to seek lower risk alternatives, but has also been driven by increased coverage of specialist bancassurance advisors across the branch network.

 

 

Banking

 

2010 compared to 2009

More than 1 million bank accounts have been opened in each of the last two years, and almost 200,000 Zero Current Accounts (including upgrades) by the end of 2010. Strong Retail Banking personal bank account balance growth of approximately 9% was a result of not only the larger stock of accounts but also a focus on increasing the quality of account openings and more customers holding their primary customer account with us.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Current account openings in 2009 increased by 21%, to 1.1 million accounts, which exceeded our target of 1 million new current accounts.

 

 

Credit Card sales

 

2010 compared to 2009

Credit card sales (for which we have focused on lower risk customers) doubled in 2010, including sales by Santander Cards from the date of its acquisition. Remaining sales were 12% higher than in 2009, driven by a strong performance in the telephone and internet channels, and the success achieved with the Zero credit card, of which approximately 270,000 were opened in the year.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Credit card sales decreased in 2009, as 2008 benefited from the launch of the Abbey Zero card. In addition, we saw a decline in sales via direct mail as we focused on selling to existing customers through our direct channels to improve cross-selling initiatives.

 

Retail Banking

 

Retail Banking offers a comprehensive range of banking products and related financial services (residential mortgages, savings and banking, and other personal financial services products) to customers throughout the UK. It serves customers through the Santander UK network of branches and ATMs, as well as through telephone and internet channels. It also includes our private banking business which offers private banking and other specialist banking services in the UK and offshore banking.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net interest income

3,237

2,886

2,253

Non-interest income

627

720

848

Total trading income

3,864

3,606

3,101

Total trading expenses

(1,649)

(1,613)

(1,551)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(615)

(714)

(442)

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

1

-

-

Trading profit before tax

1,601

1,279

1,108

Adjust for:

 - A&L pre-acquisition trading basis results

-

-

(254)

 - Reorganisation and other costs

(155)

(146)

(121)

 - Hedging and other variances

(31)

(17)

(8)

 - Capital and other charges

(99)

(60)

(67)

Statutory profit before tax

1,316

1,056

658

Segment balances

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

Risk weighted assets

40.0

34.6

42.1

Customer assets

177.8

167.7

161.9

Customer deposits

131.9

125.1

119.5

 

Retail Banking trading profit before tax

 

2010 compared to 2009

Trading profit before tax increased by £332m to £1,601m (2009: £1,279m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income increased by £351m to £3,237m (2009: £2,886m), largely driven by balanced growth in customer lending and deposits across a mix of products combined with effective margin management. Customer assets increased by £10.1bn or 6% (which includes £5.7bn or 3% from the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses, acquired in October and November 2010, respectively). Customer liabilities increased by £6.8bn or 5%.

The key drivers of the increase in net interest income were improved margins on existing mortgage balances as more customers reverted to standard variable rate mortgages in the current low interest rate environment, and improved margins on new and retained business in both the mortgage and unsecured loan portfolios. These increases more than offset a higher cost of retail deposits, the impact of low interest rates, the cost of new term funding and higher liquid asset balances in response to new regulatory requirements. Net interest income included £75m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses, which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

In terms of mortgage lending, the Group achieved an 18% share of the gross mortgage lending market in the UK in 2010, similar to 2009 and significantly ahead of our market share of mortgage stock of 14%. Lending was written at margins above stock margin and with a continued emphasis on lower loan-to-value segments. In total net lending was £5.6bn.

The growth of customer deposits benefited from a 22% increase in private banking deposits, and a 9% increase in personal bank account liability balances, as well as a good performance in core savings underpinned by a strong tax year and "loyalty" offers.

 

Trading non-interest income decreased by £93m to £627m (2009: £720m), largely due to lower investment fees as a result of the mix of sales shifting away from structured investment products towards managed funds (which will yield a trail income in future periods rather than an upfront commission). In addition, unsecured lending-related fees reduced, driven by lower volumes (which decreased by 20%). Mortgage fees were adversely affected by lower redemption volumes in line with the market and banking fees were affected by the introduction of the Santander Zero account. Non-interest income included £8m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

 

 

 

Trading expenses increased by £36m to £1,649m (2009: £1,613m). The increase was largely due to the inclusion of £37m of expenses relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively. In addition, depreciation and amortisation increased by £32m as a result of the continued investment in IT systems in Santander UK in 2009 and 2010 including the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

The removal of duplication across back office and support functions due to the integration of Alliance & Leicester and the Bradford & Bingley savings business has resulted in further cost savings. Within this framework, the synergy benefits realised have been re-invested to fund growth initiatives across the Group, including the ongoing recruitment in Retail Banking operations to support business growth and improve customer service.

 

Trading impairment losses on loans and advances decreased by £99m to £615m (2009: £714m), with the most significant reduction relating to mortgages. This improving performance in difficult economic conditions has been delivered as a result of a high quality mortgage book, effective collection handling and reductions in arrears levels, particularly in the second half of 2010.

Similarly, performance across the unsecured portfolios also improved in the year. However, the commercial mortgages book demonstrated some stress from the adverse market conditions. Impairment losses on loans and advances included £33m relating to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Trading profit before tax increased by £171m to £1,279m (2008: £1,108m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income increased by £633m to £2,886m (2008: £2,253m) largely driven by balanced growth in customer lending and deposits across a mix of products combined with effective margin management, as well as a 17% growth in bank account liability balances and hedging strategies which helped to offset the impact of lower interest rates.

In terms of lending, unsecured lending balances continued to decline, but were more than offset by net mortgage lending of £7.6bn in 2009. The increase in mortgage lending resulted in the Group taking an 18% share of the gross mortgage lending market in the UK in 2009, with new lending written at margins above the existing loan stock margin and with an emphasis on lower Loan-to-Value segments.

In addition, income from existing mortgage balances increased as more customers reverted to standard variable rate mortgages, and margins improved in both the mortgage and unsecured loan portfolios in the low interest environment.

 

Trading non-interest income decreased by £128m to £720m (2008: £848m), largely due to lower fees on unsecured lending products, as part of our stated strategy to reduce unsecured lending exposures, as well as lower fees from current accounts due to repricing. In addition, mortgage fees were adversely impacted by a reduction in the volume of mortgage redemptions given decreased activity in the market as a result of declining house prices and lower levels of supply.

 

Trading expenses increased by £62m to £1,613m (2008: £1,551m). £98m of the increase was due to costs related to Bradford & Bingley's savings business since its acquisition in September 2008. The remaining decrease of £36m was largely due to the removal of duplications across back office and support functions due to the integration of Alliance & Leicester and Bradford & Bingley's savings business.

 

Trading impairment losses on loans and advances increased by £272m to £714m (2008: £442m) and were distributed across all products, with the largest increase relating to mortgages as the impact of falling house prices and the lagging effect of unemployment, as expected, started to emerge. Most of the impact came through in the first half of the year, with the second half performance stabilising and in some areas improving.

With respect to mortgages, the second half of the year saw a slower rate of growth in arrears, with fewer losses than observed earlier in the year, in part as a result of collection activities and mitigating actions taken, but also due to the low interest rate environment and the slight upturn in house prices. A strong mortgage coverage ratio of close to 20% was preserved.

 

 

Retail Banking segment balances

 

2010 compared to 2009

At 31 December 2010, risk weighted assets of £40.0bn were 16% higher than the previous year reflecting the growth in assets described below. Excluding the impact of acquisitions, the decrease in the year was broadly flat.

 

At 31 December 2010, customer assets of £177.8bn were 6% higher than the previous year reflecting the growth in mortgage balances and acquired businesses. Of the increase, £5.7bn or 3% related to the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which were acquired in October and November 2010, respectively. The remaining growth was driven by mortgages (balances up 3%) underpinned by strong gross mortgage lending and success in retention activities. Partly offsetting this growth was the continued reduction in unsecured personal lending ('UPL') balances, which decreased by 19%, where the focus continued to be on lending to existing customers with proven repayment track records.

 

At 31 December 2010, customer deposits of £131.9bn were 5% higher than the previous year, a strong performance given the increasingly competitive market. The ISA season in 2010 was particularly successful, while a focus on bank accounts, and specifically higher value, primary accounts, resulted in a 9% increase in personal bank account liabilities. In addition, private banking customer deposits increased by 22% with strong performance in our onshore and offshore operations.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

At 31 December 2009, risk weighted assets of £34.6bn were 18% lower than the previous year reflecting enhancements to Retail IRB models.

 

At 31 December 2009, customer assets of £167.7bn were 4% higher than the previous year reflecting the growth in mortgage balances. This was partly offset by the continuing reduction in UPL balances, which decreased by 26%.

 

At 31 December 2009, customer deposits increased by 5% to £125.1bn. Net inflows benefitted from the alignment of product marketing and pricing strategies across the brands, including the introduction of Abbey products, such as fixed rate bonds and Individual Savings Accounts, and promotional activity in Bradford & Bingley branches.

 

 

Corporate Banking

 

Santander UK started to develop its corporate banking capability in 2006, with the acquisition of Alliance & Leicester significantly increasing this capability in 2008. The investment in, and development of, these operations has been significant, with good progress being made ahead of the acquisition of certain customers from The Royal Bank of Scotland.

Corporate Banking provides a range of banking services principally to SME UK companies (with turnover between £1m and £25m) through its network of 25 Corporate Business Centres and specialist businesses. A broad range of banking products is offered including loans, bank accounts, deposits, treasury services, asset finance, cash transmission, trade finance and invoice discounting. The specialist businesses within Corporate Banking service customers in various business sectors including Real Estate, Social Housing, and Infrastructure. Corporate Banking is also responsible certain non-core portfolios, including aviation and shipping.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net interest income

212

212

149

Non-interest income

129

128

240

Total trading income

341

340

389

Total trading expenses

(151)

(181)

(239)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(97)

(31)

(44)

Trading profit before tax

93

128

106

Adjust for:

 - A&L pre-acquisition trading basis results

-

-

(2)

 - Capital and other charges

(21)

(30)

(14)

Statutory profit before tax

72

98

90

Segment balances

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

Risk weighted assets

19.3

17.0

17.4

Total customer assets

22.5

21.2

20.6

Core customer assets(1)

18.7

16.3

14.4

Customer deposits

16.4

14.4

7.1

Total SMEs (2)

8.5

6.7

5.8

(1) Excludes non-core portfolios

(2) Includes commercial mortgages managed within Retail Banking, which form part of the SME market.

 

Corporate Banking trading profit before tax

 

2010 compared to 2009

Trading profit before tax decreased by £35m to £93m (2009: £128m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income of £212m was in line with the prior year. Net interest income increased as a result of growth in customer loans and deposits to the UK SME market through our network of 25 Corporate Business Centres (SME lending balances increased by 26% and total deposit balances increased by 15%). Net interest margins on loans continued to improve during 2010 as market pricing better reflected incremental higher funding and liquidity costs applied to the business unit. This was offset by a reduced contribution of £20m from the non-core portfolio as Corporate Banking continued to reduce the balances of non-core assets.

 

Trading non-interest income of £129m was broadly in line with prior year. Asset growth in the core business and strong sales of Global Banking & Markets products resulted in higher fees. However, this was offset by lower fees in non-core businesses as Corporate Banking continued to reduce balances in the non-core portfolio.

 

Trading expenses decreased by £30m to £151m (2009: £181m). The decrease was due to operational efficiencies arising from the integration of Alliance & Leicester, partially offset by investment in the Corporate Business Centre network. The investment included hiring an additional 136 staff over the last twelve months and an increase of 70% in the floor space of the Corporate Business Centre network.

 

Trading impairment losses on loans and advances increased by £66m to £97m (2009: £31m). The increase reflected growth and maturity in asset balances over the last two years and some deterioration arising from market conditions. The non-core Corporate Banking portfolios continued to perform in line with our original expectations, with existing impairment loss allowances expected to be sufficient to cover losses inherent in the portfolios.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Trading profit before tax increased by £22m to £128m (2008: £106m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income improved by £63m to £212m (2008: £149m). This increase reflected the impact of the sale of the Porterbrook businesses early in December 2008 (net interest income in 2008 included interest expense of £76m incurred by the Porterbrook businesses, whereas its associated leasing income and depreciation were classified as non-interest income). In addition, 2009 reflected some benefit from higher asset margins as new business lending and pricing was altered to reflect the market environment in terms of increased funding costs. Net interest income also improved as a result of robust growth of both assets and liabilities. However, these were offset by the adverse impact of changes to transfer pricing arrangements to reflect higher costs of new term funding and liquid asset balances.

 

Trading non-interest income decreased by £112m to £128m (2008: £240m), reflecting the inclusion in non-interest income in 2008 of the leasing income and depreciation relating to the Porterbrook businesses which were sold early in December 2008. In addition, new business lending generated increases in both fees and cross-selling of Global Banking & Markets products.

 

Trading expenses decreased by £58m to £181m (2008: £239m). The decrease was due to operational efficiencies arising from the integration of Alliance & Leicester, and the sale of the Porterbrook business.

 

Trading impairment losses on loans and advances decreased by £13m to £31m (2008: £44m). The low level of impairment losses was a reflection of prudent lending criteria on the relatively immature growth businesses and portfolios (such as SME lending within Corporate Banking). It also reflected the impairment loss allowances made on acquisition relating to the non-core portfolios (including aviation and shipping) to reflect expected losses in those portfolios as required under acquisition accounting. The decrease of £13m also reflected the non-recurrence in 2009 of Corporate Banking impairment loss allowance releases in 2008 relating to non-core businesses offset by some deterioration arising from market conditions.

 

 

 

Corporate Banking segment balances

 

2010 compared to 2009

At 31 December 2010, risk weighted assets of £19.3bn were 14% higher than the previous year reflecting the growth in assets described below.

 

At 31 December 2010, core customer assets of £18.7bn were 15% higher than the previous year driven by a strong performance via our 25 Corporate Business Centres and a broader product offering. We continued to build our growing SME franchise, with lending to this group totalling £8.5bn (including £2.2bn recorded in Retail Banking), an increase of 26% compared to 31 December 2009.

 

Customer deposits increased 14% to £16.4bn compared to 31 December 2009 despite increased competition in this market, with the net flows achieved while improving the average term.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

At 31 December 2009, risk weighted assets of £17.0bn were 2% lower than the previous year reflecting a reduction in non-core assets.

 

At 31 December 2009, core customer assets of £16.3bn were 13% higher than the previous year driven by a strong performance via our 25 Corporate Business Centres. Lending to SMEs amounted to £6.7bn (including £2.2bn recorded in Retail Banking), an increase of more than 16% compared to 31 December 2008.

 

Customer deposits more than doubled to £14.4bn compared to 31 December 2008 driven by strong levels of investment by customers seeking to invest with banks with strong credit ratings.

 

 

Global Banking & Markets

 

Global Banking & Markets is a financial markets business focused on providing value added financial services to large corporates not serviced by Corporate Banking (being, in general, large multinationals) and financial institutions, as well as to the rest of Santander UK's business (including the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking divisions). It is structured into five main product areas: Rates, Foreign exchange and money markets, Equity, Credit and Transaction Banking. In addition, large and complex clients are covered by teams organised along industry lines. Rates covers sales and trading activity for fixed income products. Equity covers equity derivatives, property derivatives and commodities. Foreign exchange offers a range of foreign exchange products and money markets runs the securities lending/borrowing and repo businesses. Equity derivatives activities include the manufacture of structured products sold to retail and corporate customers of both the Group and of other financial institutions who sell them on to their customers. Credit originates loan and bond transactions in primary markets as well as their intermediation in secondary markets. Transaction Banking provides lending and cash management services, including deposit taking and trade finance.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net interest income

6

7

11

Non-interest income

412

382

327

Total trading income

418

389

338

Total trading expenses

(130)

(104)

(107)

Trading profit before tax

288

285

231

Adjust for:

- A&L pre-acquisition trading basis results

-

-

(10)

Statutory profit before tax

288

285

221

Segment balances

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

Risk weighted assets

7.1

6.8

7.8

Customer assets

1.8

1.1

0.9

Total assets

50.0

44.8

44.5

Customer deposits

5.1

4.4

2.4

 

Global Banking & Markets trading profit before tax

 

2010 compared to 2009

Trading profit before tax increased by £3m to £288m (2009: £285m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income decreased by £1m to £6m (2009: £7m) due to increased funding costs offsetting customer asset growth.

 

Trading non-interest income increased by £30m to £412m (2009: £382m) reflecting the strong performance of underlying customer revenue streams and a number of non-recurring releases of fair value adjustments following the successful de-risking of underlying positions. These benefits were partly offset by a less favourable trading environment resulting from lower spread volatility.

 

Trading expenses increased by £26m to £130m (2009: £104m), reflecting ongoing investment in growth initiatives relating to new products, markets and customer segments. There was a 38% increase in headcount across the customer transaction businesses, including the new Gilt Edge Market Making desk.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Trading profit before tax increased by £54m to £285m (2008: £231m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income decreased by £4m to £7m (2008: £11m) reflecting a reduction in loan balances during the year.

 

Trading non-interest income increased by £55m to £382m (2008: £327m) reflecting strong performances in the equity business (linked to sales of retail products through the branch network) and short term markets business, which benefited from a favourable trading environment available from wider spreads in an illiquid market.

 

Trading expenses of £104m were slightly lower than the previous year (2008: £107m) reflecting strong expense management whilst increasing income.

 

 

Global Banking & Markets segment balances

 

2010 compared to 2009

At 31 December 2010, risk-weighted assets of £7.1bn were 4% higher than the previous year reflecting the increased asset balances set out below.

 

Total assets increased by 12% to £50.0bn compared to 31 December 2009, primarily reflecting increases in the fair values of derivatives, as well as increased customer business in the year.

 

Customer assets increased by 64% to £1.8bn compared to 31 December 2009, primarily due to customer drawings on revolving credit facilities towards the end of the year.

 

Customer deposits increased 16% to £5.1bn compared to 31 December 2009. Net flows for the year were positive, with an improvement in quality and term.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

At 31 December 2009, risk-weighted assets of £6.8bn were 13% lower than the previous year reflecting a reduction in market risk positions.

 

Total assets increased by 1% to £44.8bn compared to 31 December 2008, reflecting increased secured lending in the repo market as a result of increased liquidity in the Group.

 

Customer assets decreased 22% to £1.1bn compared to 31 December 2008, reflecting lower customer drawings on revolving credit facilities.

 

Customer deposits increased by 84% to £4.4bn compared to 31 December 2008 reflecting strong levels of reinvestment by customers, as investors sought to invest in banks with strong credit ratings.

 

 

 

 Group Infrastructure

 

Group Infrastructure consists of Asset and Liability Management ('ALM'), which is also responsible for Group capital and funding, and the Treasury asset portfolio that is being run down. ALM is responsible for managing the Group's structural balance sheet composition and strategic and tactical liquidity risk management. This includes short-term, medium-term, covered bond and securitisation funding programmes. ALM's responsibilities also include management of Santander UK's banking products and structural exposure to interest rates.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net interest income/(expense)

302

236

(24)

Non-interest (expense)/income

(55)

87

90

Total trading income

247

323

66

Total trading expenses

(48)

(46)

(43)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(40)

(57)

(3)

Trading profit before tax

159

220

20

Adjust for:

 - A&L pre-acquisition trading basis results

-

-

102

 - Reorganisation and other costs

40

(40)

(42)

 - Profit on part sale and revaluation of subsidiaries

126

-

40

 - Hedging and other variances

4

(19)

(76)

 - Capital and other charges

120

90

81

Statutory profit before tax

449

251

125

 

 

Group Infrastructure trading profit before tax

 

2010 compared to 2009

Trading profit before tax decreased by £61m to £159m (2009: £220m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income increased by £66m to £302m (2009: £236m). The income reflected benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital, and the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business.

This was partially offset by a decrease in net interest income from the James Hay business which was sold in March 2010. In addition, net interest income from the run-down Treasury asset portfolio decreased due to the continued de-leveraging process, with balances reduced by 46% in the year, to £5.1bn at the year end.

 

Trading non-interest (expense)/income decreased by £142m to £(55)m (2009: £87m), principally due to 2009 including certain one-off benefits not repeated in 2010 (including profits earned on the buy-back of securitisation debt in 2009) and higher losses on disposals of assets in the Treasury asset portfolio which is being run down.

In addition, there was a decrease in non interest income from the James Hay business which was sold in March 2010.

 

Trading expenses increased slightly by £2m to £48m (2009: £46m). Non-recurring expenditure was incurred relating to the rebranding of Abbey and the Bradford & Bingley savings business as Santander in January 2010. In addition, higher expenses resulted from the process of transferring the business of Alliance & Leicester plc to Santander UK plc under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 in May 2010. However, these additional expenses were offset in part by savings due to the sale of the James Hay business in March 2010.

 

Trading impairment losses on loans and advances decreased by £17m to £40m (2009: £57m). The loss of £40m in 2010 was due to losses on disposals of assets in the Treasury asset portfolio.

 

 

2009 compared to 2008

Trading profit before tax increased by £200m to £220m (2008: £20m). By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Trading net interest income/(expense) increased by £260m to £236m (2008: £(24)m), reflecting the benefit of higher historic medium-term interest rates being earned on capital and the impact of the application of marginal medium-term funding rates to new business and an increasing proportion of the back book to the extent that there has been customer repricing activity by the business.

 

Trading non-interest income decreased by £3m to £87m (2008: £90m), principally due to lower gains in 2009 on the buy-back of debt securities compared to 2008.

 

Trading expenses increased by £3m to £46m (2008: £43m) reflecting a slight increase in central costs following the Transfer of Alliance & Leicester and the acquisition of the Bradford & Bingley savings business.

 

Trading impairment losses on loans and advances increased by £54m to £57m (2008: £3m) due to the inclusion of the Treasury asset portfolio. These losses were offset by the income on the portfolio, which was classified in net interest income.

 

 

Adjustments between the statutory basis and the trading basis

 

Santander UK's Board reviews discrete financial information for each of its segments that includes measures of operating results, assets and liabilities, which are measured on a 'trading' basis. The trading basis differs from the statutory basis as a result of the application of various adjustments, as presented below, and described in the Business Review - Summary. Management considers that the trading basis provides the most appropriate way of reviewing the performance of the business.

The trading adjustments consist of:

 

 

A&L pre-acquisition trading basis results

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

-

-

164

 

The pre-acquisition trading basis results of Alliance & Leicester for the year ended 31 December 2008 are included in the results discussed in the "Business Review - Divisional Results". The pre-acquisition non-trading adjustments of Alliance & Leicester for the year ended 31 December 2008 of £(1,452)m have not been included. This adjustment applies only to 2008 as the results of Alliance & Leicester are fully consolidated in the 2010 and 2009 statutory results.

 

 

Reorganisation and other costs

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Reorganisation and customer remediation costs

155

146

121

Impairment losses on loans and advances

(40)

40

42

115

186

163

 

These costs comprise implementation costs in relation to the strategic change and cost reduction process, costs in respect of customer remediation and certain impairment losses taken centrally.

 

2010 compared to 2009

Total reorganisation and other costs of £115m decreased by £71m compared to the previous period (2009: £186m).

Reorganisation and customer remediation costs increased by £9m reflecting a decrease in costs relating to the strategic change and cost reduction process as it nears completion being more than offset by an increase in customer remediation costs.

Non-trading impairment loss releases of £40m in 2010 represented the release of impairment losses recognised in prior years, with assets previously held in the Group's Conduit vehicles sold at better than expected prices.

 

2009 compared to 2008

Total reorganisation and other costs of £186m increased by £23m compared to the previous period (2008: £163m).

Reorganisation and customer remediation costs increased by £25m reflecting the cost of restructuring and rebranding following the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Company in 2009 and the acquisition of the Bradford & Bingley savings business in September 2008. This was partially offset by a decrease in customer remediation costs.

Non-trading impairment losses of £40m in 2009 represent impairment losses recognised on the consolidation of the assets of the Group's Conduit vehicles. The 2008 charge of £42m relates to retail impairment losses.

 

 

Profit on part sale and revaluation of subsidiaries

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

126

-

40

 

These profits are excluded from the trading results to allow management to understand the underlying performance of the business. In 2010, the profit that arose on the revaluation of the Group's original holding in Santander Consumer (UK) plc on the acquisition of the remaining shares by the Group was excluded from the trading results. In addition, profits on the sale of James Hay and certain other businesses were excluded. In 2009, there were no such profits. In 2008, the profit on the sale of the Porterbrook businesses was excluded from the trading results.

 

 

Hedging and other variances

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

27

36

84

 

The Balance Sheet and Income Statement are subject to mark-to-market volatility including that arising from the accounting for elements of derivatives deemed under IFRS rules to be ineffective as hedges. Volatility also arises on certain assets previously managed on a fair value basis, and hence classified as fair value through profit or loss under IFRS, that are now managed on an accruals basis.

In addition, other variances include the reversal of coupon payments on certain equity instruments which are treated as an interest expense in the trading results but are reported below the profit after tax line for statutory purposes.

 

2010 compared to 2009

In 2010 and 2009, this largely consisted of hedge ineffectiveness, partially offset by the reversal of £57m of coupon payments on certain preference shares, Perpetual Preferred Securities and Reserve Capital Instrumentswhich were treated as interest expense in the trading results but were accounted for as dividends for statutory purposes in both 2010 and 2009. In addition, in 2009substantial mark-to-market gains which arose in the second half of 2008 from movements in interest rates reversed.

 

2009 compared to 2008

In 2009, substantial mark-to-market gains which arose in the second half of 2008 from movements in interest rates reversed. These were partly offset by the reversal of losses due to widening asset spreads in 2008 as credit spreads narrowed. In addition, 2009 includes a credit of £57m relating to non-controlling interests and Reserve Capital Instruments which are treated as interest expense on a trading basis.

 

 

Capital and other charges

 

Capital charges/(credits) principally comprise internal nominal charges/(credits) for capital invested in the Group's businesses. Management implemented this charge/(credit) to assess if capital is invested effectively. On a consolidated basis, the total of these internal reallocations is £nil.

 

 

Legal proceedings

 

Santander UK is party to various legal proceedings in the ordinary course of business, the ultimate resolution of which is not expected to have a material adverse effect on the financial position or the results of operations of Santander UK. See Note 38 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

Material contracts

 

Santander UK is party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business. For the three years ended 31 December 2010 there have been no material contracts entered into outside the ordinary course of business, except for the contracts described below.

On 9 January 2009, in order to optimise the capital, liquidity funding and overall financial efficiency of the enlarged group,Banco Santander, S.A. transferred all of its Alliance & Leicester plc shares to the Company in exchange for newly issued ordinary shares of the Company.

On 19 March 2009, the Company gave a full and unconditional guarantee in respect of the unsubordinated liabilities of Alliance & Leicester plc incurred prior to 31 July 2012 under a deed poll guarantee entered into by the Company. Alliance & Leicester plc has given a reciprocal guarantee in respect of the unsubordinated liabilities of the Company incurred prior to 31 July 2012. This reciprocal guarantee has since been transferred to the Company (and thereby unwound) under power granted by the court order which approved Alliance & Leicester plc's business transfer scheme under Part VII of the Financial Services and Market Act 2000 in May 2010.

 

 

Audit fees

 

See Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Balance Sheet Business Review 

 

Throughout this section, references to UK and non-UK, in the geographic analysis, refer to the location of the office where the transaction is recorded.

 

Summary

 

This balance sheet business review describes the Group's significant assets and liabilities and its strategy and reasons for entering into such transactions. The balance sheet business review is divided into the following sections:

 

Summarised consolidated balance sheet - A summarised consolidated balance sheet is presented with commentary on key movements. A more detailed consolidated balance sheet is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

In the remaining sections of the Balance Sheet Business Review, the principal assets and liabilities are summarised by their nature, rather than by their classification in the balance sheet.

 

Securities - The Group's strategies and reasons for holding securities are described on pages 48 and 49, as well as:

Analysis by type of issuer, as well as a maturity analysis for available-for-sale debt securities

Significant exposures exceeding 10% of the Group's shareholders' funds.

Loans and advances to banks - These assets are described on pages 49 and 50, consisting of:

Geographical analysis further analysed between UK and non-UK.

Maturity analysis further analysed geographically and by interest rate sensitivity.

Loans and advances to customers - These assets are described on pages 50 to 54, consisting of:

Geographical analysis between UK and non-UK, further analysed by product.

Maturity analysis further analysed geographically, by product and by interest rate sensitivity.

Impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers - cross references are provided to detailed disclosures about the Group's policy and analyses of impairment loss allowances.

Risk elements in the loan portfolio - including potential problem loans and cross border outstandings.

Country risk exposures analysed between central and local governments, government guaranteed, bank and financial institutions, retail and corporate customers.

Derivative assets and liabilities - The Group's derivative positions are summarised on page 54. Cross references are provided to other disclosures about the Group's strategies and reasons for entering into derivative transactions and further detailed analysis of derivative notional amounts and assets and liabilities by type of contract.

Tangible fixed assets - A summary of the Group's capital expenditure during the year, together with details of the Group's property interests and principal sites are described on pages 54 and 55.

Deposits by banks - These liabilities are summarised on page 55, including average balances during the year, with further analysis geographically.

Deposits by customers - These liabilities are summarised on pages 55 and 56, including average balances during the year, with further analyses geographically and by customer type.

Short-term borrowings - These liabilities are summarised on pages 56 and 57, including average balances, maximum balances during the year and related average interest rates.

Debt securities in issue - The liabilities are summarised on page 57, including cross references to detailed descriptions of the major issuance programmes.

Retirement benefit obligations - The Group's pension deficit is set out on page 57. Cross references are provided to other disclosures about the Group's retirement benefit obligations.

Contractual obligations - A contractual maturity analysis of the Group's obligations is set out on page 58.

Off-balance sheet arrangements - The Group's off-balance sheet arrangements, including guarantees, commitments, contingencies, and exposures to off-balance sheet entities sponsored by the Group are described on pages 58 and 59.

Capital management and resources - The Group's approach to capital management and resources is set out on pages 59 to 61, as well as Pillar 3 disclosures, capital ratios, regulatory capital resources and requirements.

Funding and Liquidity - These arrangements are described on pages 61 to 64, including a summary of the sources and uses, together with commentary on the Group's cash flows for the past three years.

Interest rate sensitivity - An analysis of changes in the Group's interest income, interest expense and net interest income between changes in volume and changes in rate is presented on page 65.

Average balance sheets - As period-end statements may not be representative of the Group's activity throughout the year, average balance sheets for the Group are presented on page 66. The average balance sheets summarise the significant categories of assets and liabilities, together with average interest rates.

 

 

Summarised Consolidated Balance Sheet

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Assets

Cash and balances at central banks

26,502

4,163

4,017

Trading assets

35,461

33,290

26,264

Derivative financial instruments

24,377

22,827

35,125

Financial assets designated at fair value

6,777

12,358

11,377

Loans and advances to banks

3,852

9,151

16,001

Loans and advances to customers

195,132

186,804

180,176

Available for sale securities

175

797

2,663

Loans and receivables securities

3,610

9,898

14,107

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

1,091

1,127

2,188

Property, plant and equipment

1,705

1,250

1,202

Tax, intangibles and other assets

4,178

3,626

4,190

Total assets

302,860

285,291

297,310

Liabilities

Deposits by banks

7,784

5,811

14,488

Deposits by customers

152,643

143,893

130,245

Derivative financial instruments

22,405

18,963

27,810

Trading liabilities

42,827

46,152

40,738

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

3,687

4,423

5,673

Debt securities in issue

51,783

47,758

58,511

Subordinated liabilities

6,372

6,949

8,863

Retirement benefit obligations

173

1,070

813

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

2,912

3,050

3,472

Total liabilities

290,586

278,069

290,613

Equity

Total shareholders' equity

12,274

6,506

5,986

Non-controlling interests

-

716

711

Total equity

12,274

7,222

6,697

Total liabilities and equity

302,860

285,291

297,310

 

A more detailed consolidated balance sheet is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

31 December 2010 compared to 31 December 2009

 

Assets

 

Cash and balances at central banks

Cash and balances held at central banks increased to £26,502m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £4,163m). Higher balances were maintained with the Bank of England and the US Federal Reserve as part of the increase in the Group's stock of liquid assets.

 

Trading assets

Trading assets increased by 7% to £35,461m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £33,290m). The increase reflected higher holdings of debt securities and even greater repurchase agreement ('reverse repo') activity relating to OECD government securities as part of the Group's liquidity management activities. Other reverse repo activity reduced in view of the focus on government security repo activity.

 

Derivative assets

Derivative assets increased by 7% to £24,377m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £22,827m). The increase was driven by an increase in interest rate derivatives as a result of downward shifts in yield curves.

 

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss decreased by 45% to £6,777m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £12,358m). The decrease principally reflected the maturity of £2,220m of bank certificates of deposit and the sale of euro 3,265m of Santander UK's holdings of AAA-rated prime mortgage-backed securities.

 

Loans and advances to banks

Loans and advances to banks decreased by 58% to £3,852m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £9,151m) due to the repayment of substantially all of Santander UK's loans to other members of the Santander group.

 

Loans and advances to customers

Loans and advances to customers increased by 4% to £195,132m (2009: £186,804m), reflecting net mortgage lending of £5.6bn, growth in corporate lending of £1.3bn and the impact of the acquisition of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses with aggregate customer balances of £5.7bn. In addition, loans to non-bank Santander group companies decreased to £57m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £4,457m). This was due to the acquisition of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses which resulted in the loans funding these companies in 2009 being eliminated on consolidation.

 

Available for sale securities

Available for sale securities decreased by 78% to £175m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £797m). The decrease was due to the sale of the available-for-sale securities as part of the injection of funds directly into the defined benefit pension scheme in 2010.

 

Loans and receivable securities

Loans and receivable securities decreased by 64% to £3,610m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £9,898m). The decrease principally reflected the run-down of the Treasury asset portfolio as part of the ongoing de-leveraging process.

 

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

The macro (or portfolio) hedge decreased by 3% to £1,091m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £1,127m) mainly due to increases in interest rates.

 

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment increased by 36% to £1,705m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £1,250m). The increase principally reflected the Group's acquisition of freehold and leasehold properties for a consideration of £526m in the year. The properties consisted of retail branches that the Group had previously leased. See Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The remaining capital expenditure during the year was principally incurred by Retail Banking (mostly consisting of computer infrastructure, computer software and furniture and fittings for branches) and by Corporate Banking (consisting of operating lease assets). These increases were partly offset by the depreciation charge for the year.

 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

Tax, intangibles and other assets increased by 15% to £4,178m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £3,626m). The increase was principally driven by higher goodwill as a result of the acquisition of the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses. This was partly offset by a reduction in tax assets associated with the retirement benefit obligation liability.

 

Liabilities

 

Deposits by banks

Deposits by banks increased 34% to £7,784m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £5,811m). The increase was driven by the issuance of new medium term repurchase agreements as part of the Group's medium to long term funding.

 

Deposits by customers

Deposits by customers increased by 6% to £152,643m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £143,893m) due to inflows across core savings, banking, private banking and corporate customers.

 

Derivatives

Derivative liabilities increased by 18% to £22,405m at31 December 2010 (2009: £18,963m). The increase was driven by an increase in interest rate derivatives as a result of downward shifts in yield curves.

 

Trading liabilities

Trading liabilities decreased by 7% to £42,827m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £46,152m). The decrease reflected lower non government security repo activity.

 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

Financial liabilities designated at fair value decreased by 17% to £3,687m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £4,423m). The decrease reflected repayments in the US$20bn Euro Medium Term Note ('EMTN') programme partly offset by currency movements.

 

Debt securities in issue

Debt securities in issue increased by 8% to £51,783m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £47,758m). The increase reflected the Group's strategy of increasing the level of medium-term funding through the issuance of debt in the Fosse securitisation and Covered Bond programmes. These increases were partially offset by the maturity of debt within the former Alliance & Leicester US$40bn EMTN programme as a decision was taken in 2009 that no further issuances would be made under this programme.

 

Subordinated liabilities

Subordinated liabilities decreased by 8% to £6,372m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £6,949m). The decrease reflected the scheduled redemption of subordinated notes.

 

Retirement benefit obligations

Retirement benefit obligations decreased by 84% to £173m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £1,070m). The principal reason for the reduction was the payment of contributions to the defined benefit pension schemes of £955m by the Group and fellow Santander subsidiaries, with significant improvements in market values since June 2010. 

 

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

Tax, other liabilities and provisions decreased by 5% to £2,912m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £3,050m). The decrease reflected a reduction in trade and other payables, partly offset by an increase in current tax liabilities.

 

Equity

 

Total shareholders equity, including non-controlling interests, increased by 70% to £12,274m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £7,222m), primarily as a result of the injection of equity of £4,456m by the Santander group, as well as the inclusion of profits after tax of £1,583m. This was partly offset by dividends declared of £832m.

 

 

31 December 2009 compared to 31 December 2008

 

Assets

 

Cash and balances at central banks

Cash and balances held at central banks increased by 3.6% to £4,163m at 31 December 2009. At the end of 2008, cash balances were higher than in previous years as a result of surplus cash generated from the purchase of the Bradford & Bingley savings business late in 2008 which had not yet been reinvested. During 2009, this higher cash level was deliberately maintained, consistent with the industry trend towards global liquidity creation by central banks, particularly in Europe and North America.

 

Trading assets

Trading assets increased by 27% to £33,290m at 31 December 2009. The increase reflected higher levels of reverse repo activity with non-bank counterparties, partly offset by a decrease in balances with central banks classified as trading assets representing a reverse repo which has since matured. Debt securities remained largely unchanged, although there was a shift from bank certificates of deposit to government-guaranteed floating rate notes due to the enhanced risk-adjusted yield.

 

Derivative assets

Derivative assets decreased by 35% to £22,827m at 31 December 2009. There were reductions across all classes of derivatives, notably interest rate and foreign exchange instruments. The reductions reflected the effect of changes in the sterling-US dollar and sterling-euro exchange rates, tightening credit spreads and steeper currency yield curves during the year.

 

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

The portfolio increased by 8.6% at 31 December 2009 due to certain bank certificates of deposit being held for yield purposes, rather than being held on a trading basis, partly offset by scheduled repayments of mortgage-backed securities.

 

Loans and advances to banks

Loans and advances to banks decreased by 43% to £9,151m at 31 December 2009 due to the 2008 balance including the temporary investment of surplus liquidity which in 2009 was used to reduce short-term borrowings.

 

Loans and advances to customers

Loans and advances to customers increased by 3.7% at 31 December 2009 due to increased mortgage lending. New corporate lending was offset by repayments from the non-core corporate portfolios.

 

Available for sale securities

Available for sale securities decreased by 70% at 31 December 2009 as a result of the acquired Alliance & Leicester portfolio of available-for-sale financial assets that was previously held for liquidity purposes maturing and not being replaced as Santander UK actively manages the Group liquidity position through the overall securities position in the trading portfolio.

 

Loans and receivable securities

Loans and receivables securities decreased by 30% at 31 December 2009. The securities represented the Treasury asset portfolio which is being run down. The reduction in the balance reflected the continuing de-leveraging process.

 

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

The macro (or portfolio) hedge decreased by 49% to £1,127m at 31 December 2009, mainly due to increases in interest rates.

 

Property, plant and equipment

Capital expenditure during the year was principally incurred by Retail Banking (mostly consisting of computer infrastructure, computer software and furniture and fittings for branches) and by Corporate Banking (consisting of operating lease assets).

 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

Tax, intangibles and other assets decreased by 13.5% at 31 December 2009, primarily due to a decrease of 26% in deferred tax assets as a result of decreases in temporary differences, accelerated book depreciation and tax losses carried forward.

 

Liabilities

 

Deposits by banks

In 2009, deposits by banks decreased by £8,677m. The key reason for this decrease was the maturity of Sale and Repurchase agreement liabilities to nil at 31 December 2009 from £8,816m at 31 December 2008 that Alliance & Leicester were using for short term funding purposes. These were not replaced as Santander UK managed its short term funding through the issuance of Sale and Repurchase agreements in the trading portfolio as well as the issuance of commercial paper and certificates of deposit.

 

Deposits by customers

In 2009, deposits by customers increased by £13,648m, due to inflows across core savings, banking, private banking and corporate customers.

 

Derivatives

Derivative businesses are managed within market risk limits and, as a consequence, the reduction in the value of derivative liabilities broadly matches that of derivative assets. At 31 December 2009, derivative liabilities totalled £18,963m, a decrease of £8,847m since 31 December 2008. The effect of changes in the sterling-US dollar and sterling-euro exchange rates, tightening credit spreads and steeper currency yield curves led to a fall in the fair value of derivatives during the year.

 

Trading liabilities

The debt securities in issue classified as trading liabilities increased by 13% to £46,152m at 31 December 2009. The increase was due to a 19% increase in deposits by banks. This reflected the higher repo trading activity.

 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

In 2009, balances decreased due to repayments and the effect of exchange rate movements mainly within the US$20bn EMTN programme.

 

Debt securities in issue

In 2009, debt securities in issue decreased as part of the Group's strategy to reduce the level of short-term wholesale funding. The key movement was in the securitisation programmes which reduced due to the lack of new issuances in 2009. In addition the Alliance & Leicester Covered Bond programme was closed as part of the integration of the business and the decision was taken that no further issuances would be made under the Alliance & Leicester US$40bn EMTN programme. Partly offsetting these movements was an increase in the Commercial Paper programme and the impact of movements in exchange rates.

 

Subordinated liabilities

In 2009, subordinated liabilities decreased due to the redemption of the 5.00% subordinated bonds 2009 (euro 511m) and the reclassification as equity of the £300m Reserve Capital Instruments. Subordinated liabilities also decreased due to the effect of changes in exchange rates on the Group's securities denominated in foreign currencies.

 

Retirement benefit obligations

In 2009, the total net deficit on the Group's retirement benefit obligation schemes increased to £1,070m from £813m at 31 December 2008. The key reason for the increase was a reduction of 100 basis points in the net discount rate used to value the defined benefit scheme liabilities. The increase in assumed inflation also impacted the expected rate of pension increase, leading to a further increase in scheme liabilities. These increases were partly offset by employer contributions and improved asset values.

 

Tax, other liabilities, and provisions

Tax, other liabilities and provisions decreased by 12% to £3,050m at 31 December 2009. Deferred tax liabilities decreased marginally to £336m, and current tax liabilities decreased by £218m. Other liabilities remained largely unchanged at £2,323m and provisions decreased by 56% to £91m primarily due to utilisation during the year.

 

Equity

 

Total shareholders equity, including non-controlling interests, increased 8% to £7,222m at 31 December 2009, primarily as a result of the inclusion of profits after tax of £1,245m and the reclassification as equity of £300m Reserve Capital Instruments. This was partly offset by actuarial losses on retirement benefit obligations of £606m before tax and dividends of £571m.

 

Reconciliation to classifications in the consolidated balance sheet

 

The classifications of assets and liabilities in the Group's consolidated balance sheet, including the note reference, and in the balance sheet business review may be reconciled as follows:

 

31 December 2010

Balance sheet business review section

 

Balance sheet line item and note

Note

Loans and advances

to banks

Loans and advances to customers

Securities

Derivatives

Tangible fixed

assets

Other

Balance

sheet total

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

Assets

 

Cash and balances at central banks

12

-

-

-

-

-

26,502

26,502

 

Trading assets

13

8,281

8,659

18,521

-

-

-

35,461

 

Derivative financial instruments

14

-

-

-

24,377

-

-

24,377

 

Financial assets designated at fair value

15

11

5,468

1,298

-

-

-

6,777

 

Loans and advances to banks

16

3,852

-

-

-

-

-

3,852

 

Loans and advances to customers

17

-

195,132

-

-

-

-

195,132

 

Available for sale securities

21

-

-

175

-

-

-

175

 

Loans and receivables securities

22

1,535

2,075

-

-

-

-

3,610

 

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

-

-

-

-

-

1,091

1,091

 

Property, plant and equipment

26

-

-

-

-

1,705

-

1,705

 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

-

-

-

-

-

4,178

4,178

 

Total assets

13,679

211,334

19,994

24,377

1,705

31,771

302,860

 

 

Deposits by banks

Deposits by customers

Debt securities

in issue

Derivatives

Retirement benefit obligations

Other

Balance

sheet total

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

Liabilities

 

Deposits by banks

29

7,784

-

-

-

-

-

7,784

 

Deposits by customers

30

-

152,643

-

-

-

-

152,643

 

Derivative financial instruments

14

-

-

-

22,405

-

-

22,405

 

Trading liabilities

31

25,738

15,971

1,118

-

-

-

42,827

 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

32

-

5

3,682

-

-

-

3,687

 

Debt securities in issue

33

-

-

51,783

-

-

-

51,783

 

Subordinated liabilities

34

-

-

6,372

-

-

-

6,372

 

Retirement benefit obligations

37

-

-

-

-

173

-

173

 

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

-

-

-

-

-

2,912

2,912

 

Total liabilities

33,522

168,619

62,955

22,405

173

2,912

290,586

 

 

31 December 2009

Balance sheet business review section

Balance sheet line item and note

Note

Loans and advances

to banks

Loans and advances to customers

Securities

Derivatives

Tangible fixed

assets

Other

Balance

sheet total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Assets

Cash and balances at central banks

12

-

-

-

-

-

4,163

4,163

Trading assets

13

6,791

9,089

17,410

-

-

-

33,290

Derivative financial instruments

14

-

-

-

22,827

-

-

22,827

Financial assets designated at fair value

15

-

6,379

5,979

-

-

-

12,358

Loans and advances to banks

16

9,151

-

-

-

-

-

9,151

Loans and advances to customers

17

-

186,804

-

-

-

-

186,804

Available for sale securities

21

-

-

797

-

-

-

797

Loans and receivables securities

22

5,751

4,147

-

-

-

-

9,898

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

-

-

-

-

-

1,127

1,127

Property, plant and equipment

26

-

-

-

-

1,250

-

1,250

Tax, intangibles and other assets

-

-

-

-

-

3,626

3,626

Total assets

21,693

206,419

24,186

22,827

1,250

8,916

285,291

Deposits by banks

Deposits by customers

Debt securities

in issue

Derivatives

Retirement benefit obligations

Other

Balance

sheet total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Liabilities

Deposits by banks

29

5,811

-

-

-

-

-

5,811

Deposits by customers

30

-

143,893

-

-

-

-

143,893

Derivative financial instruments

14

-

-

-

18,963

-

-

18,963

Trading liabilities

31

40,824

4,115

1,213

-

-

-

46,152

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

32

45

12

4,366

-

-

-

4,423

Debt securities in issue

33

-

-

47,758

-

-

-

47,758

Subordinated liabilities

34

-

-

6,949

-

-

-

6,949

Retirement benefit obligations

37

-

-

-

-

1,070

-

1,070

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

-

-

-

-

-

3,050

3,050

Total liabilities

46,680

148,020

60,286

18,963

1,070

3,050

278,069

 

 

Securities

 

The Group holds securities for a variety of purposes:

 

As part of its treasury trading and global corporates lending activities, which are managed by the Global Banking & Markets division;

For yield and liquidity purposes, including the Asset and Liability Management portfolio of Group mortgage-backed securities and other asset-backed securities, in Group Infrastructure; and

In the Treasury asset portfolio in Group Infrastructure which is being run down. Securities in this portfolio that are accounted for as loans and receivables (as described in Note 22 to the Consolidated Financial Statements) are disclosed in the Loans and advances to banks and Loans and advances to customers sections of this Balance Sheet Business Review.

 

The following table sets out the book and market values of securities at 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008. For further information, see the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Trading portfolio

Debt securities:

UK Government

3,120

968

191

US treasury and other US Government agencies and corporations

130

628

574

Other OECD governments

3,380

1,273

2,374

Bank and building society:

 - Certificates of deposit - Government guaranteed

-

205

3,119

 - Certificates of deposit - Other

290

1,730

5,266

Other issuers:

- Floating rate notes - Government guaranteed

10,586

8,090

553

- Floating rate notes

315

3,038

4,724

Ordinary shares and similar securities

700

1,478

708

18,521

17,410

17,509

Available for sale securities

Debt securities:

UK Government

125

405

2,383

Other issuers - other

-

342

235

Ordinary shares and similar securities

50

50

45

175

797

2,663

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

Debt securities:

Bank and building society certificates of deposit

-

2,220

-

Other issuers:

 - Mortgage-backed securities

859

574

2,510

 - Other asset-backed securities

187

2,872

1,915

 - Other securities

252

313

265

1,298

5,979

4,690

Total

19,994

24,186

24,862

 

UK Government securities

The holdings of UK Government securities represent Treasury Bills and UK Government guaranteed issues by other UK banks. These securities are held for trading and liquidity purposes.

 

US treasury and other US Government agencies and corporations

The holdings of US treasury and other US Government agencies' and corporations' securities represent US Treasury Bills, including cash management bills. These securities are held for trading and liquidity purposes.

 

Other OECD governments

This category comprises issues by Organisation of Economic Co-operation and Development ('OECD') governments other than the US and UK Governments. These securities are held for trading and liquidity purposes.

 

Bank and building society certificates of deposit and bonds

Bank and building society certificates of deposit are fixed-rate securities with relatively short maturities. These are managed within the overall position for the relevant book. These securities are held for trading and liquidity purposes.

 

Floating rate notes

Floating rate notes have regular interest rate profiles and are either managed within the overall position for the relevant book or are hedged into one of the main currencies. These securities are held for trading and yield purposes.

 

Mortgage-backed securities

This category principally comprises European residential mortgage-backed securities. The European residential mortgage-backed securities are of good quality, contain no sub-prime element andprincipally consist of securities issued by other Santander group companies. These securities are held as part of the Asset and Liability Management Committee portfolio.

 

Other asset-backed securities

This category comprises a range of mostly floating-rate asset-backed securities including home equity loans, commercial mortgages, loans to car dealers, lease and credit card debtors and student loans, as well as a small balance of collateralised synthetic obligations. Some credit card debtors incorporate cap features. These securities are held as part of the investment portfolio.

 

Other securities

This category comprised mainly synthetic floating-rate notes (which are fixed-rate bonds packaged into floating-rate notes by means of swaps tailored to provide a match to the characteristics of the underlying bond), along with a number of structured transactions which were hedged, as appropriate, either on an individual basis or as part of the overall management of the portfolios. The synthetic floating-rate notes comprised bonds issued by banks, financial institutions and corporations, the latter being largely guaranteed by banks and financial institutions. These securities are held for trading and liquidity purposes.

 

The following table sets forth available for sale debt securities by contractual maturity and the related yield at 31 December 2010. Contractual maturities of investments held for trading or classified as fair value through profit or loss are not presented.

 

On demand

£m

In not more than 3 months

£m

In more than 3 months but not more than 1 year

£m

In more than 1 year but not more than 5 years

£m

In more than five years but not more than ten years

£m

In more

than ten

years

£m

Total

£m

UK Government

-

-

125

-

-

-

125

Government Guaranteed

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Weighted average yield for year %

-

-

0.57

-

 

-

-

0.57

 

Significant exposures

 

The following table sets forth the book value (which equals market value) of securities of individual counterparties where the aggregate amount of those securities exceeded 10% of the Group's shareholders' funds at 31 December 2010 as set out in the Consolidated Balance Sheet on page 153. The table also sets forth the classification of the securities in the Consolidated Balance Sheet.

 

Trading assets
Available-for-sale
Total
 
£m
£m
£m
UK Government and UK Government guaranteed
13,011
125
13,136
Schweizerische Nationalbank (National Bank of Switzerland)
3,196
-
3,196

 

 

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

Loans and advances to banks include loans to banks and building societies and balances with central banks (excluding those central bank balances which can be withdrawn on demand).

 

Loans and advances to banks geographical analysis

 

The geographical analysis of loans and advances presented in the following table is based on the location of the office from which the loans and advances are made, rather than the domicile of the borrower. The balances below include loans and advances to banks that are classified in the balance sheet as trading assets, financial assets designated at fair value, or loans and receivables securities.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

UK

13,561

21,606

28,859

12,066

11,943

Non-UK

118

87

3,031

222

 93

13,679

21,693

31,890

12,288

 12,036

 

 

The balances above include loans and advances to other Santander companies from UK offices of £646m (2009:£7,546m, 2008: £9,353m). Further geographical analysis is contained in "Country Risk Exposure" below.

 

Loans and advances to banks maturity analysis

 

The following table sets forth loans and advances to banks by maturity at 31 December 2010.

 

On demand

£m

In not more than three months

£m

In more than three months but not more than one year

£m

In more than one year but not more than five years

£m

In more than five years but not more than ten years

£m

In more than ten

 years

£m

Total

£m

UK

3,676

6,851

1,152

1,252

352

278

13,561

Non-UK

117

1

-

-

-

-

118

Total

3,793

6,852

1,152

1,252

352

278

13,679

Of which:

- Fixed interest rate

255

5,607

704

451

18

108

7,143

- Variable interest rate

2,097

303

448

801

334

170

4,153

- Non interest-bearing

1,441

942

-

-

-

-

2,383

Total

3,793

6,852

1,152

1,252

352

278

13,679

 

 

Loans and advances to customers

 

The Group provides lending facilities primarily to personal customers in the form of mortgages secured on residential properties and lending facilities to corporate customers. Purchase and resale agreements represent sale and repurchase activity with professional non-bank customers by the Global Banking & Markets Short Term Markets business.

 

Loans and advances to customers geographical analysis

 

The geographical analysis of loans and advances presented in the following table is based on the location of the office from which the loans and advances are made. The balances below are stated before the deduction for impairment loss allowances and include loans and advances to customers that are classified in the balance sheet as trading assets, financial assets designated at fair value, or loans and receivables securities.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

UK

Advances secured on residential property

166,065

160,457

159,168

110,857

102,096

Corporate loans

21,796

18,886

13,181

1,247

666

Finance leases

2,653

1,602

1,792

-

1

Other secured advances

3,941

4,079

4,206

2,960

2,305

Other unsecured advances

7,734

5,249

6,745

3,263

4,104

Purchase and resale agreements

8,641

8,827

1,310

3,711

5,427

Loans and receivables securities

2,075

4,147

5,663

-

-

Amounts due from fellow group subsidiaries

57

4,457

2,652

55

-

Total UK

212,962

207,704

194,717

122,093

114,599

Non-UK

Advances secured on residential property

8

9

12

13

19

Corporate loans

-

2

103

-

-

Other secured advances

1

2

3

2

-

Other unsecured advances

-

1

2

2

35

Purchase and resale agreements

18

-

-

13,544

14,375

Total non-UK

27

14

120

13,561

14,429

Total

212,989

207,718

194,837

135,654

129,028

Less: impairment loss allowances

(1,655)

(1,299)

(1,001)

(551)

(536)

Total, net of impairment loss allowances

211,334

206,419

193,836

135,103

128,492

 

The balances above include loans and advances to other Santander group companies of £57m (2009: £4,457m, 2008: £2,652m). Detailed analysis of the loans and receivables securities included in the table above is set out in the Impact of the Current Credit Environment in the Risk Management Report on page 124.

No single concentration of loans and advances, with the exception of advances secured on residential properties, as disclosed above, accounts for more than 10% of total loans and advances and no individual country, other than the UK, accounts for more than 5% of total loans and advances.

 

Loans and advances to customers maturity analysis

 

The following table sets forth loans and advances to customers by maturity at 31 December 2010. Overdrafts are included in the "on-demand" category. Advances secured by residential properties are included at their contractual maturity; however, such advances may be repaid early.

 

 

 

 

 

On demand

£m

In not more than three months

£m

In more than three months but not more than one year

£m

In more than one year but not more than five years

£m

In more than five years but not more than ten years

£m

In more than ten years

£m

 

 

Total

£m

UK

Advances secured on residential property

8

1,145

3,319

18,373

22,558

120,662

166,065

Corporate loans

269

3,464

1,198

8,433

3,605

4,827

21,796

Finance leases

-

203

419

1,469

216

346

2,653

Other secured advances

426

90

82

443

545

2,355

3,941

Other unsecured advances

471

877

1,874

3,852

174

486

7,734

Purchase and resale agreements

-

8,641

-

-

-

-

8,641

Loans and receivables securities

58

54

9

235

372

1,347

2,075

Amounts due from fellow group subsidiaries

-

57

-

-

-

-

57

Total UK

1,232

14,531

6,901

32,805

27,470

130,023

212,962

Non-UK

Advances secured on residential property

-

-

-

-

3

5

8

Corporate loans

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Other secured advances

-

-

-

-

-

1

1

Other unsecured advances

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Purchase and resale agreements

-

2

-

16

-

-

18

Total non-UK

-

2

-

16

3

6

27

Total

1,232

14,533

6,901

32,821

27,473

130,029

212,989

Of which:

- Fixed interest rate

42

9,964

3,315

11,973

10,573

52,216

88,083

- Variable interest rate

1,190

4,569

3,586

20,848

16,900

77,813

124,906

Total

1,232

14,533

6,901

32,821

27,473

130,029

212,989

 

 

The Group's policy is to hedge all fixed-rate loans and advances to customers using derivative instruments, or by matching with other on-balance sheet interest rate exposures.

 

Impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

 

Details of the Group's impairment loss allowances policy are set out in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. An analysis of end-of-year impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers, movements in impairment loss allowances, and Group non-performing loans and advances are set out in the Risk Management Report on page 85 and Note 17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Risk elements in the loan portfolio

 

The disclosure of credit risk elements in this section reflects US accounting practice and classifications. The purpose of the disclosure is to present within the US disclosure framework those elements of the loan portfolios with a greater risk of loss. The main classifications of credit risk elements presented are:

 

Impaired loans;

Unimpaired loans contractually past due 90 days or more as to interest or principal;

Troubled debt restructurings;

Potential problem loans and advances; and

Cross border outstandings.

 

Impaired loans

Loans are classified as impaired when there is objective evidence that not all contractual cash flows will be received. Under IFRS, separate disclosure is required of loans that are neither past due nor impaired, past due but not impaired and impaired. This disclosure may be found in Loans and advances section on page 81 of the Credit Risk discussion in the Risk Management Report.

In accordance with IFRS, the Group recognises interest income on assets after they have been written down as a result of an impairment loss. Interest continues to be accrued on all loans and the element of interest that is not anticipated to be recovered is provided for. Interest income recognised on impaired loans is set out in the Consolidated Financial Statements. The income adjustment in respect of interest that is not anticipated to be recovered was £60m (2009: £46m, 2008: £21m).

 

Unimpaired loans contractually past due 90 days or moreas to interest or principal 

In the Retail Banking business, loans and advances are classified as non-performing typically when the customer fails to make payments when contractually due for three months or longer. In the Corporate Banking business, loans and advances are classified as non-performing either when payments are three months or more past due or where there are reasonable doubts about full repayment (principal and interest) under the contractual terms.

Details of the Group's non-performing loans and advances, including separate disclosure about unimpaired loans contractually past due 90 days or more as to interest or principal, are set out on page 86 in the "Group Non-performing loans and advances" table in the Credit Risk discussion in the Risk Management Report.

 

Troubled debt restructurings

The US Securities and Exchange Commission requires separate disclosure of any loans whose terms have been modified by the lender because of the borrower's financial difficulties, as a concession that the lender would not otherwise consider. These are classified as troubled debt restructurings ('TDR's). Under IFRS, disclosure is required of loans that would otherwise have been classified as past due or impaired whose terms have been renegotiated. This disclosure may be found on page 86 in the Credit Risk discussion in the Risk Management Report.

 

Potential problem loans and advances

Credit risk elements also cover potential problem loans. These are loans where information on possible credit problems among borrowers causes management to seriously doubt their ability to comply with the loan repayment terms. There are no potential problem loans other than those discussed above, and as discussed in "Impact of the current credit environment" in the Risk Management Report.

 

Cross border outstandings

The operations of the Group involve operations in non-local currencies. These cross border outstandings are controlled through a well-developed system of country limits, which are reviewed to avoid concentrations of transfer, economic or political risks. Cross border outstandings, which exclude finance provided within the Group, are based on the country of domicile of the borrower or guarantor of ultimate risk and comprise loans and advances to customers and banks, finance lease debtors, interest-bearing investments and other monetary assets denominated in currencies other than the borrower's local currency.

 

Cross border outstandings exceeding 1% of total assets

At 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Group had no cross border outstandings exceeding 1% of total assets.

 

Cross border outstandings between 0.75% and 1% of total assets

At 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Group had no cross border outstandings between 0.75% and 1% of total assets.

 

Cross border outstandings between 0.5% and 0.75% of total assets

At 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Group had no cross border outstandings between 0.5% and 0.75% of total assets.

 

Country risk exposure

 

The country risk exposure table below shows the total credit risk exposures to central and local governments, government guaranteed, bank and financial institutions, retail and corporate customers at 31 December 2010 and 2009. The table excludes credit risk exposures to other Santander group companies, which are presented separately.

 

31 December 2010

Central and local governments(1)

£bn

Government guaranteed

£bn

Banks and financial institutions

£bn

 

Retail

£bn

 

Corporate

£bn

 

Total

£bn

UK

23.7

9.8

28.8

191.4

33.6

287.3

US

5.2

-

7.8

0.1

1.5

14.6

Switzerland

3.2

-

1.9

-

-

5.1

Germany

-

0.1

2.3

-

0.2

2.6

France

-

0.2

1.8

-

0.3

2.3

Spain

0.2

-

0.5

0.1

0.4

1.2

Jersey

-

-

-

-

1.1

1.1

Netherlands

-

-

0.2

-

0.8

1.0

Australia

-

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.5

0.8

Luxembourg

-

-

0.2

-

0.5

0.7

Denmark

-

0.4

0.1

-

0.1

0.6

Canada

-

-

0.5

-

0.1

0.6

Isle of Man

-

-

-

0.2

0.3

0.5

Ireland

-

-

0.1

-

0.2

0.3

Guernsey

-

-

-

-

0.3

0.3

Cayman Islands

-

-

-

-

0.3

0.3

British Virgin Islands

-

-

-

-

0.3

0.3

Italy

-

-

0.2

-

-

0.2

Japan

-

-

0.2

-

-

0.2

Portugal

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

Austria

-

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

Belgium

-

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

Norway

-

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

Finland

-

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

Bermuda

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

Singapore

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

All others, each under £50m

-

-

-

-

0.2

0.2

32.3

10.6

45.1

191.9

41.0

320.9

 

31 December 2009

Central and local governments(1)

£bn

Government guaranteed

£bn

Banks and financial institutions

£bn

 

Retail

£bn

 

Corporate

£bn

 

Total

£bn

UK

4.6

7.8

34.6

165.3

31.6

243.9

US

0.9

-

5.4

0.1

1.6

8.0

Germany

0.3

0.1

2.8

0.1

-

3.3

Italy

-

-

2.9

-

0.1

3.0

Spain

0.3

-

1.4

-

0.6

2.3

France

-

0.2

1.2

-

0.3

1.7

Ireland

-

-

1.1

0.1

0.4

1.6

Guernsey

-

-

0.6

-

0.7

1.3

Luxembourg

-

-

0.5

-

0.5

1.0

Netherlands

0.2

-

0.4

-

0.3

0.9

Australia

-

0.1

0.4

0.1

0.3

0.9

Switzerland

-

-

0.8

-

-

0.8

Denmark

-

0.4

0.2

-

0.1

0.7

Austria

0.3

-

0.2

-

0.1

0.6

Cayman Islands

-

-

0.3

-

0.2

0.5

Norway

-

-

0.3

-

0.1

0.4

Canada

-

-

0.2

-

0.1

0.3

Jersey

-

-

0.1

-

0.2

0.3

Portugal

0.1

-

0.1

-

-

0.2

Isle of Man

-

-

-

0.2

-

0.2

Greece

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

Belgium

-

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

Bermuda

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

Marshall Islands

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

Malaysia

-

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

Gibraltar

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

Nigeria

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

All others, each under £50m

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.1

6.7

8.6

53.7

165.9

37.8

272.7

 (1) Excludes the exposure on margin given with respect to the Bank of England's Special Liquidity Scheme.

 

In addition, at 31 December 2010 and 2009 the Group had credit risk exposures to other Santander group companies of:

 

31 December 2010

Banks and financial institutions

£bn

 

Corporate

£bn

 

Total

£bn

Spain

2.7

0.1

2.8

2.7

0.1

2.8

 

31 December 2009

Banks and financial institutions

£bn

 

Corporate

£bn

 

Total

£bn

 Spain

7.9

0.9

8.8

 United Kingdom

3.5

0.2

3.7

 Portugal

1.4

2.0

3.4

 US

1.0

-

1.0

 Brazil

0.1

-

0.1

13.9

3.1

17.0

 

The above exposures at 31 December 2010 consisted of reverse repos of £646m, all of which were collateralised by OECD Government (but not Spanish) securities, floating rate notes of £148m, asset-backed securities of £69m and gross derivative exposures of £1,944m subject to International Swaps and Derivatives Association ('ISDA') Master Agreements including the Credit Support Annex. During 2010, unsecured lending to the parent was repaid. In addition, exposures to UK companies were eliminated on consolidation following the acquisition of those companies by the Group (See Note 49 to the Consolidated Financial Statements).

 

 

Derivative assets and liabilities

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Assets

- held for trading

21,951

21,472

31,713

- held for fair value hedging

2,426

1,355

3,412

24,377

22,827

35,125

Liabilities

- held for trading

20,390

16,775

25,420

- held for fair value hedging

2,015

2,188

2,390

22,405

18,963

27,810

 

Derivatives are held by the Group for trading or for risk management purposes. All derivatives are classified as held at fair value through profit or loss. For accounting purposes, the Group chooses to designate certain derivatives as in a hedging relationship if they meet specific criteria. The main hedging derivatives are interest rate and cross-currency swaps, which are used to hedge fixed-rate lending and structured savings products and medium-term note issuances, capital issuances and other capital markets funding.

Global Banking & Markets is the only area of the Group actively trading derivative products and is additionally responsible for implementing Group derivative hedging with the external market. In Group Infrastructure, derivatives are used for economic hedging. Further details about Market Risk in Global Banking & Markets and in Group Infrastructure are set out in the Risk Management Report. This information includes a summary of the activities undertaken, the related risks associated with such activities and the types of hedging derivatives used in managing such risks.

Further details of the derivatives held by the Group, both for trading and hedging purposes, including notional amounts and assets and liabilities analysed by contract type is contained in Note 14 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

Tangible fixed assets

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Property, plant and equipment

1,705

1,250

1,202

Capital expenditure incurred during the year

759

343

197

 

Details of capital expenditure contracted but not provided for in respect of tangible fixed assets are set out in Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The Group had 1,554 property interests at 31 December 2010 (2009: 1,565). The total consisted of 401 freeholds (2009: 209) and 1,153 operating lease interests (2009: 1,356), occupying a total floor space of 565,254 square metres (2009: 569,255 square metres).

 

The number of property interests is more than the number of individual properties as the Group has more than one interest in some properties. The majority of the Group's property interests are retail branches. Included in the above total are 33 properties (2009: 36 properties) that were not occupied by the Group at 31 December 2010. Of the Group's individual properties, 1,247 are located in the UK (2009: 1,262), 1 in Europe (2009: 1) and 2 in the US (2009: 2). There are no material environmental issues associated with the use of the above properties.

The Group has 12 principal sites including its headquarters. They are used for its Treasury operations; the banking back office and Human Resources; Corporate Banking; the telephone distribution operations as well as Credit Cards, Debt Management, Finance, Compliance and Marketing.

Management believes its existing properties and those under construction, together with those it leases, are adequate and suitable for its business as presently conducted and to meet future business needs. All properties are adequately maintained.

 

 

Deposits by banks(1)

 

The balances below include deposits by banks that are classified in the balance sheet as trading liabilities and financial liabilities designated at fair value.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Year-end balance(1)

33,522

46,680

48,982

Average balance(2)

37,626

34,597

34,064

Average interest rate(2)

0.68%

1.64%

3.36%

(1) The year-end deposits by banks balance includes non-interest bearing items in the course of transmission of £1,274m (2009: £652m, 2008: £1,100m).

(2) Calculated using monthly data.

 

At 31 December 2010, deposits by foreign banks amounted to £4,554m (2009: £15,282m, 2008: £13,031m).

The following tables set forth the average balances of deposits by banks by geography.

 

Average: year ended 31 December

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

UK

36,087

30,842

31,661

Non-UK

1,539

3,755

2,403

37,626

34,597

34,064

 

 

Deposits by customers

 

The balances below include deposits by customers that are classified in the balance sheet as trading liabilities and financial liabilities designated at fair value.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Year-end balance

168,619

148,020

135,119

Average balance(1)

155,612

155,623

99,056

Average interest rate(1)

1.59%

1.50%

3.79%

(1) Calculated using monthly data.

 

The following tables set forth the average balances of deposits by geography and customer type.

 

Average: year ended 31 December

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

UK

Retail demand deposits

73,367

73,060

55,096

Retail time deposits

49,780

42,873

23,590

Wholesale deposits

24,002

32,587

15,026

147,149

148,520

93,712

Non-UK

Retail demand deposits

2,979

3,170

1,742

Retail time deposits

4,914

3,724

2,063

Wholesale deposits

570

209

1,539

8,463

7,103

5,344

155,612

155,623

99,056

 

Retail demand and time deposits are obtained either through the branch network, cahoot or remotely (such as postal accounts). Retail demand and time deposits are also obtained outside the UK, principally through Abbey International. They are all interest bearing and interest rates are varied from time to time in response to competitive conditions.

 

Demand deposits

Demand deposits consist of savings and current accounts. Savings products comprise Individual Savings Accounts, instant saver savings accounts, remote access accounts, such as those serviced by post, and a number of other accounts which allow the customer a limited number of notice-free withdrawals per year depending on the balance remaining in the account. These accounts are treated as demand deposits because the entire account balance may be withdrawn on demand without penalty as one of the notice-free withdrawals.

 

Time deposits

Time deposits consist of notice accounts, which require customers to give notice of an intention to make a withdrawal, and bond accounts, which have a minimum deposit requirement. In each of these accounts, early withdrawal incurs an interest penalty.

 

Wholesale deposits

Wholesale deposits are those which either are obtained through the money markets or for which interest rates are quoted on request rather than being publicly advertised. These deposits are of fixed maturity and bear interest rates that reflect the inter-bank money market rates.

 

 

Short-term borrowings

 

The Group includes short-term borrowings within deposits by banks, trading liabilities, financial liabilities designated at fair value and debt securities in issue and does not show short-term borrowings separately on the balance sheet. Short-term borrowings are defined by the US Securities and Exchange Commission as amounts payable for short-term obligations that are US Federal funds purchased and securities sold under repurchase agreements, commercial paper, borrowings from banks, borrowings from factors or other financial institutions and any other short-term borrowings reflected on the Group's balance sheet. The Group's only significant short-term borrowings are securities sold under repurchase agreements, commercial paper, borrowings from banks, negotiable certificates of deposit, and certain other debt securities in issue. Additional information on short-term borrowings is provided in the table below for each of the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Securities sold under repurchase agreements

- Year-end balance

32,922

16,294

29,934

- Year-end interest rate

0.29%

0.39%

1.54%

- Average balance(1)

28,414

22,963

22,426

- Average interest rate(1)

0.64%

0.54%

2.69%

- Maximum balance(1)

32,922

29,816

29,934

Commercial paper

- Year-end balance

5,331

7,028

4,234

- Year-end interest rate

2.10%

1.83%

1.78%

- Average balance(1)

5,434

5,669

4,550

- Average interest rate(1)

1.52%

1.64%

3.35%

- Maximum balance(1)

6,703

7,506

6,405

Borrowings from banks (Deposits by banks)(2)

- Year-end balance

8,202

10,570

16,249

- Year-end interest rate

0.70%

0.41%

2.35%

- Average balance(1)

10,038

10,908

14.451

- Average interest rate(1)

0.51%

0.72%

3.27%

- Maximum balance(1)

12,211

12,739

21,517

Negotiable certificates of deposit

- Year-end balance

8,925

9,188

9,638

- Year-end interest rate

1.31%

1.73%

4.17%

- Average balance(1)

11,093

7,519

12,729

- Average interest rate(1)

1.41%

2.69%

4.9%

- Maximum balance(1)

14,694

9,188

15,807

Other debt securities in issue

- Year-end balance

3,595

5,185

2.785

- Year-end interest rate

1.64%

2.21%

4.70%

- Average balance(1)

6,023

4,133

3,655

- Average interest rate(1)

1.99%

2.69%

5.28%

- Maximum balance(1)

7,269

7,265

5,032

(1) Calculated using monthly data.

(2) The year-end deposits by banks balance includes non-interest bearing items in the course of transmission of £1,274m (2009: £652m, 2008: £1,100m).

 

The Group issues commercial paper generally in denominations of not less than US$50,000, with maturities of up to 365 days. Commercial paper is issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc and Abbey National North America LLC.

 

Certificates of deposit and certain time deposits

 

The following table sets forth the maturities of the Group's certificates of deposit and other large wholesale time deposits from non-bank counterparties in excess of £50,000 (or the non-sterling equivalent of £50,000) at 31 December 2010. A proportion of the Group's retail time deposits also exceeds £50,000 at any given date; however, the ease of access and other terms of these accounts means that they may not have been in excess of £50,000 throughout 2010.

Furthermore, the customers may withdraw their funds on demand upon payment of an interest penalty. For these reasons, no maturity analysis is presented for such deposits.

 

Not more than three months

£m

In more than three months but not more than six months

£m

In more than six months but not more than one year

£m

In more than one year

£m

Total

£m

Certificates of deposit:

- UK

567

317

288

10

1,182

- Non-UK

5,879

1,162

685

17

7,743

Wholesale time deposits:

- UK

1,437

13

50

178

1,678

7,883

1,492

1,023

205

10,603

 

At 31 December 2010, an additional £209m (2009: £10m) of wholesale deposits were repayable on demand.

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

The Group has issued debt securities in a range of maturities, interest rate structures and currencies, for purposes of meeting liquidity, funding and capital needs.

 

Note

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Trading liabilities

31

1,118

1,213

1,775

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

32

3,682

4,366

5,268

Debt securities in issue

33

51,783

47,758

58,511

Subordinated liabilities

34

6,372

6,949

8,863

62,955

60,286

74,417

 

Most of the debt securities that the Group has issued are classified as "Debt securities in issue" in the balance sheet. The remaining debt securities issued by the Group are classified separately in the balance sheet, either because they qualify as Trading liabilities or were designated upon initial recognition as Financial liabilities designated at fair value, or there are key differences in the legal terms of the securities, such as liquidation preferences, or subordination of the rights of holders to the rights of holders of certain other liabilities ("Subordinated liabilities"). Further information is set out in Notes 31 to 34 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

Retirement benefit obligations

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Total net liabilities

173

1,070

813

 

The Group operates a number of defined contribution and defined benefit pension schemes, and post retirement medical benefit plans. Detailed disclosures of the Group's retirement benefit obligations are contained in Note 37 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

Contractual obligations

 

The amounts and maturities of contractual obligations in respect of guarantees are described in Note 38 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. Other contractual obligations are:

 

Payments due by period

 

Total

£m

Less than 1 year

£m

1-3 years

£m

3-5 years

£m

Over 5 years

£m

Deposits by banks (1) (2)

33,522

30,295

1,082

2,064

81

Deposits by customers - repos(1)

11,112

11,112

-

-

-

Deposits by customers - other(2)

157,507

141,037

11,167

4,795

508

Derivative financial instruments

22,405

2,530

4,355

3,256

12,264

Debt securities in issue(3)

56,583

19,055

3,673

5,577

28,278

Subordinated liabilities

6,372

449

-

-

5,923

Retirement benefit obligations

173

5

11

11

146

Operating lease obligations

613

78

208

54

273

Purchase obligations

713

315

183

123

92

Total

289,000

204,876

20,679

15,880

47,565

(1) Securities sold under repurchase agreements.

(2) Includes deposits by banks and deposits by customers that are classified in the balance sheet as trading liabilities.

(3) Includes debt securities in issue that are classified in the balance sheet as trading liabilities and financial liabilities designated at fair value.

 

As the above table is based on contractual maturities, no account is taken of call features related to subordinated liabilities. The repayment terms of the debt securities may be accelerated in line with the covenants contained within the individual loan agreements. Details of deposits by banks and deposits by customers can be found in Notes 29 and 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Group has entered into outsourcing contracts where, in some circumstances, there is no minimum specified spending requirement. In these cases, anticipated spending volumes have been included within purchase obligations.

Under current conditions, the Group's working capital is expected to be sufficient for its present requirements and to pursue its planned business strategies.

 

 

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

 

In the ordinary course of business, the Group issues guarantees on behalf of customers. The significant types of guarantees are:

 

It has been normal in the UK to issue cheque guarantee cards to current account customers holding chequebooks, as historically retailers did not generally accept cheques without such form of guarantee. The guarantee was not automatic but depends on the retailer having sight of the cheque guarantee card at the time the purchase is made. The issuing bank is liable to honour these cheques even where the customer does not have sufficient funds in his or her account. The issuing bank's guarantee liability is in theory the number of cheques written and deposited with retailers multiplied by the amount guaranteed per cheque, which can be between £50 and £100. In practice most customers will only write cheques when they have funds in their account to meet the cheque, and cheques are frequently presented without the benefit of the cheque guarantee.

Following years of declining cheque usage, extensive research and reducing acceptance amongst retailers, in 2009 the UK Payments Council agreed to a UK industry-wide withdrawal of the UK Cheque Guarantee Scheme from 30 June 2011. In line with this announcement, we are phasing out cheque guarantee cards on replacement cards and card renewals. Customers can continue to use unguaranteed cheques, and cheque books will continue to be available in the usual way.

As a result, the Group's guarantee liability is decreasing as new cards are issued without the guarantee, meaning that the Group will no longer be liable to honour cheques where the customer does not have sufficient funds in his or her account. On this basis management have assessed the risk with respect to this guarantee as highly remote and decreasing. We consider the risk of loss as part of the impairment loss allowance requirement on bank accounts.

 

Standby letters of credit also represent the taking on of credit on behalf of customers when actual funding is not required, normally because a third party is not prepared to accept the credit risk of the Group's customer. These are also included in the normal impairment loss allowance assessment alongside other forms of credit exposure.

 

The Group, as is normal in such activity, gives representations, indemnities and warranties on the sale of subsidiaries, businesses and other assets. The maximum potential amount of any claims made against these is usually significantly higher than actual settlements. Appropriate provisions are made with respect to management's best estimate of the likely outcome, either at the time of sale, or subsequently if additional information becomes available.

 

Further information regarding off-balance sheet arrangements can be found in the Risk Management Report - Impact of the Current Credit Environment on page 124. See Note 38 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding the Group's guarantees, commitments and contingencies. In the ordinary course of business, the Group also enters into securitisation transactions as described in Note 18 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The securitisation companies are consolidated. The mortgage assets continue to be administered by the Group. The securitisation companies provide the Group with an important source of long-term funding.

 

 

Capital management and resources

 

Capital management and capital allocation

 

The Group adopts a centralised capital management approach, based on an assessment of both regulatory requirements and the economic capital impacts of our businesses. Details of the Group's objectives, policies and processes for managing capital, including the group capital table, can be found in Note 51 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Capital and risk management disclosures required by Pillar 3

Santander is supervised by the Banco de España on a consolidated basis. The Group has applied Santander's approach to capital measurement and risk management in its implementation of Basel II. As a result, the Group has been classified as a significant sub-group of Santander at 31 December 2010. The relevant Pillar 3 disclosure requirements for the Group are set out below. Further information on the Basel II risk measurement of the Group's exposures is included in Santander's Pillar 3 report.

 

Scope of the Group's capital adequacy

Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries are a UK banking group regulated by the UK Financial Services Authority. The basis of consolidation for prudential purposes is the same as the basis of consolidation for financial statement purposes. Consequently, the results of significant subsidiaries regulated by the UK Financial Services Authority are included in the Group's capital adequacy disclosures.

On 9 January 2009, primarily in order to optimise the capital, liquidity funding and overall financial efficiency of the enlarged Santander group, Banco Santander, S.A. transferred all of its Alliance & Leicester plc shares to the Company in exchange for newly issued ordinary shares of the Company.

On 3 August 2010, Banco Santander S.A., through a wholly-owned Spanish-based subsidiary Santusa Holding, S.L., injected £4,456m of equity capital into Santander UK plc. The capital was used to support the reorganisation of certain Banco Santander, S.A. group companies in the UK as described in Note 49 to the Consolidated Financial Statements and will be used to support organic and inorganic growth.

Capital transferability between the Group's subsidiaries is managed in accordance with the Group's corporate purpose and strategy, its risk and capital management policies and with regard to UK legal and regulatory requirements. There are no other current or foreseen material practical or legal impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources or repayment of liabilities when due between the Company and its subsidiaries and associates.

 

Capital ratios

 

The calculations of Group capital are prepared on a basis consistent with the Group's regulatory filings. Ratios are calculated by taking the relevant capital resources as a percentage of risk weighted assets.

The table below summarises the Group's capital ratios:

 

2010

2009

Core Tier 1 (after deductions)

11.5%

6.8%

Tier 1

14.8%

9.5%

Total capital

20.6%

17.6%

 

Regulatory capital resources

 

The table below analyses the composition of the Group's regulatory capital resources. The calculations reflect the amounts prepared on a basis consistent with the Group's regulatory filings.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

Core Tier 1 capital:

Called up share capital

3,105

2,412

Share premium

5,620

1,857

Retained earnings and other reserves

2,403

2,251

11,128

6,520

Deductions from Core Tier 1 capital:

Intangible Assets

(2,265)

(1,541)

Securitisation positions

(93)

(75)

Expected losses

(274)

(325)

(2,632)

(1,941)

Total Core Tier 1 capital after deductions

8,496

4,579

Non-cumulative Preference Shares

845

833

Innovative Tier 1 instruments

1,463

1,332

Excess on limits for including innovative Tier 1 capital and other Tier 1 capital

86

(306)

Total Tier 1 Capital after deductions

10,890

6,438

Tier 2 capital:

Subordinated debt

4,721

5,516

Excess innovative Tier 1 capital

-

306

Other

10

10

4,731

5,832

Deductions from Tier 2 capital:

Securitisation positions

(93)

(75)

Expected losses

(360)

(325)

Total Tier 2 capital after deductions

4,278

5,432

Total Capital Resources

15,168

11,870

 

The Group's Core Tier 1 capital consists of ordinary share capital, share premium and audited profits for the years ended 31 December 2010 and 2009 after adjustment to comply with the UK Financial Services Authority's rules.

A reconciliation of Core Tier 1 capital to the Group's statutory total shareholders' equity is set out below:

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

Total shareholders' equity (Accounting basis. See Consolidated Balance Sheet)

12,274

7,222

Less: Reserve Capital Instruments (See Note 39)

(297)

(297)

Less: Non-cumulative preference shares and Perpetual Preferred Securities (See Note 39)

(597)

(591)

Less: available for sale reserve

(10)

(12)

Pensions adjustment

(221)

217

Changes in liabilities designated as fair value through profit or loss from changes in Group's own credit risk

(21)

(19)

Core Tier 1 capital

11,128

6,520

 

The IAS19 pension deficit is deducted from shareholders' equity. In the Group's regulatory filings, the next five years' deficit contributions are treated as a deduction. Valuation adjustments relating to liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss which are not attributable to changes in benchmark interest rates are excluded from regulatory capital resources.

The increase in Core Tier 1 capital primarily related to additional share capital subscribed for. For capital management purposes and in accordance with the UK Financial Services Authority's rules, Innovative Tier 1 capital instruments are treated as Tier 1 capital. The UK Financial Services Authority's capital gearing rules restrict the amount of Innovative Tier 1 capital included in Tier 1 capital to 15% of Core Tier 1 capital after deductions. The excess is classified as Tier 2.

Non-cumulative Preference Shares consist of the £325m Sterling Preference Shares, the £175m Fixed/Floating Rate Tier One Preferred Income Capital Securities and the £300m fixed/floating rate non-cumulative callable preference shares. Details of these instruments are set out in Notes 34 and 39 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Innovative Tier 1 Instruments consist of the US$ 1,000m Non-Cumulative Trust Preferred Securities, £300m Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments and the £300m Step Up Callable Perpetual Preferred Securities. Details of these instruments are set out in Notes 34 and 39 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Details of the subordinated debt issues that meet the UK Financial Services Authority's definition of Tier 2 capital are set out in Note 34 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. In accordance with the UK Financial Services Authority's rules, in the last five years to maturity, dated subordinated debt issues are amortised on a straight line basis.

During 2010 and 2009, accounting valuation adjustments to Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments were also included in capital as permitted in accordance with UK Financial Services Authority rules. The Group has elected to deduct certain securitisation positions from capital rather than treat these exposures as a risk weighted asset.

 

The expected losses deduction represents the difference between expected loss calculated in accordance with the Group's Retail Internal Rating-Based ('IRB') and Advanced Internal Rating-Based ('AIRB') models, and the impairment loss allowances calculated in accordance with IFRS. Details of the Group's accounting policy for impairment loss allowances are set out in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. Expected losses are calculated using risk parameters based on either through-the-cycle, or economic downturn estimates, and which are subject to conservatism due to the imposition of regulatory floors. They are therefore currently higher than the impairment loss allowances which account for losses incurred at the balance sheet date.

Intangible assets represent goodwill arising principally on the acquisition of certain businesses as described in Note 49 to the Consolidated Financial Statements and certain capitalised computer software costs.

 

Regulatory capital requirement

 

The table below analyses the composition of the Group's regulatory capital requirements. The calculations reflect the amounts prepared on a basis consistent with the Group's regulatory filings.

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

Credit Risk - Standardised approach:

Institutions

12

16

Corporates

783

602

Retail

476

208

Secured on real estate property

184

210

Past due items

50

38

Other items

313

254

1,818

1,328

Credit Risk - IRB approach:

Retail exposures secured by real estate collateral

1,814

1,732

Qualifying revolving retail

146

149

Other retail

269

298

Institutions

107

188

Corporates

674

581

Other items

49

62

3,059

3,010

Counterparty risk capital component

119

213

Operational risk - standardised approach

612

529

Market Risk:

Interest rate Position Risk Requirement ('PRR')

2

34

Equity PRR

19

37

Commodity PRR

24

45

Foreign exchange PRR

15

33

Internal models

217

166

277

315

Total Pillar 1 capital requirement

5,885

5,395

Risk weighted assets (based on an 8% capital charge)

73,563

67,438

 

The Group applies Basel II to the calculation of its capital requirement. In addition, the Group applies the Retail IRB and AIRB approaches to its credit portfolios. See the Risk Management Report on page 122 for discussion of future regulatory changes, including Basel III. Residential lending capital resources requirement include securitised residential mortgages.

In 2010, although core business volumes increased, these increases were offset by de-leveraging of certain non-core portfolios. There was an additional increase in risk weighted assets due to the acquisition of certain businesses as described in Note 49 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Funding and Liquidity

 

The Board is responsible for the Group's liquidity risk management and control framework and has approved key liquidity limits in setting the Group's liquidity risk appetite. Along with its internal Liquidity Risk Manual, which sets out the liquidity risk control framework and policy, the Group abides by the "Sound Practices for Managing Liquidity in Banking Organisations" set out by the Basel Committee as its standard for liquidity risk management and control. The Group also complies with the UK Financial Services Authority's liquidity requirements, and has appropriate liquidity controls in place. In the Group's opinion, working capital is sufficient for its present requirements.

Liquidity risk is the potential that, although remaining in operation, the Group does not have sufficient liquid financial resources to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure them only at excessive cost.

See the Risk Management Report for more information.

 

Cash flows

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities

11,384

2,929

(21,444)

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from investing activities

(1,324)

1,433

19,402

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from financing activities

8,935

(4,621)

(7,381)

Increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

18,995

(259)

(9,423)

 

For the year ended 31 December 2010, cash and cash equivalents increased by £18,995m and for the years ended 31 December 2009 and 2008, cash and cash equivalents decreased by £259m and £9,423m, respectively. The following discussion highlights the major activities and transactions that affected the Group's cash flows during 2010, 2009 and 2008.

In 2010, the net cash inflow from operating activities of £11,384m, resulted from the Group's lending activities and the continued de-leveraging process which saw significant disposals and maturities in the Treasury asset portfolio as well as the sale of the majority of the Group's holdings of AAA-rated prime mortgage-backed securities. During 2009, customer deposits exceeded net lending as a consequence of an increase in customer confidence. During 2008, net cash outflow was used to fund the Group's core business of origination of mortgages in Retail Banking.

In 2010, the net cash outflow from investing activities of £1,324m resulted from the acquisition and disposal of subsidiaries of £1,168m and the purchase of tangible and intangible fixed assets of £873m offset by the net inflow of £626m from the purchase, sale and redemption of debt securities. In 2009, the net inflow from investing activities of £1,433m reflected the cash arising from the sale and redemption of debt securities. Due to ongoing market volatility only a portion of the cash generated was used to acquire new debt securities during the year. In 2008, the net inflow from investing activities of £19,402m primarily arose as a result of the acquisition of Bradford & Bingley plc's savings business in September 2008 to strengthen the Group's retail customer deposit base and franchise, which generated £18,001m of cash. This, plus additional inflows from customer deposits, was invested in new lending.

In 2010, the net cash inflow from financing activities of £8,935m reflected new issues of loan capital of £21,409m offset by repayments of loan capital maturing in the year of £15,973m and the receipt of £4,456m from the injection of additional equity capital into the Company. In 2009, the net outflow from financing activities of £4,621m reflected the repayment of loan capital that matured during the year, which was partially offset by new issues of loan capital. In 2008, the cash outflow from financing activities of £7,381m to repay loan capital reflected the maturity of some existing issues, which was not offset by new issues of loan capital given market conditions at the time.

In 2010, cash and cash equivalents increased by £18,995m, principally due to the Group holding significantly more high quality liquid assets in response to new regulatory requirements. In 2009, net cash and cash equivalents decreased by £259m, largely reflecting cash dividends on ordinary shares paid during the year. In 2008, the decrease in cash and cash equivalents of £9,423m wasprincipally a result of reducing cash and cash equivalents in the Global Banking & Markets operations to fund our Retail Banking lending.

 

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008, net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities was £11,384m, £2,929m, and £(21,444)m, respectively. The Group's operating assets and liabilities support the Group's lending activities, including the origination of mortgages and unsecured personal loans. During 2010, the Group continued its de-leveraging process which saw significant disposals and maturities in the Treasury asset portfolio as well as the sale of the majority of the Group's holdings of AAA-rated prime mortgage-backed securities. During 2009, customer deposits exceeded net lending as a consequence of an increase in customer confidence. During 2008, net cash was used to fund the Group's core business of origination of mortgages in Retail Banking.

In 2009, the net cash inflow related largely to an increase in deposits by banks and deposits by customers. Our stability in the environment which contributed to an increase in customer confidence resulted in the increase in deposits by banks and customer accounts. The UK Government's efforts on quantitative easing and reduced activity in Global Banking & Markets also contributed to this increase. This increase was partially offset by a substantial adverse foreign exchange movement which is a consequence of sterling weakening against foreign currencies.

In 2008, in addition to the movement related to the acquisition of Bradford & Bingley plc's savings business, other strong customer deposit inflows were partially offset by a reduction in deposits by banks. The remaining significant changes relate to the reduction of activity in Global Banking & Markets.

The amount and timing of cash flows related to the Group's operating activities may vary significantly in the normal course of business as a result of market conditions and trading strategies in the short term markets business of Global Banking & Markets.

 

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

The Group's investing activities primarily involve the acquisition and disposal of businesses, and the purchase and sale of tangible and intangible assets.

In 2010, there was a net cash outflow of £1,324m from investing activities. This outflow principally arose from the acquisition of Santander Cards and Santander Consumer (of which the group already held 49.9%) businesses and Santander PB UK (Holdings) Limited and its subsidiaries (of which the Group already held 51% of Santander Private Banking UK Limited). In addition cash of £873m was used to fund the additions to tangible and intangible fixed assets. Of this amount, £556m was spent on additions to the Group's property portfolio, £240m was invested in the Group's IT platform including software development of £114m, £45m of other office equipment and furniture and £32m on operating lease assets. The additions to the Group's property portfolio were principally the acquisition of retail branches that the Group had previously leased (See Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further details). These outflows were partly offset by the sale of the available-for-sale securities in order to partly fund the significant contributions made to the pension deficit during the year.

In 2009, net cash of £1,433m was generated by investing activities, primarily as a result of proceeds of £3,004m in respect of available-for-sale securities that were sold or matured during the year. In line with the Group's strategy to reduce balance sheet assets in light of prevailing market conditions, only part of the above cash inflows was used to purchase new securities in an amount of £1,133m.

Cash of £463m was used during 2009 to fund the acquisition of tangible and intangible fixed assets. Of the £463m invested, £120m was invested in furniture and fittings for the Retail Banking branch network as part of branch refurbishments; a further £120m was invested in the continuing development of Partenon, the Santander group's IT platform; £115m was used to acquire the head office building in London which had previously been leased; and £81m represented the purchase of operating lease assets.

In 2008, net cash of £19,402m was generated by investing activities, primarily as a result of the acquisition of Bradford & Bingley plc's savings business in September 2008 to strengthen the Group's retail customer deposit base and franchise, which generated £18,001m of cash, and the sale of the Porterbrook operating lease business which generated £1,605m of cash. These sources of cash were partially offset by uses of cash of £278m to fund purchases of tangible and intangible fixed assets, and £1,222m to invest in non-trading securities. Of the £278m invested in tangible and intangible fixed assets, £120m was invested in computer infrastructure and software, primarily reflecting investment in systems to support our expansion in lending to small and medium-sized enterprises, and further investment in elements of Partenon; £59m was invested in furniture and fittings for the Retail Banking branch network, mainly as a result of continuing branch refurbishments; and £88m was invested by the Porterbrook operating lease business in the construction of rail assets prior to its sale early in December 2008. The £1,222m invested in non-trading securities represented the purchase of assets pledged related to the Group's obligations with respect to pensions funding.

 

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

The Group's financing activities reflect transactions involving the issuance and repayment of long-term debt, and the issuance of, and payment of dividends on, the Company's shares.

In 2010, Banco Santander, S.A. through a Spanish-based subsidiary Santusa Holding, S.L., injected £4,456m of equity capital into the Company. In addition, there was a net inflow of £5,436m in loan capital. New issues (principally through mortgage backed securities and covered bonds) totalled £21,409m with repayments of £15,973m. Dividends of £900m were paid during the year on the ordinary share capital.

In 2009, net cash outflow from financing activities was £4,621m, principally due to repayment of loan capital. There were new issues for £1,556m of long-term debt (specifically mortgage covered bonds) in 2009. In addition, £225m of dividends on ordinary shares were paid.

In 2008, net cash outflow from financing activities was £7,381m, principally due to repayment of loan capital. There were no external issuances of long-term debt in 2008, reflecting the difficult conditions in the credit markets. The net cash used was partially offset by the issuance of £1bn of ordinary share capital. Dividends on ordinary shares of £595m were paid.

 

Sources of funding and liquidity

 

The Group is primarily funded by retail deposits. This, together with corporate deposits, forms its commercial bank franchise, which attracts deposits through a variety of entities. More than three quarters of commercial bank customer lending is financed by commercial bank customer deposits. The retail sources primarily originate from the Retail Banking savings business. Although largely callable, these funds provide a stable and predictable core of funding due to the nature of the retail accounts and the breadth of personal customer relationships.

Additionally, the Group has a strong wholesale funding base, which is diversified across product types and geography. Through the wholesale markets, the Group has active relationships with more than 500 counterparties across a range of sectors, including banks, central banks, other financial institutions, corporates and investment funds. Other sources of funding include collateralised borrowings, mortgage securitisations and long-term debt issuance. While there is no certainty regarding lines of credit extended to the Group, they are actively managed as part of the ongoing business. No committed lines of credit have been purchased as such arrangements are not common practice in the European banking industry.

 

Short-term funding is accessed through money market instruments, including time deposits, certificates of deposit and commercial paper. Medium to long-term funding is accessed primarily through the Group's euro medium-term note programmes. The major debt issuance programmes are managed by Abbey National Treasury Services plc on its own behalf, except for the US commercial paper programme, which is managed by Abbey National North America LLC, a guaranteed subsidiary of the Company, and are set out in Note 33 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The ability to sell assets quickly is also an important source of liquidity for the Group. The Group holds marketable investment securities, such as central bank, eligible government and other debt securities, which could be disposed of, either by entering into sale and repurchase agreements, or by being sold to provide additional funding should the need arise. The Group also makes use of asset securitisation arrangements to provide alternative funding sources.

Within the framework of prudent funding and liquidity management, the Group manages its commercial banking activities to minimise liquidity risk. At 31 December 2010, the Group's loan to deposit ratio was 123% (2009: 126%, 2008: 136%) and this improvement was mainly driven by organic growth in net deposit inflows which exceeded net lending growth. The Group aims to further reduce this ratio strategically over the course of 2011.

As noted above, on 3 August 2010, Banco Santander S.A., through a wholly-owned Spanish-based subsidiary Santusa Holding, S.L., injected £4,456m of equity capital into Santander UK plc. The capital was used to support the reorganisation of certain Banco Santander, S.A. group companies in the UK and will be used to support organic and inorganic growth.

 

Securitisation of assets

The Group has provided prime retail mortgage-backed securitised products to a diverse investor base through its mortgage backed funding programmes. Funding has historically been raised via mortgage-backed notes, both issued to third parties and retained (the latter being central bank eligible collateral, both via the Bank of England's Special Liquidity Scheme facility and for contingent funding purposes in other Bank of England, Swiss National Bank, and US Federal Reserve facilities). It is expected that issues to third parties and retained issuances will together represent a similar proportion of the Group's overall funding in 2011 and 2012. In 2010, the Group issued through the Fosse Master Trust the first publicly-placed mortgage-backed securitisation transaction from a UK bank since 2007 that did not include an investor put. The Group raised approximately £10bn from publicly placed residential mortgage-backed securities issuances through its Fosse and Holmes Master Trust Programmes. In early 2011, the Group raised approximately £2bn through a further issuance from the Holmes Master Trust programme. The transaction was denominated in sterling, euro and US dollars.

 

Bank of England Special Liquidity Scheme

Along with other major UK banks and building societies, the Company participated in the Bank of England's Special Liquidity Scheme whereby it exchanged self-subscribed-for asset-backed security issuances for highly liquid Treasury Bills. All major UK banks and building societies were required to participate as part of the measures designed to improve the liquidity position of the UK banking system in general. The Company did not participate in the other UK Government backed schemes; namely the Credit Guarantee Scheme and the Asset Purchase Scheme.

 

UK Government 2008 Credit Guarantee Scheme

In October 2008, the UK Government announced measures intended to ensure the stability of the financial system and to protect ordinary savers, depositors, businesses and borrowers, including the details of its 2008 Credit Guarantee Scheme for UK incorporated banks and building societies debt issuance (the 'Scheme'). The Scheme provided for HM Treasury to guarantee specific debt instruments issued by eligible institutions during the extended period ending on 31 December 2009 and with a maturity not exceeding 9 April 2014. The Company was the eligible institution for the Group. The Company did not issue any debt guaranteed by the Scheme.

 

Uses of funding

 

The principal uses of liquidity for the Group are the funding of Retail and Corporate Banking lending, payment of interest expense, dividends paid to shareholders, the repayment of debt and consideration for business combinations. The Group's ability to pay dividends depends on a number of factors, including the Group's regulatory capital requirements, distributable reserves and financial performance.

 

Current market conditions

 

After a positive start to 2010, general wholesale market funding conditions became more volatile through the year. From the Group's perspective, short-term unsecured money-market funding remained available and the Group issued more medium term funding in 2010 than in recent years. However, spreads continued to remain significantly above historic levels for both secured and unsecured issues. These markets have traditionally been important sources of funding and continue to be so.

During 2010, the Group issued in excess of £20bn of medium term paper enabling it to comfortably meet day-to-day funding requirements, as well as reduce its reliance on short term unsecured money market funding and significantly increase its liquidity buffer (which predominantly comprises cash at the Bank of England and Federal Reserve as well as holdings of UK Government stock). This allowed the Group to meet both the UK Financial Services Authority's liquidity requirements and the Group's own internal liquidity requirements.

 

For further information on liquidity, including its risk management and developments during the year, see "Risk Management - Funding and Liquidity Risk" on page 117 and "Risk Management - Impact of the Current Credit Environment" on page 124.

 

Interest rate sensitivity

 

Interest rate sensitivity refers to the relationship between interest rates and net interest income resulting from the periodic repricing of assets and liabilities. The largest administered rate items in the Group's balance sheet are residential mortgages and retail deposits, the majority of which bear interest at variable rates. The Group is able to mitigate the impact of interest rate movements on net interest income in Retail Banking by repricing separately the variable rate mortgages and variable rate retail deposits, subject to competitive pressures.

The Group also offers fixed-rate mortgages and savings products on which the interest rate paid by or to the customer is fixed for an agreed period of time at the start of the contract. The Group manages the margin on fixed-rate products by the use of derivatives matching the fixed-rate profiles. The risk of prepayment is reduced by imposing early termination charges if the customers terminate their contracts early.

The Group seeks to manage the risks associated with movements in interest rates as part of its management of the overall non-trading position. This is done within limits as described in the Risk Management Report beginning on page 67.

 

Changes in net interest income - volume and rate analysis

 

The following table allocates changes in interest income, interest expense and net interest income between changes in volume and changes in rate for the Group for the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008. Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. The variance caused by changes in both volume and rate has been allocated to rate changes.

 

2010/2009

2009/2008

 

 

Total

change

Changes due to

increase/(decrease) in

Total

change

Changes due to

increase/(decrease) in

 

 

 

£m

Volume

£m

Rate

£m

 

£m

Volume

£m

Rate

£m

Interest income

Loans and advances to banks:

- UK

-

37

(37)

(284)

93

(377)

- Non-UK

(1)

84

(85)

(9)

10

(19)

Loans and advances to customers:

- UK

(23)

277

(300)

(573)

2,651

(3,224)

- Non-UK

(1)

(1)

-

2

-

2

Other interest earning financial assets:

- UK

(246)

(154)

(92)

267

848

(581)

Total interest income

- UK

(269)

160

(429)

(590)

3,592

(4,182)

- Non-UK

(2)

83

(85)

(7)

10

(17)

(271)

243

(514)

(597)

3,602

(4,199)

Interest expense

Deposits by banks:

- UK

(279)

(120)

(159)

108

(6)

114

Deposits by customers - retail demand deposits:

- UK

201

4

197

(1,400)

771

(2,171)

- Non-UK

14

(4)

18

12

40

(28)

Deposits by customers - retail time deposits:

- UK

2

151

(149)

386

445

(59)

- Non-UK

22

24

(2)

(17)

74

(91)

Deposits by customers - wholesale deposits:

- UK

(71)

94

(165)

120

210

(90)

Subordinated debt:

- UK

(7)

(16)

9

(63)

18

(81)

- Non-UK

2

-

2

(7)

10

(17)

Debt securities in issue:

- UK

(554)

(51)

(503)

(1,159)

(75)

(1,084)

- Non-UK

9

17

(8)

(281)

75

(356)

Other interest-bearing liabilities:

- UK

(12)

10

(22)

64

6

58

Total interest expense

- UK

(720)

72

(792)

(1,944)

1,369

(3,313)

- Non-UK

47

37

10

(293)

199

(492)

(673)

109

(782)

(2,237)

1,568

(3,805)

Net interest income

402

134

268

1,640

2,034

(394)

 

Average balance sheet (1) (2)

 

2010

2009

2008

Average

balance

£m

 

Interest

£m

Average

rate

%

Average

balance

£m

 

Interest

£m

Average

rate

%

Average

balance

£m

 

Interest

£m

Average

rate

%

Assets

Loans and advances to banks:

- UK

19,561

140

0.72

15,477

140

0.90

12,702

424

3.34

- Non-UK

4,345

14

0.32

646

15

2.32

454

24

5.29

Loans and advances to customers:(3)

- UK

190,239

6,798

3.57

182,800

6,821

3.73

134,557

7,393

5.49

- Non-UK

12

1

8.33

18

2

11.11

18

1

5.56

Debt securities:

- UK

6,656

94

1.41

12,141

340

2.80

962

73

7.59

Total average interest-earning assets,

220,813

7,047

3.19

211,082

7,318

3.47

148,693

7,915

5.32

interest income

Impairment loss allowances

(1,526)

-

-

(1,464)

-

-

(562)

-

-

Trading business

28,593

-

-

27,586

-

-

35,394

-

-

Assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

8,171

-

-

12,278

-

-

12,769

-

-

Other non-interest-earning assets

39,708

-

-

36,729

-

-

22,885

-

-

Total average assets

295,759

-

-

286,211

-

-

219,179

-

-

Non-UK assets as a % of total

1.47%

-

-

0.23%

-

-

0.22%

-

-

Liabilities

Deposits by banks:

- UK

(4,651)

(87)

1.87

(6,911)

(366)

5.30

(7,079)

(258)

3.64

Deposits by customers - retail demand:(4)

- UK

(73,367)

(1,167)

1.59

(73,060)

(966)

1.32

(55,096)

(2,365)

4.29

- Non-UK

(2,979)

(75)

2.52

(3,170)

(61)

1.92

(1,742)

(49)

2.81

Deposits by customers - retail time:(4)

- UK

(49,780)

(934)

1.88

(42,873)

(932)

2.17

(23,590)

(547)

2.32

- Non-UK

(4,914)

(97)

1.97

(3,724)

(75)

2.01

(2,063)

(92)

4.46

Deposits by customers - wholesale:(4)

- UK

(18,159)

(151)

0.83

(12,796)

(222)

1.73

(4,180)

(102)

2.44

Bonds and medium-term notes:

- UK

(35,073)

(307)

0.88

(37,292)

(861)

2.31

(38,721)

(2,020)

5.22

- Non-UK

(13,825)

(53)

0.38

(10,030)

(44)

0.44

(8,154)

(325)

3.99

Dated and undated loan capital and other subordinated liabilities:

- UK

(6,158)

(219)

3.56

(6,619)

(226)

3.41

(6,221)

(289)

4.65

- Non-UK

(661)

(57)

8.62

(651)

(55)

8.45

(560)

(62)

11.07

Other interest-bearing liabilities UK

(1,197)

(86)

7.18

(1,045)

(98)

9.38

(918)

(34)

3.7

Total average interest-bearing liabilities, interest expense

(210,764)

(3,233)

1.53

(198,171)

(3,906)

1.97

(148,324)

(6,143)

4.14

Trading business

(39,673)

-

-

(49,157)

-

-

(41,538)

-

-

Liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss

(5,740)

-

-

(3,556)

-

-

(6,650)

-

-

Non-interest-bearing liabilities:

- Other

(29,991)

-

-

(28,142)

-

-

(18,663)

-

-

- Shareholders' funds

(9,591)

-

-

(7,185)

-

-

(4,004)

-

-

Total average liabilities and shareholders' funds

(295,759)

-

-

(286,211)

-

-

(219,179)

-

-

Non-UK liabilities as a % of total

7.57%

-

-

6.14%

-

-

5.71%

-

-

Interest spread

-

-

1.66

-

-

1.50

-

-

1.18

Net interest margin

-

-

1.73

-

-

1.62

-

-

1.19

(1) Average balances are based upon monthly data.

(2) The ratio of average interest-earning assets to interest-bearing liabilities for the year ended 31 December 2010 was 104.77% (2009: 106.52%, 2008: 100.25%).

(3) Loans and advances to customers include non-performing loans. See the Risk Management Report - Credit Risk.

(4) Demand deposits, time deposits and wholesale deposits are defined under "Deposits by customers" above.

 

 

 

Risk Management

 

The Risk Management report contains audited financial information and forms an integral part of the Consolidated Financial Statements, except as marked on pages 92, 93 and 96 and the Operational Risk and Other Risks sections on pages 121 to 123.

 

Summary

 

This Risk Management report describes the Risk Governance Framework of Santander UK plc (the 'Company', and together with its subsidiaries, the 'Group'), and includes more detail on the Group's key risks, on a segmental basis or aggregated where relevant. It is divided into the following sections:

 

Introduction - A description of the principles of risk management and the Group's Risk Governance Framework, including the three tiers of Risk Governance structure.

 

Economic capital - including analyses of the global risk profile, Return on Risk Adjusted Capital ('RORAC') and value creation.

 

Principal Risks and Risk Management -Definitions and key features of the principal risks facing the Group, together with responsibility for risk management, control and assurance are described on pages 74 and 75, consisting of:

Credit Risk

Market Risk

Funding and Liquidity Risk

Operational Risk, and

Other Risks

 

Credit Risk - Disclosures about credit risk are described on pages 76 to 111, consisting of Group-wide disclosures followed by additional segmental disclosures:

Total credit risk exposures and maximum exposure to credit risk - including discussions of measurement tools, the credit risk cycle, and credit risk from other standpoints, particularly significant concentrations.

Loans and advances:

Analysis of the loans and advances as: neither past due nor impaired, past due but not individually impaired, or individually impaired. Further analysis of credit quality and maturity analyses.

Impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers, including movements in impairment loss allowances and recoveries

Non-performing loans ('NPL') and advances, collections and recoveries, and restructured loans

Segmental disclosures about credit risk:

Retail Banking - including its management, an analysis of types and credit quality, and impairment loss allowances, arrears, recoveries and non-performing loans:

Mortgages - including higher risk loans, credit quality, arrears, non-performing loans, restructuring and refinancing (including forbearance).

Banking and consumer credit - analysis of non-performing loans and advances for unsecured loans, finance leases and other secured loans.

Other products - consisting of business banking and private banking.

Corporate Banking - including its management, exposures by credit rating and geographical area, the Watchlist, and impairment loss allowances, arrears, recoveries and non-performing loans:

Global Banking & Markets - including its management, exposures by credit rating and geographical area, and the Watchlist.

Group Infrastructure - including its management, exposures by credit rating and geographical area and the Watchlist.

 

Market Risk - Disclosures about market risk are described on pages 112 to 116, consisting of a Group-wide discussion followed by additional segmental disclosures:

Retail Banking - including its management.

Corporate Banking - including its management.

Global Banking & Markets - including its management and disclosures on short-term, structural and trading risk.

Group Infrastructure - including its management and disclosure of Net Interest Margin sensitivity and the Market Value of Equity sensitivity, and a description of the types of derivative contracts used.

 

Funding and Liquidity Risk - A description of the funding and liquidity risk the Group faces, along with their management, including analyses of wholesale funding and liquid assets can be found on pages 117 to 120.

 

Operational Risk - Descriptions of operational risk management and key operational risk activity, as well as regulatory, legal and compliance risk (including Basel II) can be found on pages 121 and 122.

 

Other Risks - Descriptions of how business/strategic risk, reputational risk, pension obligation risk and residual value risk are managed can be found on page 123.

 

The Impact of the Current Credit Environment - Detailed disclosures can be found on pages 124 to 134, including a description of the Group's exposures to certain classes of financial assets and off-balance sheet entities.

 

Introduction

 

The Group accepts that risk arises from its full range of activities, and actively manages and controls it. The management of risk is an integral part of the Group's activities. Risk is defined as the uncertainty around the Group's ability to achieve its business objectives and execute its strategy effectively. Risk constitutes the Group's exposure to uncertainty and the consequent variability of return. Specifically, risk equates to the adverse impacts on profitability arising from different sources of uncertainty. The key risks Santander UK is exposed to are credit (including residual credit and concentration), market (including trading and non-traded), funding and liquidity, operational and other risks (including business/strategic, reputational, pension obligation and residual value). Risk measurement is used to capture the source of the uncertainty and the magnitude of its potential effect on the profitability and solvency of the Group. Effective risk management and control is therefore of fundamental importance to the Group's long-term success.

Understanding and controlling risk is critical for the effective management of the business. The Group's Risk Framework aims to ensure that risk is managed and controlled on behalf of shareholders, customers, depositors, employees and the Group's regulators. Effective and efficient risk governance and oversight provide management with assurance that the Group's business activities will not be adversely impacted by risks that could have been reasonably foreseen. This in turn reduces the uncertainty of achieving the Group's strategic objectives.

 

 

Principles of Risk Management

 

Risk management at Santander UK is based on the following principles:

 

Involvement of senior management. Santander UK's risk committee and the Group units' senior management committees are structured so as to involve senior management in the overall risk oversight process.

 

Independence of the risk function with respect to the business. The segregation of functions between the business areas (which assume risk) and the risk areas entrusted with risk measurement, analysis, control and reporting provides sufficient independence and autonomy for proper risk control.

 

Risk as a decision maker. Decisions on credit transactions jointly reviewed by the risk and commercial areas. However, as Risk is independent, it is ultimately the decision maker.

 

Definition of powers. The type of activities to be performed, segments, risks to be assumed and risk decisions to be made are clearly defined for each risk taking unit and, if appropriate, for each risk management unit, based on their delegated powers. How transactions and products should be structured, arranged and managed and where they should be accounted for is also defined.

 

Risk measurement. Risk measurement takes into account all risk exposures assumed across the business spectrum and uses measures based on risk components and dimensions, over the entire risk cycle, for the management of risk at any given time. From a qualitative standpoint, this integrated vision translates into the use of certain integrating measures, which are mainly the risk capital requirement and return on risk-adjusted capital ('RORAC').

 

Limitation of risk. The limitation of risk is intended to limit, in an efficient and comprehensive manner, the maximum levels of risk for the various risk measures, based on a knowledge of the risks incurred and supported by the necessary infrastructure for risk management, control and reporting, and to ensure that no undesired risks are assumed and that the risk-based-capital charge, risk exposures and losses do not exceed, in any case, the approved maximum levels.

 

Establishment of risk policies and procedures. The risk policies and procedures represent the basic regulatory framework, consisting of frameworks, manuals and operating rules, through which risk activities and processes are regulated.

 

Definition and assessment of risk methodologies. Risk methodologies provide the definitions of the internal risk models applicable to the Group and, therefore, stipulate the risk measures, product valuation methods, yield curve and market data series building methods, calculation of risk-based capital requirements and other risk analysis methods, and the respective calibration and testing processes.

 

 

 

Phases of risk management

 

The risk management and control process at Santander UK is structured into the following phases:

 

Establishment of risk management frameworks and policies that reflect the principles and standards governing the general modus operandi of Santander UK's risk activities, based on a corporate risk management framework, which comprises the organisational model and the management model, and on a series of more specific corporate frameworks of the functions reporting to the risk unit. Risk units transpose corporate risk regulations into their internal policies and develop the procedures required to implement them.

 

Identification of risks, through the constant review and monitoring of exposures, the assessment of new products and businesses and the specific analysis of singular transactions.

 

Measurement of risks using methodologies and models implemented subject to a validation and approval process.

 

Definition of the Group's risk appetite by setting overall and specific limits for the various types of risks, products, customers, groups, sectors and geographical locations.

 

Preparation and distribution of reports that are reviewed by the heads of Santander UK management.

 

 

Key techniques and tools

 

For many years, Santander UK has managed risk using a number of techniques and tools which are described in detail in various sections of this report. The key techniques and tools used are as follows:

 

Internal ratings and scorings-based models which, by assessing the various qualitative and quantitative risk components by customer and transaction or product, make it possible to estimate, firstly, the probability of default and, subsequently, the expected loss, based on estimates of loss given default.

 

Economic capital, as a homogeneous measure of the risk assumed and a basis for the measurement of the management performed.

 

RORAC, which is used both as a transaction and product pricing tool (bottom-up approach) and in the analysis of portfolios and units (top-down approach).

 

Value at Risk, which is used for controlling market risk and setting the market risk limits for the various trading portfolios.

 

Scenario analysis and stress testing to supplement market and credit risk analyses in order to assess the impact of alternative scenarios, even on impairment loss allowances and capital.

 

 

 

Risk Governance Framework

 

The Group adopts a three-tier risk governance framework that establishes responsibilities for:

 

Risk management;

Risk control; and

Risk assurance.

 

This ensures segregation of duties between those who take on risk, those who control risk and those who provide assurance. The framework is based on the following five principles:

 

Clearly allocating accountability for risk;

Embedded risk culture, starting at the highest levels of our organisation;

Creating shareholder value;

Independent risk assurance and transparency; and

Embedding UK Financial Services Authority 'Treating Customers Fairly' principles into policies and processes.

 

The diagram below shows the Risk Governance Framework in operation in respect of risk management and oversight.

 

 

Authority for Risk Management flows from the Santander UK plc Board of Directors (the 'Board') to the Chief Executive Officer and from her to specific individuals. Formal standing committees are maintained for effective management or oversight. Their authority is derived from the person they are intended to assist.

The Risk Division at Banco Santander, S.A. reports to the President of the Comisión Delegada de Riesgos ('CDR' or Delegated Risk Committee).

The main elements of risk governance within the Group are as follows:

 

First tier of risk governance

 

Risk management is provided by the Board. It approves the Group's Risk Appetite Statement which is set principally through economic capital measures for each risk type in consultation with Banco Santander, S.A. as appropriate. The Board also approves the strategy for managing risk and is responsible for the Group's system of internal control. The Board is supported by the Chief Executive Officer and Executive Committee members, who have primary responsibility for understanding, identifying, and owning the risks generated by their lines of business and establishing a framework for managing those risks within the Board-approved risk appetite of the Group. In addition, understanding, identifying, and owning the risks generated by the Group's operations are the responsibility of the Divisional Heads and central functions. These functions provide technical support and advice to assist in the management and control of risk. Within this tier, there is a process for transaction review and approval within certain thresholds, discharged by the Credit Approvals Committee ('CAC'), a specific committee established under the authority of the Chief Executive Officer. Transactions reviewed which exceed the threshold limits set are subject to prior review by Banco Santander, S.A.'s Risk Division before final approval by the CAC.

 

 

Risk Committee

The Risk Committee is a management committee, established under the authority of and chaired by the Chief Executive Officer.

The Risk Committee is responsible for a more detailed allocation of the Group's risk appetite, proposing the Group's risk policy for approval by the Chief Executive Officer, the Executive Committee, the Board or other parties as appropriate and makes decisions on risk issues within its governing and supervisory powers. Furthermore, the Risk Committee ensures that the Group's activities are consistent with its risk tolerance level and, in this regard, it sets limits for the main risk exposures, which it reviews systematically.

The Chief Risk Officer advises the Risk Committee in connection with its work on the following matters:

 

a) Review

The Risk Committee:

 

Reviews the Risk Report on a monthly basis. The Risk Report is prepared by the Risk Division and highlights all significant risk issues affecting Santander UK;

Reviews any recommendations made by the Chief Risk Officer and the Risk Oversight Fora, and elevates them to the Board or the Executive Committee as appropriate;

Reviews risk mandates, where appropriate, on an annual basis;

Reviews changes in risk policy or appetite that may be recommended by relevant parties from time to time; and

Reviews proposals for new products or business lines as appropriate.

 

b) Give advice and recommendations

The Risk Committee gives advice and recommends action relating to all risk issues to Executive Committee members (individually and collectively). After review, it recommends approval of the:

 

Risk Framework;

Risk Appetite; and

Escalation of risk policy issues that lie outside its authority to approve.

 

c) Make decisions

The Risk Committee:

 

Approves risk delegations;

Approves risk policy changes that do not require Board approval; and

Approves risk mandates, where appropriate.

 

In addition, with respect to the Basel II Internal Rating Based approach, the Risk Committee:

 

Approves all material aspects of the rating and estimation process, where an Internal Rating Based model has been developed locally and is therefore subject to local validation and local supervisory review;

Reviews the roles and responsibilities of the relevant risk functions and the internal/external audit functions; and

Reviews the associated management reports.

 

Where an Internal Rating Based model has been developed and approved by the Banco Santander, S.A. group and therefore has been approved by the Banco de Espana, the responsibility of the Risk Committee is to ratify the model, noting its applicability and relevance to the local environment.

 

Second tier of risk governance

 

Risk control is provided by the Board independently supported by the Risk Division. The roles of the Chief Risk Officer, the Deputy Chief Risk Officer, and the Risk Division include development of risk measurement methodologies, risk approval, risk monitoring, risk reporting and escalation of risk issues in line with the relevant risk policy for all risks across all lines of Retail Banking, Corporate Banking, Global Banking & Markets and Group Infrastructure business.

Dedicated Business ROFs advise and support the Chief Risk Officer in fulfilling his risk control responsibilities and help to ensure that risks are suitably understood, managed and controlled.

The Risk Division provides independent challenge to all business areas in respect of risk management and compliance with policies and advises the business when they are approaching the limits of the Group's risk appetite.

The Board, as supported by the Risk Division, is responsible for ensuring compliance with Group policies and limits imposed by Banco Santander, S.A. including:

 

Group-wide risk policies;

Group-wide risk limits/parameters;

Approval processes relating to transactions that exceed local risk limits;

The systematic review of large exposures to clients, sectors, geographical areas and different risk types; and

Reporting to Banco Santander, S.A..

 

Third tier of risk governance

 

Risk assurance provides independent objective assurance on the effectiveness of the management and control of risk across the Group. This is provided through the Non-Executive Directors, the Audit and Risk Committee and the Internal Audit function.

 

Non-Executive Directors

The Non-Executive Directors are members of the Board who have a particular responsibility for constructively challenging and contributing to the development of strategy, scrutinising the performance of management in meeting agreed goals and objectives and monitoring reporting performance, and assuring themselves that the financial controls and systems of risk management are robust and defensible.

 

Audit and Risk Committee

The Audit and Risk Committee is made up of Non-Executive Directors, and is a committee of the Board. The Committee has responsibility for:

 

Oversight of the risk governance framework;

Review of the effectiveness of the Group's internal and external audit processes;

Review of control policies and procedures including regulatory compliance and financial reporting;

Identification, assessment and reporting of risks; and

The risk governance structure and associated compliance with risk control policies and procedures.

 

Internal Audit

The Internal Audit function supports the Audit and Risk Committee by providing independent and objective opinions on the effectiveness and integrity of the Group's risk governance arrangements. It does this via a systematic programme of risk-based audits of the controls established and operated by the "first tier" risk management functions and those exercised by the "second tier" risk control functions.

The audit opinions and underlying rationale of findings and recommendations form the basis upon which the Audit and Risk Committee can take reasonable (but not absolute) assurance that the risk governance arrangements are fit for purpose and working properly. The Audit and Risk Committee also receive reports from management, the risk control functions and the external auditors to help them to discharge their risk governance oversight responsibilities.

 

 

Economic capital

 

Economic capital is an internal measure of the minimum equity and preference capital required for the Group to maintain its credit rating based upon its risk profile. The concept of economic capital differs from that of regulatory capital, the latter being the capital required by capital adequacy regulations. Economic capital is calculated using the Banco Santander, S.A. economic capital model.

The economic capital model enables the Group to quantify the consolidated risk profile taking into account the significant risks of the business, as well as the diversification effect inherent in a multi-business group such as Santander UK. The Group uses this model to prepare the economic capital forecasts as part of its internal capital adequacy assessment report in accordance with the UK Financial Services Authority regulations within the framework of Pillar 2 of Basel II. Santander UK monitors the economic capital utilisation and its sufficiency on a monthly basis at Risk Committee.

The concept of diversification is fundamental to the proper measurement of the risk profile of a multi-business group. Diversification can be explained in terms of the imperfect correlation between the various risks, which means that the largest loss events do not occur simultaneously in all portfolios or for all types of risk. Consequently, the sum of the economic capital of the various portfolios and types of risk, taken separately, is higher than the Group's total economic capital. In other words, the risk borne by Santander UK as a whole is less than the risk arising from the sum of its various components considered separately.

The economic capital measurement and aggregation model also considers the concentration risk for wholesale portfolios (large corporations, banks and sovereigns), in terms of both the size of their exposure and their sector or geographic concentration. Product concentration in retail portfolios is captured through the application of an appropriate correlation model.

 

Risk appetite

 

The risk appetite is principally set by defining the economic capital limits by risk types. The Board agrees on high level limits for each principal risk type. The authority for managing and monitoring the risk appetite then flows to the Chief Executive Officer and from her to specific individuals. The Chief Risk Officer is responsible for setting other limits to support the monitoring of Board-approved limits, which is in turn supported by the Risk Division and the Risk Oversight Fora.

The Risk Appetite Statement is recommended by the Chief Executive Officer and approved by the Board, under advice from the Risk Committee. The Risk Appetite Statement is reviewed by the Board at least annually or more frequently if necessary (e.g. in the case of significant methodological change). This ensures that the risk appetite continues to be consistent with Santander UK's current and planned business activities. The Chief Executive Officer under advice from the Risk Committee approves the detailed allocation of risk appetite to different businesses or portfolios. The Chief Risk Officer, supported by the Risk Division, is responsible for the ongoing maintenance of the Risk Appetite Statement.

 

Return on risk-adjusted capital and value creation

 

Santander UK uses the RORAC methodology in its credit risk management, with the following activities and objectives:

Calculation of economic capital requirement and of the return thereon for the Group's business units and for business segments and portfolios in order to facilitate an optimal allocation of economic capital.

Budgeting of capital requirement and RORAC of the Group's business units.

Analysis and setting of prices in the decision-making process for transactions or products, such as loan approval.

 

The RORAC methodology facilitates the comparison, on a consistent basis, of the performance of transactions, customers, portfolios and businesses. It also identifies those which achieve a risk-adjusted return higher than the Group's cost of capital, thus aligning risk management and business management with the aim of maximising value creation.

 

Principal Risks and Risk Management

 

Principal risks

 

The principal risks affecting the Group are discussed below. Risks are generally managed through tailored management policies within the business division or operating segment in which they are originated. Within Santander UK, these risks are divided into two populations:

 

Population 1: Risks that are deemed to be material and are mitigated by a combination of internal controls and allocation of capital (both regulatory and economic).

Population 2: Risks that are deemed to be material but where Santander UK seeks to mitigate its exposure primarily by its internal control arrangements rather than by allocation of capital.

 

The principal risks are:

 

Risk type

Definition

Population

Credit Risk

(including residual credit and concentration)

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from the default of a customer or counterparty to which the Group has directly provided credit, or for which the Group has assumed a financial obligation, after realising collateral held.

Credit risk includes residual credit risk, which arises when credit risk measurement and mitigation techniques prove less effective than expected.

In addition, concentration risk, which is part of credit risk, includes large (connected) individual exposures, and significant exposures to groups of counterparties whose likelihood of default is driven by common underlying factors, e.g. sector, economy, geographical location or instrument type.

 

1

Market Risk

(including trading and non-traded)

 

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in economic value or reported income resulting from a change in the variables of financial instruments including interest rate, equity, credit spread, property and foreign currency risks.

Market risk consists of trading and non-traded market risks. Trading market risk includes risks on exposures held with the intention of benefiting from short term price differences in interest rate variations and other market price shifts. Non-traded market risk includes interest rate risk in investment portfolios.

 

1

Funding and Liquidity Risk

 

Funding risk is the risk that the Group does not have sufficiently stable and diverse sources of funding or the funding structure is inefficient or a funding programme such as debt issuance subsequently fails. For example, a securitisation arrangement may fail to operate as anticipated or the values of the assets transferred to a funding vehicle do not emerge as expected creating additional risks for the Group and its depositors. Risks arising from the encumbrance of assets are also included within this definition.

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have available sufficient financial resources to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure them only at excessive cost.

 

2

Operational Risk

 

Operational risk is the risk of loss to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external events. This includes regulatory, legal and compliance risk.

 

1

Other Risks

Other risks consist of business/strategic risk, reputational risk, pension obligation risk and residual value risk.

Business/strategic risk is the current or prospective risk to earnings and capital arising from changes in the business environment and from adverse business decisions, improper implementation of decisions or lack of responsiveness to changes in the business environment. This includes pro-cyclicality and capital planning risk. The internal component is the risk related to implementing the strategy. The external component is the risk of the business environment change on the Group's strategy.

1

Reputational risk is the risk of financial loss or reputational damage arising from treating customers unfairly, a failure to manage risk, a breakdown in internal controls, or poor communication with stakeholders. This includes the risk of decline in the value of the Group's franchise potentially arising from reduced market share, complexity, tenor and performance of products and distribution mechanisms. The reputational risk arising from operational risk events is managed within the operational risk framework.

2

Pension obligation risk is the risk of an unplanned increase in funding required by the Group's pension schemes, either because of a loss of net asset value or because of changes in legislation or regulatory action.

1

Residual value risk is the risk that the value of an asset at the end of a contract may be worth less than that required to achieve the minimum return from the transaction that had been assumed at its inception.

1

 

 

Responsibility for risk management, control and assurance

 

Responsibility for supporting the Board in risk management and control and responsibility for risk assurance may be summarised by principal risk as follows:

 

 

Risk Management

Risk Control

Risk Assurance

Board

Credit (including residual credit and concentration)

 

Retail Banking, Corporate Banking, Global Banking & Markets and Asset and Liability Management ('ALM' within Group Infrastructure)

 

Risk Division - Credit Risk Department

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Audit and

Risk

Committee

 

Internal

Audit

Market (including trading and non-traded)

 

Global Banking & Markets and ALM

Risk Division - Market Risk Department

Funding and Liquidity

- Funding

 

ALM

Risk Division - Market Risk Department

 

- Liquidity

 

ALM

Risk Division - Market Risk Department

Operational

- Non-regulatory

 

All

Risk Division - Enterprise & Operational Risk Department

 

- Regulatory

 

All

Finance Department

Legal & Compliance

 

Other

- Business/strategic

 

CEO supported by Executive Committee

Chief Risk Officer

- Reputational

 

CEO supported by Executive Committee

Chief Risk Officer

- Pension obligation

 

CEO supported by Pensions Committee

Risk Division - Market Risk Department

- Residual value

 

CEO supported by Risk Committee

Risk Division - Credit Risk Department

 

Following the outsourcing of key IT and operations processes to Banco Santander, S.A. group companies, risk governance of these entities is crucial. The use of service level agreements and key metrics support this governance. Santander UK works closely, and continues to enhance its interaction, with outsourced service providers via the application of appropriate risk frameworks.

 

Credit Risk

 

Definition

 

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from the default of a customer or counterparty to which the Group has directly provided credit, or for which the Group has assumed a financial obligation, after realising collateral held. Credit risk includes residual credit risk, which arises when credit risk measurement and mitigation techniques prove less effective than expected. In addition, concentration risk which is part of credit risk, includes large (connected) individual exposures, and significant exposures to groups of counterparties whose likelihood of default is driven by common underlying factors, e.g. sector, economy, geographical location or instrument type.

 

Treatment of credit risk

 

The specialisation of Santander UK's risk division is based on the type of customer and, accordingly, a distinction is made between non-standardised customers and standardised customers in the risk management process:

 

Non-standardised customers are defined as those to which a risk analyst has been assigned. This category includes wholesale banking customers, medium and large corporate customers and financial institutions. Risk management is performed through expert analysis supplemented by decision-making support tools based on internal risk assessment models.

 

Standardised customers are those which have not been expressly assigned a risk analyst. This category generally includes individuals and individual entrepreneurs and small businesses not classified as non-standardised customers. Management of these risks is based on internal risk assessment and automatic decision-making models, and supported by teams of analysts specialising in this type of risk when the model is not comprehensive enough or is not sufficiently accurate.

 

Total credit risk exposures

 

The Group's exposures to credit risk arise in the following businesses:

 

Retail exposures consist of residential mortgages, banking, and other personal financial services products and are managed by the Retail Banking division.

 

Corporate exposures consist of loans, bank accounts, treasury services, asset finance, cash transmission, trade finance and invoice discounting to small and medium-sized ('SME') UK companies and specialist businesses. Corporate exposures are managed by the Corporate Banking division.

 

Wholesale exposures consist of deposits with central banks, loans and debt securities issued or guaranteed by central and local governments ('sovereign exposures') and other exposures. Sovereign exposures are managed by the Asset and Liability Management Committee in the Group Infrastructure division and by the Short Term Markets desk in Global Banking & Markets. The Group's other exposures arise in connection with a variety of purposes:

 

As part of its treasury trading and global corporates lending activities, which are managed by the Global Banking & Markets division;

For yield and liquidity purposes, including the Asset and Liability Management Committee portfolio of asset-backed securities, which are managed by the Group Infrastructure division; and

In the Treasury asset portfolio which is being run down. This is managed by the Group Infrastructure division.

 

 

Maximum exposure to credit risk

 

The following table presents the amount that best represents the Group's estimated maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date without taking account of any collateral held or other credit enhancements:

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

Balances with central banks

25,569

3,453

Trading assets

21,034

20,143

Securities purchased under resale agreements

15,073

16,229

Derivative financial instruments

24,377

22,827

Financial assets designated at fair value

6,777

12,358

Available-for-sale securities

175

797

Loan and receivable securities

3,610

9,898

Loans and advances to customers

195,132

186,804

Loans and advances to banks

3,206

6,069

Other

6,185

4,335

Total exposure(1)

301,138

282,913

(1) In addition, the Group is exposed to credit risk in respect of guarantees granted, loan commitments and stock borrowing and lending agreements. The estimated maximum exposure to credit risk is described in Note 38 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Measures and measurement tools

 

Rating tools

 

The Group uses proprietary internal rating models to measure the credit quality of a given customer or transaction. Each rating relates to a certain probability of default or non-payment, determined on the basis of the Company's historical experience, with the exception of certain portfolios classified as "low default portfolios".

Global rating tools are applied to the sovereign risk, financial institution and global corporates segments. Management of the rating tools for these segments is centralised at Group level, with rating calculation and risk monitoring purposes devolved to the local units under Group supervision. These tools assign a rating to each customer, which is obtained from a quantitative or automatic module, based on balance sheet ratios or macroeconomic variables, supplemented by the analyst's expert judgement.

For non-standardised corporates and financial institutions, Banco Santander, S.A. has defined a single methodology for the construction of a rating in each country, based on an automatic module which includes an initial participation of the analyst that can be supplemented subsequently if required. The automatic module determines the rating in two phases, a quantitative phase and a qualitative phase. The latter is based on a corrective questionnaire which enables the analyst to modify the automatic score up or down by up to 2 rating points. The quantitative rating is determined by analysing the credit performance of a sample of customers and the correlation with their financial statements. Ratings assigned to customers are reviewed periodically to include any new financial information available and the Group's experience in its banking relationship with the customer. The frequency of the reviews is increased when customers reach certain levels in the automatic warning systems or are classified as requiring special monitoring. The rating tools are also reviewed in order to progressively fine-tune the ratings they provide.

For standardised customers, both legal entities and individuals, the Group has scoring tools that automatically assign a score to the proposed transactions.

These loan approval systems are supplemented by performance rating models. These tools provide enhanced predictability of the risk assumed and are used for preventive and marketing activities.

 

Credit risk parameters

 

The assessment of customers or transactions using rating or scoring systems constitutes a judgement of their credit quality, which is quantified through the probability of default ('PD'), in accordance with Basel II terminology. In addition to PD, the quantification of credit risk requires the estimation of other parameters, such as exposure at default ('EAD') and the percentage of EAD that will not be recovered (loss given default or 'LGD'). In estimating the risk involved in transactions, other factors such as any off-balance sheet exposure and collateral valuations are also taken into account.

The combination of these risk parameters (i.e. PD, LGD and EAD) enables calculation of the probable loss or expected loss ('EL'). The risk parameters also make it possible to calculate the regulatory capital requirement in accordance with the Basel II Capital Accord.

For portfolios with limited internal default experience (e.g. banks) parameter estimates are based on alternative sources, such as market prices or studies conducted by external agencies gathering the shared experience of a sufficient number of entities. These portfolios are known as low default portfolios.

For all other portfolios, parameter estimates are based on internal risk models. The PD is calculated by observing the cases of new defaults in relation to the final rating assigned to customers or to the scoring assigned to the related transactions. The LGD is calculated by observing the recoveries of defaulted loans, taking into account not only the income and expenses associated with the recovery process, but also the timing thereof and the indirect costs arising from the recovery process. EAD is calculated by comparing the use of committed facilities at the time of default and their use under normal (i.e. performing) circumstances, so as to estimate the eventual extent of use of the facilities in the event of default.

 

The parameters estimated for global portfolios (e.g. banks) are the same throughout the Banco Santander, S.A. group. Therefore, a financial institution will have the same PD for a specific rating, regardless of the Banco Santander, S.A. group entity in which the exposure is booked. By contrast, local portfolios (e.g. residential mortgages) have specific score and rating systems. PDs are assessed specifically for each local portfolio.

 

Credit risk cycle

 

The risk management process consists of identifying, measuring, analysing, controlling, negotiating and deciding on, as appropriate, the risks incurred in the Group's operations. The parties involved in this process are the risk taking areas, senior management and the risk units.

The process begins at senior management level, through the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee and the Risk Committee, which establishes the risk policies and procedures, and the limits and delegations of authorities, and approves and supervises the scope of action of the risk function.

The risk cycle comprises three different phases:

 

Pre-sale: this phase includes the risk planning and target setting processes, determination of the Group's risk appetite, approval of new products, risk analysis and credit rating process, and limit setting per counterparty. Limits can be established either through the framework of pre-approved or pre-classified limits or by the granting of a specific approval.

Sale: this is the decision-making phase for both transactions under pre-classified limits and those which have received specific approval.

Post-sale: this phase comprises the risk monitoring, measurement and control processes and the recovery process.

 

Risk limit planning and setting

 

Risk limit setting is a dynamic process that identifies the Group's risk appetite through the discussion of business proposals and the attitude to risk. This process is defined in the global risk limit plan, a comprehensive document for the integrated management of the balance sheet and its inherent risks, which establishes risk appetite on the basis of the various factors involved. The risk limits are founded on two basic structures: customers/segments and products.

For non-standardised risks, a top-level risk limit is approved if the quantum of risk required to support the customer is material when compared to its overall financing needs. These limits cover a variety of products (such as lending, trade finance or derivatives) enabling the Group to define a total risk appetite with that customer based on its current and expected financial needs. For global corporate groups, a pre-classification model based on an economic capital measurement and monitoring system is used. For the corporate segment, a simplified pre-classification model is applied for customers meeting certain requirements.

For standardised risks, the risk limits are planned and set using the credit management programme, a document agreed upon by the business areas and the risk units and approved by the Risk Committee or its delegated committees, which contains the expected results of transactions in terms of risk and return, as well as the limits applicable to the activity and the related risk management.

 

Risk analysis and credit rating process

 

Risk analysis is a pre-requisite for the approval of credit to customers by the Group. This analysis consists of examining the customer's ability to meet its contractual obligations to the Group, which involves analysing the customer's credit quality, its risk transactions, its solvency and the return to be obtained in view of the risk assumed.

The risk analysis is conducted when a new customer or transaction arises or with a pre-established frequency, depending on the segment involved. Additionally, the credit rating is examined and reviewed whenever a warning is triggered or an event affecting the credit risk of the customer or transaction occurs.

 

Transaction decision-making

 

The purpose of the transaction decision-making process is to analyse transactions and then make a decision, taking into account the risk appetite and any transaction elements that are important in achieving a balance between risk and return. The Group uses, among others, the RORAC methodology for risk analysis and pricing in the decision-making process on transactions and deals.

 

Risk monitoring and control

 

In order to ensure adequate credit quality control in addition to the tasks performed by the internal audit division, the Risk Division has a specific risk monitoring function to which specific resources and persons in charge have been assigned.

This monitoring function is based on an ongoing process of observation to enable early detection of any incidents that might arise in the evolution of the risk, the transactions, the customers and their environment, with a view to adopting mitigating actions. The risk monitoring function is specialised by customer segment.

 

For this purpose a system called "companies under special surveillance" (FEVE, using the Spanish acronym) has been designed that distinguishes four categories, three of which are considered as Active (extinguish, secure and reduce) and one of which is considered Passive (monitor). The inclusion of a company in the FEVE system does not mean that there has been a default, but rather that it is deemed advisable to adopt a specific policy for this company, to place a person in charge and to set the policy implementation period. Customers classified as FEVE are reviewed at least every six months, or every three months for those classified in the most severe categories. A company can be classified as FEVE as a result of the monitoring process itself, a review performed by internal audit, a decision made by the sales manager responsible for that company or the triggering of the automatic warning system.

Assigned ratings are reviewed at least annually, but should any weakness be detected, or depending on the rating itself, more frequent reviews are performed. For exposures to standardised customers, the key indicators are monitored in order to detect any variance in the performance of the loan portfolio with respect to the forecasts contained in the credit management programmes.

 

Analysis of the mortgage portfolio

With regard to standardised exposures, the mortgage loan portfolio is particularly noteworthy because of its significance with respect to the Group's total loans and receivables. Disclosures relating to the mortgage portfolio are set out in the section entitled Credit Risk - Retail Banking.

 

Risk control function

 

Supplementing the management process, the risk control function obtains a global view of the Group's loan portfolio, through the various phases of the risk cycle, with a sufficient level of detail to permit the assessment of the current risk position and any changes therein. Changes in the Group's risk position are controlled on an ongoing and systematic basis against budgets, limits and benchmarks, and the impacts of these changes in future situations, both of an external nature and those arising from strategic decisions, are assessed in order to establish measures that place the profile and amount of the loan portfolio within the parameters set by the Group.

The risk control function is performed by assessing risks from various complementary perspectives, the main pillar being control by geographical location, business area, management model, product and process, thus facilitating the detection of specific areas of action requiring decision-making.

In 2009, one of the focus points of the risk control function was to ensure compliance with the corporate criteria for the classification of refinanced portfolios and to monitor production volumes and their performance. In 2010, additional monitoring of restructured debts was implemented, which was used to improve the performance of portfolios.

Within the corporate framework established in the wider Banco Santander, S.A. group for compliance with the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002, a corporate tool is utilised for the documentation and certification of all the sub-processes, operational risks and related mitigating controls. The Risk Division assesses annually the efficiency of the internal control of its activities.

 

Scenario analysis

As part of the ongoing risk monitoring and control management process, the Group performs simulations of the portfolio performance in different adverse and stress scenarios (stress testing) which enable it to assess the Group's capital adequacy in certain future situations. These simulations cover the Group's main portfolios and are conducted systematically using a corporate methodology with the following features:

 

It determines the sensitivity of risk factors (PD, LGD) to macroeconomic variables.

It characterises benchmark scenarios.

It identifies "break-off scenarios" (the levels above which the sensitivity of the risk factors to macroeconomic variables is more accentuated) and the distance of these break-off scenarios from the current situation and the benchmark scenarios.

It estimates the expected loss associated with each scenario and the changes in the risk profile of each portfolio arising from variations in macroeconomic variables.

 

The simulation models used by the Group use data of a full business cycle to calibrate the performance of risk factors, given certain movements in macroeconomic variables. In the wholesale and corporate banking areas, since low-default portfolios are involved, there is insufficient historical default data available to perform the calibration and, therefore, expert judgment is used.

The main macroeconomic variables contained in the Group's scenarios are as follows:

 

Unemployment rate;

House prices;

GDP;

Interest rates; and

Inflation rate.

 

The scenario analysis enables management to better understand the expected performance of the portfolio given certain changing market conditions and situations. The analyses performed, both in base and in stressed scenarios, with a time horizon of five years, show the strength of the balance sheet against the various market and macroeconomic situations simulated.

 

Recovery process

 

Recovery management is defined as a strategic, integrated business activity. Banco Santander, S.A. has a global model which is applied and implemented locally by the Group, considering the specific features of the business in each area of activity.

The specific objectives of the recovery process are as follows:

To collect payments in arrears so that accounts return to performing status. If this is not possible within a reasonable time period, the aim is to fully or partially recover debts, regardless of their status for accounting or management purposes.

To maintain and strengthen the relationship with customers, paying attention to customer payment behaviour.

 

 

Credit risk from other standpoints

 

Certain areas and/or specific views of credit risk deserve specialist attention, complementary to global risk management.

 

Significant concentrations of credit risk

 

During 2010, the Group's most significant exposures to credit risk derived from:

the residential mortgage portfolio and unsecured personal lending businesses in Retail Banking;

secured lending and derivatives exposures to companies, real estate entities and social housing associations, as well as portfolios of assets inconsistent with the Group's future strategy such as shipping and aviation in Corporate Banking;

unsecured lending and derivatives exposure to banks and other financial institutions in Global Banking & Markets; and

the Treasury asset portfolio in Group Infrastructure.

 

The residential mortgage portfolio comprises loans to private individuals secured against residential properties in the UK. This is a prime portfolio with total exposure of £172.4bn at 31 December 2010 (2009: £166.9bn). The Unsecured Personal Loan portfolio comprises unsecured loans to private individuals issued in the UK. Total exposure stood at £4.0bn at 31 December 2010 (2009: £5.0bn). The commercial mortgage, real estate and social housing portfolios in Corporate Banking comprise loans and associated derivatives secured on UK property, while the corporate and SME portfolios are largely unsecured. The total committed facilities exposure to these portfolios was £30.9bn at 31 December 2010 (2009: £27.9bn).

Although the operations of Corporate Banking, Global Banking & Markets and Group Infrastructure are based mainly in the UK, they have built up exposures to various entities around the world and are therefore exposed to concentrations of risk related to geographic area. These are further analysed below:

 

Group

2010

2009

Corporate Banking

Global Banking & Markets

Corporate Banking

Global Banking & Markets

Country

%

%

%

%

UK

90

81

88

81

Rest of Europe

5

18

6

13

US

2

-

2

2

Other, including non-OECD

3

1

4

4

100

100

100

100

 

 

Group Infrastructure's exposures result from its asset portfolios, including the Treasury asset portfolio. The exposures within the Treasury asset portfolio were £5.1bn at 31 December 2010 (2009: £9.6bn). Details of credit ratings and geographic analysis can be found on pages 110 and 111.

Geographical exposures are governed by country limits set by Santander centrally and determined according to the classification of the country (whether it is a developed OECD country or not), the rating of the country and its gross domestic product. The Group is constrained in its country risk exposure, within the group limits, and by its capital base.

 

Credit risk mitigation

 

In managing its gross exposures, the Group uses the policies and processes described in the Credit Risk sections below. Collateral, when received, can be held in the form of security over mortgaged property, debentures over a company's assets and through market-standard collateral agreements.

 

Loans and advances

 

The following tables categorise the Group's loans and advances into three categories as: neither past due nor impaired, past due but not individually impaired, or individually impaired. For certain homogeneous portfolios of loans and advances, impairment is assessed on a collective basis and each loan is not individually assessed for impairment. Loans in this category are classified as neither past due nor impaired, or past due but not individually impaired, depending upon their arrears status. The impairment loss allowances include allowances against financial assets that have been individually assessed for impairment and those that are subject to collective assessment for impairment.

 

Group

2010

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but

not individually impaired

Individually impaired

Total

Impairment loss allowances

Total

carrying

value

Statutory balance sheet line items

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Trading assets

- Loans and advances to banks

8,281

-

-

8,281

-

8,281

- Loans and advances to customers

8,659

-

-

8,659

-

8,659

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

- Loans and advances to banks

11

-

-

11

-

11

- Loans and advances to customers

5,468

-

-

5,468

-

5,468

Loans and advances to banks

- Placements with other banks

3,206

-

-

3,206

-

3,206

- Amounts due from parent

646

-

-

646

-

646

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

161,168

3,735

1,170

166,073

(526)

165,547

- Corporate loans

15,395

256

677

16,328

(396)

15,932

- Finance leases

2,600

21

32

2,653

(19)

2,634

- Other secured advances

3,607

274

61

3,942

(77)

3,865

- Other unsecured advances

7,131

233

370

7,734

(637)

7,097

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

57

-

-

57

-

57

Loans and receivables securities

 

3,600

-

16

3,616

(6)

3,610

Total loans and advances

219,829

4,519

2,326

226,674

(1,661)

225,013

 

Company

 

 

2010

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but

not individually impaired

Individually impaired

Total

Impairment loss allowances

Total

carrying

value

 

Statutory balance sheet line items

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

 

- Loans and advances to banks

55

-

-

55

-

55

 

- Loans and advances to customers

44

-

-

44

-

44

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

- Placements with other banks

1,118

-

-

1,118

-

1,118

 

- Amounts due from parent

3

-

-

3

-

3

 

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

114,836

-

-

114,836

-

114,836

 

Loans and advances to customers

 

- Advances secured on residential property

161,152

3,735

1,170

166,057

(524)

165,533

 

- Corporate loans

5,075

160

494

5,729

(140)

5,589

 

- Other secured advances

3,175

242

53

3,470

(77)

3,393

 

- Other unsecured advances

3,642

118

258

4,018

(399)

3,619

 

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

46

-

-

46

-

46

 

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

1,043

-

316

1,359

(316)

1,043

 

Loans and receivables securities

5,368

-

16

5,384

(6)

5,378

 

Total loans and advances

295,557

4,255

2,307

302,119

(1,462)

300,657

 

 

 

Group

2009

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but

not individually impaired

Individually impaired

Total

Impairment loss

allowances

Total

carrying

value

Statutory balance sheet line items

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Trading assets

- Loans and advances to banks

6,791

-

-

6,791

-

6,791

- Loans and advances to customers

9,089

-

-

9,089

-

9,089

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

- Loans and advances to customers

6,379

-

-

6,379

-

6,379

Loans and advances to banks

- Placements with other banks

1,605

-

-

1,605

-

1,605

- Amounts due from parent

5,995

-

-

5,995

-

5,995

- Amounts due from associates

1,551

-

-

1,551

-

1,551

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

155,295

4,097

1,074

160,466

(484)

159,982

- Corporate loans

11,836

166

507

12,509

(357)

12,152

- Finance leases

1,566

19

17

1,602

(2)

1,600

- Other secured advances

3,571

127

121

3,819

(62)

3,757

- Other unsecured advances

4,505

220

525

5,250

(394)

4,856

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

4,457

-

-

4,457

-

4,457

Loans and receivables securities

9,870

-

34

9,904

(6)

9,898

Total loans and advances

222,510

4,629

2,278

229,417

(1,305)

228,112

 

Company

 

 

2009

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but

not individually impaired

Individually impaired

Total

Impairment loss

allowances

Total

carrying

value

 

Statutory balance sheet line items

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

 

- Loans and advances to banks

160

-

-

160

-

160

 

- Loans and advances to customers

45

-

-

45

-

45

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

- Placements with other banks

995

-

-

995

-

995

 

- Amounts due from parent

1

-

-

1

-

1

 

- Amounts due from associates

1

-

-

1

-

1

 

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

108,661

-

-

108,661

-

108,661

 

Loans and advances to customers

 

- Advances secured on residential property

 118,240

3,626

880

122,746

(395)

122,351

 

- Other secured advances

3,530

117

112

3,759

(55)

3,704

 

- Other unsecured advances

4,362

188

486

5,036

(351)

4,685

 

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

71

-

-

71

-

71

 

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

938

-

98

1,036

(98)

938

 

Total loans and advances

237,004

3,931

1,576

242,511

(899)

241,612

 

Credit quality of loans and advances that are neither past due nor individually impaired

 

The credit quality of loans and advances that are neither past due nor individually impaired is as follows:

 

Group

2010

Good

Satisfactory

Higher Risk

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

Trading assets

- Loans and advances to banks

8,035

191

55

8,281

- Loans and advances to customers

8,659

-

-

8,659

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

- Loans and advances to banks

11

-

-

11

- Loans and advances to customers

5,468

-

-

5,468

Loans and advances to banks

- Placements with other banks

3,193

-

13

3,206

- Amounts due from parent

646

-

-

646

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

148,086

12,542

540

161,168

- Corporate loans

10,211

4,768

416

15,395

- Finance leases

1,165

1,370

65

2,600

- Other secured advances

1,670

1,655

282

3,607

- Other unsecured advances

1,086

5,805

240

7,131

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

57

-

-

57

Loans and receivables securities

2,457

486

657

3,600

Total loans and advances

190,744

26,817

2,268

219,829

 

 

 

 

2010

Company

Good

Satisfactory

Higher Risk

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

- Loans and advances to banks

55

-

-

55

- Loans and advances to customers

44

-

-

44

Loans and advances to banks

- Placements with other banks

1,105

-

13

1,118

- Amounts due from parent

3

-

-

3

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

114,836

-

-

114,836

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

148,072

12,540

540

161,152

- Corporate loans

1,576

3,320

179

5,075

- Other secured advances

1,470

1,456

249

3,175

- Other unsecured advances

555

2,965

122

3,642

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

46

-

-

46

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

1,043

-

-

1,043

Loans and receivables securities

4,256

486

626

5,368

Total loans and advances

273,061

20,767

1,729

295,557

 

2009

Group

Good

£m

Satisfactory

£m

Higher Risk

£m

Total

£m

Trading assets

- Loans and advances to banks

6,610

181

-

6,791

- Loans and advances to customers

9,089

-

-

9,089

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

- Loans and advances to customers

6,379

-

-

6,379

Loans and advances to banks

- Placements with other banks

1,605

-

-

1,605

- Amounts due from parent

5,995

-

-

5,995

- Amounts due from associates

1,551

-

-

1,551

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

141,820

13,023

452

155,295

- Corporate loans

7,276

4,444

116

11,836

 - Finance leases

1,452

114

-

1,566

- Other secured advances

1,412

2,065

94

3,571

- Other unsecured advances

1,212

3,184

109

4,505

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

4,457

-

-

4,457

Loans and receivables securities

4,217

5,645

8

9,870

Total loans and advances

193,075

28,656

779

222,510

 

2009

Company

Good

Satisfactory

Higher Risk

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss

- Loans and advances to banks

160

-

-

160

- Loans and advances to customers

45

-

-

45

Loans and advances to banks

- Placements with other banks

995

-

-

995

- Amounts due from parent

1

-

-

1

- Amounts due from associates

1

-

-

1

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

108,661

-

-

108,661

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

105,848

11,939

453

118,240

- Other secured advances

1,531

1,912

87

3,530

- Other unsecured advances

1,172

3,084

106

4,362

- Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries

71

-

-

71

- Amounts due from subsidiaries

938

-

-

938

Total loans and advances

219,423

16,935

646

237,004

 

Internal measures of credit quality have been used in the table analysing credit quality, above. Different measures are applied to retail and wholesale lending, as follows:

 

Retail Lending

Wholesale and Corporate Lending

Expected loss

Probability of default

Probability of default

Probability of default

Financial statements description

Unsecured(1)

Secured(2)

Business Banking(3)

Good

0.0 - 0.5%

0.0 - 0.5%(4)

0.0 - 0.5%

0.0 - 0.5%

Satisfactory

0.5 - 12.5%

0.5 - 12.5%

0.5 - 12.5%

0.5 - 12.5%

Higher Risk

12.5%+

12.5%+(5)

12.5%+

12.5%+

(1) Unsecured consists of other unsecured advances to individuals.

(2) Secured consists of advances to individuals secured on residential property.

(3) Business Banking consists of other secured advances and other unsecured advances to small businesses.

(4) Or a loan-to-value ('LTV') ratio of less than 75%.

(5) Or an LTV ratio exceeding 75%.

 

Summarised descriptions of credit quality used in the financial statements relating to retail and wholesale lending are as follows:

 

Good

There is a very high likelihood that the asset will not default and will be recovered in full. The exposure has a negligible or low probability of default. Such exposure also exhibits a strong capacity to meet financial commitments and only exceptionally shows any period of delinquency.

Satisfactory

There is a high likelihood that the asset will be recovered and is therefore of no cause for concern to the Group. The asset has low to moderate probability of default, strong recovery rates and may typically show only short periods of delinquency. Typically these are high loan-to-value mortgages or most unsecured lending. Moderate to high application scores, credit bureau scores or behavioural scores characterise this credit quality.

Higher Risk

All rated accounts that are not viewed as Good or Satisfactory are rated as Higher Risk. The assets are characterised by some concern over the obligor's ability to make payments when due. There may also be doubts over the value of collateral or security provided. However, the borrower or counterparty is continuing to make payments when due i.e. the assets have not yet converted to actual delinquency and is expected to settle all outstanding amounts of principal and interest.

 

Maturity analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not individually impaired

 

A maturity analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not individually impaired is set out below.

In the retail loan portfolio, a loan or advance is considered past due when any contractual payments have been missed and for secured loans, when they are more than 30 days in arrears. The amounts disclosed in the table are the total financial asset of the account, not just the past due payments. All retail accounts are classified as non-impaired as impairment loss allowances are raised collectively with the exception of properties in possession, where an impairment loss allowance is raised on a case by case basis and hence are not included in the table below.

In the corporate loan portfolio, a loan or advance is considered past due when it is 90 days or more in arrears, and also when the Group has reason to believe that full repayment of the loan is in doubt.

 

Group

2010

Past due up to 1 month

Past due 1-2 months

Past due 2-3 months

Past due 3-6 months

Past due 6 months and over

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

-

1,444

827

1,031

433

3,735

- Corporate loans

-

-

-

256

-

256

- Finance leases

-

16

2

3

-

21

- Other secured advances

-

48

40

72

114

274

- Other unsecured advances

59

108

29

23

14

233

Total loans and advances

59

1,616

898

1,385

561

4,519

 

Company

2010

Past due up to 1 month

Past due 1-2 months

Past due 2-3 months

Past due 3-6 months

Past due 6

months and over

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

-

1,444

827

1,031

433

3,735

- Corporate loans

-

-

-

160

-

160

- Other secured advances

-

42

35

64

101

242

- Other unsecured advances

54

25

14

11

14

118

Total loans and advances

54

1,511

876

1,266

548

4,255

 

 

Group

2009

Past due up to 1 month

Past due 1-2 months

Past due 2-3 months

Past due 3-6 months

Past due 6

months and over

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

-

1,532

886

1,111

568

4,097

- Corporate loans

-

-

-

166

-

166

- Finance leases

-

-

-

19

-

19

- Other secured advances

-

41

13

17

56

127

- Other unsecured advances

99

43

20

30

28

220

Total loans and advances

99

1,616

919

1,343

652

4,629

 

Company

2009

Past due up to 1 month

Past due 1-2 months

Past due 2-3 months

Past due 3-6 months

Past due 6

months and over

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Loans and advances to customers

- Advances secured on residential property

-

1,369

803

992

462

3,626

- Other secured advances

-

38

12

16

51

117

- Other unsecured advances

94

39

19

24

12

188

Total loans and advances

94

1,446

834

1,032

525

3,931

 

Impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

 

The Group's impairment loss allowances policy is set out in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Year-end impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of the Group's impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers is presented below.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Observed impairment loss allowances

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

369

313

174

74

45

Corporate loans - UK

271

185

13

-

-

Finance leases - UK

2

1

-

-

1

Other secured advances - UK

55

50

37

32

73

Unsecured personal advances - UK

381

341

227

250

243

Total observed impairment loss allowances

1,078

890

451

356

362

Incurred but not yet observed impairment loss allowances

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

157

171

184

102

60

Corporate loans - UK

125

172

289

-

-

Finance leases - UK

17

1

1

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

22

12

11

8

3

Unsecured personal advances - UK

256

53

65

85

111

Total incurred but not yet observed impairment loss allowances

577

409

550

195

174

Total impairment loss allowances

1,655

1,299

1,001

551

536

 

Movements in impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of movements in the Group's impairment loss allowances on loans and advances is presented below.

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Impairment loss allowances at 1 January

1,299

1,001

551

536

394

Amounts written off

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

(42)

(84)

(32)

(9)

(11)

Corporate loans - UK

(68)

-

-

-

-

Finance leases - UK

(5)

(4)

-

(1)

-

Other secured advances - UK

(48)

(17)

(9)

(24)

(27)

Unsecured personal advances - UK

(448)

(425)

(262)

(339)

(205)

Total amounts written off

(611)

(530)

(303)

(373)

(243)

Observed impairment losses charged against profit

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

98

223

132

38

35

Corporate loans - UK

154

172

13

-

-

Finance leases - UK

6

5

-

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

53

30

14

(17)

(25)

Unsecured personal advances - UK

488

539

239

346

289

Total observed impairment losses charged against profit

799

969

398

367

299

Incurred but not yet observed impairment losses charged against profit

(53)

(141)

(4)

21

86

Total impairment losses charged against profit

746

828

394

388

385

Assumed through transfers of entities under common control

221

-

359

-

-

Impairment loss allowances at the end of the year

1,655

1,299

1,001

551

536

 

Recoveries

An analysis of the Group's recoveries is presented below.

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

1

1

1

2

2

Corporate loans - UK

12

23

-

-

-

Finance leases - UK

1

1

-

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

-

-

12

6

7

Unsecured personal advances - UK

20

30

33

36

32

Total amount recovered

34

55

46

44

41

 

Group non-performing loans and advances(1,3)

 

An analysis of the Group's non-performing loans and advances is presented below.

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Non-performing loans and advances that are impaired

1,843

1,613

1,143

296

375

Non-performing loans and advances that are not impaired

1,874

2,000

1,235

596

451

Total non-performing loans and advances(2)

3,717

3,613

2,378

892

826

Total Group customer assets(3,4)

202,090

190,067

183,345

118,399

109,035

Total Group impairment loss allowances

1,655

1,299

1,001

551

536

%

%

%

%

%

Non-performing loans and advances as a % of customers assets

1.84

1.90

1.30

0.75

0.76

Coverage ratio(5)

44.53

35.95

42.09

61.77

64.89

(1) Loans and advances are classified as non-performing typically when the counterparty fails to make payments when contractually due for three months or longer.

(2) All non-performing loans continue accruing interest.

(3) Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

(4) Customer assets include social housing loans and finance leases, and exclude trading assets.

(5) Impairment loan loss allowances as a percentage of non-performing loans and advances.

 

Further analyses on the Group non-performing loans and advances are set out respectively, in the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking credit risk discussions below.

 

Group loan collections, rehabilitation and recoveries

 

The Collections & Recoveries Department ('Collections & Recoveries') is responsible for debt management initiatives by the Retail Banking division. The Workouts and Collections Department ('Workouts & Collections') is responsible for debt management activities on the other portfolios.

Debt management strategies, which include using collection tools, negotiating repayment arrangements and debt counselling, can start prior to actual payment default or as early as the day after a repayment is past due and can continue until legal action. Different collection strategies are applied to different segments of the portfolio subject to the perceived levels of risk. Further information on loan collections and recoveries activity is set out in the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking sections below.

 

Group restructured loans

 

Loans have been restructured or renegotiated by capitalising the arrears on the customer's account, as a result of a revised payment arrangement (i.e. adherence to a repayment plan over a specified period), a refinancing (either a term extension or an interest only concession) or, in limited cases, a debt for equity swap. For further information, refer to the discussions of restructured loans in the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking sections.

As at 31 December 2010, the carrying amount of financial assets that would otherwise be past due or impaired whose terms have been renegotiated was £1,435m (2009: £894m).

 

 

Credit Risk - Retail Banking

 

Definition

 

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from the default of a customer or counterparty to which the Group has directly provided credit, or for which the Group has assumed a financial obligation, after realising collateral held. Credit risk arises principally in connection with Retail Banking's loan and investment assets (including residential mortgages, unsecured lending, and finance leases and other secured lending).

 

Managing credit risk

 

Retail Banking aims to actively manage and control credit risk. The Group is principally a retail prime lender and has no appetite or product offering for any type of sub-prime business. The Group's credit policy explicitly prohibits such lending and is specifically designed to ensure that any business written is responsible, affordable (both initially and on an on-going basis) and of a good credit quality.

The Board has approved a set of risk appetite limits to cover credit risk arising in Retail Banking. Within these limits, credit mandates and policies are approved with respect to products sold by the Group.

 

Retail Banking customer assets

 

An analysis of Retail Banking customer assets is presented below.

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

Advances secured on residential properties(1)

165.8

160.6

153.2

Other secured advances(2)

- Commercial mortgages

2.2

2.2

2.3

- Other

0.4

-

-

Unsecured loans

- Overdrafts(3)

0.5

0.6

0.6

- Unsecured Personal Loans(3,4)

3.4

4.2

5.7

- Other loans (cards and consumer) (3)

3.8

-

-

Finance leases(5)

1.5

-

-

Other loans

0.2

0.1

0.1

Total

177.8

167.7

161.9

(1) Excludes loans to UK Social Housing Associations, which are managed within Corporate Banking, accrued interest and other items.

(2) Additional commercial mortgages of £1.3bn (2009: £1.6bn, 2008 £1.5bn) are managed and classified within Corporate Banking.

(3) Overdrafts, UPLs and other loans relating to cards and consumer are disclosed within unsecured loans and other loans in Note 17.

(4) Includes cahoot UPLs of £0.2bn (2009: £0.3bn, 2008 £0.4bn).

(5) Additional finance leases of £1.2bn are managed and classified within Corporate Banking.

 

 

Residential mortgages(1)

An analysis of movements in Retail Banking mortgage balances is presented below.

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

As at 1 January

160.6

153.2

104.5

Gross mortgage lending in the year

23.9

26.1

31.8

Capital repayments in the year

(18.6)

(18.8)

(20.7)

Acquired through business combinations

-

-

37.6

Other(2)

-

0.1

-

As at 31 December

165.9

160.6

153.2

(1) Excludes loans to UK Social Housing Associations, which are managed and classified within Corporate Banking.

(2) Transfers between segments.

 

Unsecured personal lending(1)  

An analysis of movements in Retail Banking unsecured personal lending balances is presented below.

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

As at 1 January

5.0

6.3

7.2

Gross lending in the year

1.3

1.5

0.9

Capital repayments in the year

(2.4)

(2.8)

(1.8)

Acquired through business combinations

0.1

-

-

As at 31 December

4.0

5.0

6.3

(1) Includes UPLs, overdrafts and cahoot and excludes consumer finance and Santander Cards credit cards.

 

Retail Banking lends on many types of property but only after a credit risk assessment of the borrower, including affordability modelling (i.e. an assessment of the customer's capacity to repay) and an assessment of the property is undertaken. The quality of the mortgage assets are monitored to ensure that they are within agreed portfolio limits. Residential lending is subject to lending policy and lending authority levels, which are used to structure lending decisions to the same standard across the retail network, a process further improved by mortgage credit scoring, underwriter accreditation and regular compliance reviews. Details concerning the prospective borrower and the mortgage are subject to a criteria-based decision-making process. Criteria for assessment include credit references, Loan-to-Value (LTV) ratio, borrower status and the mortgage credit score.

All mortgages provided by Retail Banking are secured on UK or Isle of Man properties. All properties must be permanent in construction; mobile homes are not acceptable. The Group can provide a loan for the purchase of properties outside the UK where the property is a second home and the loan is secured on the main property located in the UK.

Prior to granting any first mortgage loan on a property, the Group has the property valued by an approved and qualified surveyor. The valuation is based on Group guidelines, which build upon the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors guidance on valuation methods. In the case of re-mortgages, where the LTV is 75% or lower, the risk judged by the size of the advance requested is medium to low, the credit score of the applicant is considered medium or high, and an accurate, reputable automated valuation is available, this may substitute for a surveyor's valuation.

For existing mortgages, the current values of the properties on which individual mortgages are secured are estimated quarterly. For each individual property, details such as address, type of property and number of bedrooms are supplied to an independent agency that estimates current property valuations using information from recent property transactions and valuations. All additional loans require an automated valuation or surveyor's valuation. The use of an automated valuation depends upon the availability of a reliable automated valuation, and the level of credit risk posed by the proposed loan.

Until 2008, for additional lending where a first-charge mortgage was already held with the Group and the LTV was less than 90%, the original property value was subject to indexation and no further survey carried out. During 2008, this practice was phased-out, with all additional loans requiring an automated valuation or surveyor's valuation.

 

Higher risk loans

 

The Group is principally a retail prime lender and does not originate second charge mortgages. A small portfolio of second charge mortgages was acquired as a result of the transfer of Alliance & Leicester plc to the Company. This portfolio is in run-down and amounted to £32m at 31 December 2010.

Certain mortgage products may be considered higher risk. Operating as a prime lender in the UK mortgage market, the Group does not have any material sub-portfolio demonstrating very poor performance. The portfolio's arrears performance has continued to be relatively stable and favourable to industry benchmarks. Arrears rates and loss rates continued to be very low. Nonetheless, there are some mortgage types that present higher risks than others. These products consist of:

 

a) Interest-only loans

Interest-only mortgages require monthly interest payments and the repayment of principal at maturity. This can be arranged via investment products including Individual Savings Accounts and pension policies, or by the sale of the property. It is the customer's responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient funds to repay the principal in full at maturity.

Interest-only mortgages are well-established and common in the UK market. Lending policies to mitigate the risks inherent in this repayment structure are in place and mature. While the risks are higher than capital repayment mortgages, they are only modestly so. The performance of this significant sub-portfolio has been in line with expectations and stable.

 

b) Flexible loans

Flexible mortgages allow customers to vary their monthly payment, or take payment holidays, within predetermined criteria and/or up to an agreed credit limit. Customers are also permitted to draw down additional funds at any time up to the limit or redraw amounts that have been previously overpaid.

 

c) Loans with original loan-to-value >100%

Progressively stricter lending criteria are applied to mortgages above a loan-to-value of 75%. Prior to 2009, in limited circumstances, customers were able to borrow more than 100% of the value of the property against which the loan was secured, within certain limits. In 2010 and 2009, no loans were made with a loan-to-value of more than 100% (2008: less than 0.1%). In 2010 and 2009, less than 0.1% of new secured loan advances were made with a loan-to-value of more than 90% (2008: 2%). Loans with higher loan-to-value ratios carry a higher risk due to the increased likelihood that liquidation of the collateral will not yield sufficient funds to cover the loan advanced, arrears and the costs of liquidation.

 

d) Sub-prime lending

The Group has no appetite or product offering for sub-prime business. The Group's credit policy explicitly prohibits such lending and is designed to ensure that any business written is responsible, affordable (both initially and an on-going basis) and of a good credit quality.

 

Mortgage credit quality and credit risk mitigation - loan-to-value analysis(1)

 

2010

2009

2008

Loan-to-value analysis:

New business

< 75%

74%

83%

62%

75% - 90%

26%

17%

36%

> 90%

-

-

2%

100%

100%

100%

Average loan-to-value of new business (at inception)

62%

61%

65%

Stock

< 75%

67%

61%

67%

75% - 90%

22%

22%

22%

90% - 100%

7%

10%

7%

>100% i.e. negative equity

4%

7%

4%

100%

100%

100%

Average loan-to-value of stock (indexed)

51%

52%

51%

(1) Excludes any fees added to the loan, and only includes the drawn loan amount, not drawdown limits.

 

Loan-to-value analysis

During the first half of 2010, LTV on new business completions declined during the first quarter (fourth quarter 2009: 64%, first quarter 2010: 61%), but started to rise in the second quarter to 62%, due to targeted policy relaxation and competitive pricing at higher LTV. This increased modestly during the second half of 2010, with the fourth quarter 2010 LTV at 63% (third quarter 2010: 63%) due to increased higher LTV applications.

At 31 December 2010, 4% (2009: 7%) of the retail mortgage portfolio was over 100% LTV. The decrease was due to an increase in property prices during the period, and continued control of the retention process.

At 31 December 2010, the indexed stock LTV decreased to 51% from 2009 (Q3 2010: 51%, Q4 2009: 52%) due to changes in the net lending mix, and rising house prices evidenced in the portfolio revaluation.

 

Mortgage credit quality and credit risk mitigation - borrower profile(1)

 

2010

2009

2008

Borrower profile:

New business

First-time buyers

21%

17%

11%

Home movers

47%

37%

25%

Remortgagers

32%

46%

64%

100%

100%

100%

Of which:(2)

- Interest-only loans

34%

36%

53%

- Flexi loans

19%

9%

14%

- Loans with original LTV >100%

-

-

-

Stock

First-time buyers

18%

17%

16%

Home movers

39%

38%

39%

Remortgagers

43%

45%

45%

100%

100%

100%

Of which: (2)

- Interest-only loans

42%

43%

43%

- Flexi loans

19%

18%

18%

- Loans with original LTV >100%

-

-

-

(1) Excludes any fees added to the loan, and only includes the drawn loan amount, not drawdown limits.

(2) Where a loan exhibits more than one of the higher risk criteria, it is included in all the applicable categories.

 

Borrower profile

During 2010, the proportion of new business from remortgages continued to decrease. This trend continued to be seen across the UK market as low interest rates and stricter lending criteria continued to reduce the incentives for customers to remortgage to another lender.

During 2009, the proportion of new business from remortgages began to decrease. This trend was seen across the UK market as lower interest rates and stricter lending criteria began to reduce the incentives for customers to remortgage to another lender.

 

Average earnings multiple (at inception)

 

 2010

2009

 2008

Average earnings multiple (at inception)

2.9

2.8

3.0

 

During 2010, the average earnings multiple (at inception) increased as compared to 2009 due to a higher proportion of lending to first-time buyers which generally have higher earnings multiples. During 2009, the average earnings multiple (at inception) decreased as compared to 2008 due to reduced risk appetite and stricter lending criteria.

 

Mortgage arrears, restructuring, forbearance and repossessed collateral 

 

Collections & Recoveries is responsible for all debt management initiatives on the secured loan portfolio for Retail Banking. Debt management strategies, which include negotiating repayment arrangements and concessions and debt counselling, can start as early as the day after a repayment is past due and will continue until legal action. Different collection strategies are applied to different segments of the portfolio subject to the perceived levels of risk for example, loan-to-value, collections score and account characteristics.

Collections & Recoveries' activities exist to ensure customers who have failed to make their contractual or required minimum payments or have exceeded their agreed credit limits are encouraged to pay back the required amounts, and in the event they are unable to do so to pursue recovery of the debt in order to maximise the net recovered balance.

The overall aim is to minimise losses whilst not adversely affecting brand, customer loyalty, fee income, or compliance with relevant legal and regulatory standards.

Collections & Recoveries activity is performed within either:

Santander UK, by Collections & Recoveries, utilising the Group's operational centres and involves the use of selected third party specialists where appropriate.

Additional outsourced providers, using operational centres approved by the Group as sufficiently capable to deal with the Group customers to the high standards expected by the Group.

 

Effective collections and recoveries activity is dependent on:

Predicting customer behaviours and treating customers fairly: By monitoring and modelling customer profiles and designing and implementing appropriate customer communication and repayment strategies, the Group's collections and recoveries strategies are designed to balance treating customers fairly with prioritising monies owed to the Group by the customer.

 >

Negotiation: Ongoing communication and negotiation with the customer are the dominant criteria in recovery management at any time during the life of the account (even the legal phase) so as to meet the objective of recovering the highest amount as quickly as possible and at the least cost.

Monitoring customer repayment promises: It is essential that agreements or promises agreed with the customer for the repayment of debts are monitored and evaluated to ensure that they are reducing the indebtedness of the customer and are cost effective for the organisation (i.e. adding positive financial value over operational costs).

 

An agreement or promise is defined as any transaction in which a firm commitment is made with the customer, in relation to a specific payment schedule. In most instances, where repayment is maintained in accordance with the promise, fees and charges to the account are withheld. Where the customer fails to meet their obligations, enforcement activity will resume where appropriate. This will involve statutory notice of default, termination of agreement and the account may be referred to debt recovery agents.

Management aimed at the customer: Effective collections management is focussed on assisting the customer in finding workable and sustainable repayment solutions based on the customer's personal financial circumstances and needs. This approach engenders and builds customer loyalty and the priority of repayment to the Group. Understanding customers enables the Group to arrange repayment solutions which are best for the customer whilst meeting the financial objectives of the Group.

Customer relationship management: Collections & Recoveries will have sight of information about some of a customer's other Santander UK retail products (e.g. banking, unsecured personal loan and mortgage) and this will be taken into consideration when agreeing repayment plans. For example, a repayment plan for unsecured personal loans will not be agreed if such a plan compromises the customer's ability to repay their Santander UK bank account. This approach reduces the risk of duplicating collections and recoveries activity and associated costs (e.g. payment of fees to external companies and the fees of lawyers taking the same measures).

Standardisation and automation of recovery proceedings: Standard processes are defined based on the number of payments or cycles of delinquency. Strategies are defined to automate the production of legislatively required documentation (such as Consumer Credit Act ('CCA') statutory notices of default) and to automate, so far as is possible, the transfer of customers to appropriate post write-off recovery action at pre-defined strategy stages. Documentation is converted and stored in electronic format, except where this is not permitted for legal reasons.

Ongoing management and coordination between all parties involved: Appropriate coordination is required between Santander UK internal collection departments, outsource and in-source collections services providers and in-house and outsourced post write-off collection agents in order to assure a smooth transfer of cases from one area to another and to quickly resolve any problems which might arise.

 

 

If the agreed repayment arrangement is not maintained, legal proceedings may be undertaken and may result in the property being taken into possession. The Group sells the repossessed property at market price and uses the sale proceeds, net of costs, to pay off the outstanding value of the mortgage. The stock of repossessed properties held by the Group varies according to the number of new possessions and the buoyancy of the housing market.

 

Mortgages - Non-performing loans and advances

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Total mortgages non-performing loans and advances(1, 2)

2,343

2,436

1,490

Total mortgage asset(2)

165,772

160,552

153,343

Total impairment loan loss allowances for mortgages

526

484

358

%

%

%

Mortgages non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of total mortgage asset

1.41

1.52

0.97

Coverage ratio(3)

22.45

19.87

24.03

(1) Mortgages are classified as non-performing when the counterparty fails to make a payment when contractually due for three months or longer.

(2) Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

(3) Impairment loan loss allowances as a percentage of non-performing loans and advances.

 

In 2010, mortgage non-performing loans as a percentage of mortgage assets decreased to 1.41% from 1.52% at 31 December 2009, despite the growth in the mortgage asset, as a result of effective collection processes, the high quality of the mortgage portfolio, stable unemployment and persistently low interest rates. Similarly, the level of mortgage non-performing loans and advances reduced to £2,343m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £2,436m). However, impairment loss allowances increased to £526m (2009: £484m) principally due to the higher number of loans and advances subject to the Group's forbearance process, which require higher levels of impairment loss allowances to reflect their increased risk characteristics. At 31 December 2010, the coverage ratio increased to 22.45% (2009: 19.87%) as a result of both the increase in the impairment loss allowances and the decline in the level of mortgage non-performing loans and advances.

In 2009, mortgage non-performing loans as a percentage of mortgage assets increased to 1.52% from 0.97% at 31 December 2008 as a result of the rise in unemployment in the fourth quarter of 2008, which continued in 2009, as well as an increase in the mortgage asset. Impairment loss allowances at 31 December 2009 increased to £484m (2008: £358m) for similar reasons.

 

Mortgages - non-performing loans and advances by higher risk loan type(1)

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Total mortgages non-performing loans and advances

2,343

2,436

1,490

Of which:

- Interest only loans

1,608

1,665

1,001

- Flexi loans

226

251

218

- Loans with original LTV > 100%

22

25

11

(1) Where a loan exhibits more than one of the higher risk criteria, it is included in all the applicable categories.

 

Mortgages - Arrears

 

The following table analyses the residential mortgage arrears status at 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008 for Retail Banking by volume and value.

 

2010

2009

2008

Volume

'000

Value(1)

£m

Volume

'000

Value(1)

£m

Volume

'000

Value(1)

£m

Performing

1,588

160,867

1,564

155,380

1,532

148,838

Early arrears(2)

23

2,439

25

2,625

29

2,886

Late arrears(3)

21

2,343

22

2,436

14

1,490

Properties in possession

1

123

1

110

1

129

1,633

165,772

1,612

160,551

1,576

153,343

(1) Excludes accrued interest.

(2) Early arrears refer to mortgages that are between 31 days and 90 days in arrears.

(3) Late arrears refer to mortgages that are over 90 days in arrears.

 

The following table set forth information on UK residential mortgage arrears (separately for higher risk loans and the remaining loan portfolio) at 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008 for Retail Banking compared to the industry average as provided by the Council of Mortgage Lenders ('CML').

 

Group(1)

CML(2) (unaudited)

Higher risk loans(3)

Remaining loan portfolio

Mortgage arrears

Interest-only loans

Flexible

loans

Loans with original LTV > 100%

Total(3)

(Percentage of total mortgage loans by number)

31 to 60 days in arrears:

31 December 2008

0.57

0.11

-

0.56

1.19

-

31 December 2009

0.45

0.07

0.01

0.51

1.00

-

31 December 2010

0.41

0.06

-

0.47

0.92

-

61 to 90 days in arrears:

31 December 2008

0.32

0.06

-

0.30

0.65

-

31 December 2009

0.27

0.04

-

0.29

0.58

-

31 December 2010

0.23

0.03

-

0.26

0.51

-

Over 3 to 6 months in arrears:

31 December 2008

0.31

0.06

-

0.28

0.62

1.01

31 December 20090.410.050.010.360.800.97
31 December 20100.360.05-0.330.720.87

Over 6 to 12 months in arrears:

31 December 2008

0.13

0.03

-

0.11

0.26

0.62

31 December 2009

0.22

0.04

-

0.16

0.40

0.81

31 December 2010

0.20

0.03

-

0.15

0.37

0.69

Over 12 months in arrears:

31 December 2008

0.02

-

-

0.02

0.05

0.25

31 December 2009

0.09

0.03

-

0.07

0.17

0.60

31 December 2010

0.11

0.02

-

0.08

0.20

0.55

(1) Group data is not readily available for arrears less than 31 days.

(2) Council of Mortgage Lenders data is not available for arrears less than three months.

(3) Where a loan exhibits more than one of the higher risk criteria, it is included in all the applicable categories. As a result, the total of the mortgage arrears for higher risk loans and remaining loan portfolio will not agree to the total mortgage arrears percentages.

 

Mortgage arrears collection and rehabilitation of accounts

 

When a mortgage is in arrears, the account is considered due and classified in the Collections category. The Collections & Recoveries department follows the Collections & Recoveries policies and makes use of various collection and rehabilitation tools with the aim to bring the customer account up to date as soon as possible. The policies comply with the Mortgage: Conduct of Business ('MCOB') rules and Treating Customers Fairly ('TCF') principles of the UK Financial Services Authority. The procedures are discussed below.

 

Mortgage: Conduct of Business (Unaudited)

The MCOB rules, issued by the UK Financial Services Authority in 2003, govern the relationship between mortgage lenders and borrowers in the UK. They apply to regulated mortgage contracts which are entered into after 31 October 2004. The MCOB rules are designed to improve the information available to consumers and increase their ability to make informed choices in the mortgage market. Santander UK's Collections & Recovery policies for the mortgage business comply with MCOB as follows.

We will:

Ensure that we adopt a reasonable approach to the time over which any arrears should be repaid, having particular regard to the need to establish a payment plan which is feasible in terms of the borrower's circumstances.

Allow the borrower (unless we have good reason not to) to change the date on which the payment is due or the method of making payment and will give the customer a written explanation of our reasons if we refuse the request.

Consider all refinance options that may include extending the mortgage term or movement to interest only as per the latest policy guidelines.

Not automatically capitalise arrears, but will consider capitalisation subject to the satisfaction of policy guidelines.

Advise the borrower to obtain advice from various debt counselling agencies that provide free and impartial advice to the general public, and will work with all such parties to assist the borrower if the customer wants us to.

Provide the borrower with a complete written update of any alternative repayment arrangements agreed.

Not put pressure on customers through excessive phone calls or correspondence, or by contact at unreasonable hours.

Have regard to a borrowers circumstances and any knowledge we may have of a borrowers working pattern or religious faith.

Retain adequate records of all dealings with our customers.

Keep our customers informed by sending regular statements which will include any arrears charges incurred.

Regularly assess and review our charges to ensure that they are not excessive.

Provide the borrower with a written update of any alternative repayment arrangements agreed, if they request it.

Have regard to general law including the UK Data Protection Act.

 

Treating Customers Fairly (Unaudited)

The Collections & Recoveries policies also ensure that the expected level of customer service satisfies the requirements of general TCF principles, in addition to MCOB. These are as follows.

We will:

Treat borrowers fairly, equally and with courtesy at all times having regard to their personal and financial circumstances.

Ensure that all written communication will stress our commitment to treating customer fairly, ensure that agreed procedures/consequences are fully explained, confirm all costs that will be debited and explain our complaints process if needed.

Ensure that every telephone call with the borrower will require appropriate security steps being undertaken to confirm identification and records of the content made.

Ensure that our collectors have a fully documented development/training plan and that there is a monitoring process for performance management

Ensure that our collectors are independently monitored for call quality on a monthly basis.

Ensure that our appointed suppliers have a fully documented training plan for new starters; they will have a monitoring process for performance management and follow Santander UK's documented complaints process.

Advise the borrower to obtain advice from various debt counselling agencies that provide free and impartial advice to the general public, and will work with all such parties to assist the borrower if the customer wants us to.

Give the customer reasonable time (breathing space) to consider all available options.

Take account of the borrower's financial circumstances when arranging a payment plan but if we cannot agree such a plan we may continue with enforcement activity which will involve statutory default notice, termination of agreement and referral to debt recovery agents where appropriate.

Ensure that policies are clear on how we will deal with customers with serious or terminal illness, mental health problems or disability.

Ensure that our offices are open for extended hours and are adequately resourced at all times.

Ensure that senior management will have access to relevant and timely information to evidence TCF measures are operating effectively.

 

Entry and exit criteria from the collections category

There are specific criteria for entry into and exit from the collections category. An account will move to the collections category once it meets the entry criteria and will move out of it once it has met the exit criteria.

The entry and exit criteria are dependent on the core system on which the mortgage account resides. The trigger for entry will vary from the account being one penny in arrears for flexible mortgages, to a fixed number of days after the arrears are equal to or greater than one instalment. Generally, the trigger for exit will vary from arrears being cleared for flexible mortgages, to arrears being reduced to below £100 or the account being restructured or entering the forbearance process, as described below.

 

General principles of collections

The general principles of the Group's collections consist of:

Wherever possible, rehabilitation tools are used to encourage customers to find their own way out of difficulties but this solution should be agreeable to the Group.

The Group will be sympathetic and not make unreasonable demands of the customer.

Customer retention, where appropriate, is important and helping customers through difficult times can improve loyalty.

Guarantors are pursued only after it is established that the borrower is unable or unwilling to fulfil their contractual arrangements or if contact with the borrower cannot be made.

Litigation and repossession is the last resort.

 

Dialogue with customer

The Group will be open, honest and communicative with customers. Dialogue with the customer will be established as soon as possible and maintained through the collections and recoveries process. Telephone, letters, home visits, text messages and engagement of external agents may be used to establish contact.

The Group will, where appropriate, establish why the arrears have arisen and identify whether the problem is short or long term. Wherever possible, further difficulties should be prevented.

The Group will ensure that the customer understands that collection action is being taken and the reason for this as well as the likely consequences if the account is not brought up to date immediately.

The Group seeks to gain the customers commitment to deal with the problem.

All contact with the customer will be recorded in the 'collections history database' which is a part of the collections system.

Customers able to bring their account into order without assistance ('self cures') do not need to be contacted by Collections & Recoveries.

 

Collection tools 

 The Group uses the following collection tools to recover mortgage arrears.

a)

Use of external agents - external agents may be engaged to trace customers during the collection and recoveries phase. Remuneration is on a fixed fee basis. The Group manages external agents and suppliers to ensure that they follow a consistent approach to any collections and recoveries activity, and relevant management information is received from them in a consistent style. In addition, suppliers are audited and reviewed to ensure that:

they are fully compliant with TCF, MCOB and other UK Financial Services Authority requirements

training, audit and review meeting notes are fully documented; and

supplier contracts are referenced to TCF and MCOB requirements.

b)

Field collections - Field visits are undertaken by agents acting as full representatives of Santander UK visiting a mortgaged property in person. Field visits are only used where the borrower is two or more instalments in arrears and has not responded satisfactorily to other forms of communication. Where unauthorised letting or abandonment of the property is suspected, a field visit may be made irrespective of the arrears situation.

c)

Exercise the legal right of set-off - other designated bank accounts may be combined to clear the arrears and any other fees, charges or sums which are due but not to make principal repayments. Right of set-off may only be performed on available funds; this does not include funds in a bank account intended for priority debts such as rent or council tax. If a payment arrangement is in place, right to set-off will not apply. The repayment period also cannot be extended to defer collection or arrears.

d)

Arrears fees - An arrears fee charge is typically raised on the anniversary of a missed payment i.e. when payment has not been received before the next payment is due and/or on the anniversary of a missed payment when the customer has not kept to an agreed repayment plan with Collections & Recoveries (i.e. a broken promise). A customer will only be charged a maximum of one fixed fee per month.

 

Mortgages restructured or renegotiated

 

The table below analyses residential mortgages thathave been restructured or renegotiated by capitalising the arrears on the customer's account, as a result of a revised payment arrangement (i.e. adherence to a repayment plan over a specified period) or a refinancing (either a term extension or an interest only concession).

 

2010

2010

2009

2009

£m

%

£m

%

Mortgages restructured during the year (1, 2)

569

100

491

100

Of which(3):

- Interest only loans

254

45

208

42

- Flexi loans

18

3

34

7

- Loans with original LTV >100%

1

-

1

-

(1) All mortgages originated by the Group are first charge.

(2) Mortgages are included within the year that they were restructured.

(3) Where a loan exhibits more than one of the higher risk criteria, it is included in all the applicable categories.

 

Capitalisation

Capitalisation is the process whereby outstanding arrears are added to the loan balance to be repaid over the remaining loanterm. Capitalisation can be offered to borrowers under the forms of payment arrangements and refinancing (either a term extension or an interest only concession), subject to customer negotiation and vetting: 

a)

Payment arrangements - discretion exists to vary the repayment schedule to allow customers to bring the account up to date. The objective is to bring the account up to date as soon as possible.

If a customer has repeatedly broken previous arrangements to the extent that the advisor does not believe the payment arrangement will be adhered to, payment arrangements are not agreed without an upfront payment. If a payment arrangement is refused, the customer is notified of this in writing, as per requirements under the pre-action protocol. In the event a customer breaks an arrangement, Santander UK will wait at least 15 business days before passing them to litigation / continuing with litigation, as per requirements under the pre-action protocol. New arrangements will not be agreed in these fifteen days; however the original arrangement may be reinstated.

b)

Refinancing - Collections & Recoveries may offer to pay off an existing mortgage and replace it with a new one, only to accounts in arrears or with significant financial difficulties or if customer is up to date but states they are experiencing financial hardship. Collections & Recoveries may offer a term extension or interest only concession. The eligibility criteria for refinancing are:

If the account is at least one instalment in arrears, or

If the customer has been consistently underpaying their instalment (for at least the last two months) then this can be taken as evidence of financial hardship, or

If the customer claims a medium term temporary change in financial circumstances has caused financial distress, the customer must supply evidence in writing of this before they can be considered for refinancing. Pre-delinquent customers are not required to submit evidence of financial hardship.

 

 

To qualify for either a term extension or an interest only concession, affordability is assessed, and the customer must also meet the specific criteria detailed below, in addition to the eligibility criteria for refinancing. The customer must be made aware of the implications of refinancing and appropriate confirmation of this received from them.

Term Extensions - the repayment period/program may be extended to reduce monthly repayments if all other collections tools have been exhausted. Customers may be offered a term extension where they are up-to-date but showing evidence of financial difficulties, or are already in the Collections & Recoveries process, and no other refinancing has been performed in the last 12 months. The term can be extended to no more than 40 years and the customer must be no more than 75 years old at the end of the revised term of the mortgage.

Interest Only Concessions - the monthly repayment may be reduced to interest payment only with capital repayment deferred if all other collections tools have been exhausted and a term extension is either not possible or affordable. Customers may be offered an interest only concession where they are up-to-date but showing evidence of financial difficulties, or are already in the Collections & Recoveries process. Interest only concessions are offered up to a two year maximum period, after which a review is carried out and a further extension may be granted depending on customer circumstances. Periodic reviews of the customer financial situation are undertaken to assess when the customer can afford to return to the repayment method. In 2010, the Group's processes were enhanced to introduce a new affordability tool which increased the emphasis placed on factors such as affordability and overall customer indebtedness.

 

As at 31 December 2010 and 2009, the stock of mortgage accounts that had either had their term extended or converted to interest only amounted to slightly in excess of 1% of all mortgage accounts, both by number and value.

Levels of adherence to revised payment terms remained high during the year and remain in line with the level seen during 2009 at approximately 70%.

 

Litigation and recovery

The account is escalated to the litigation and recovery phase when a customer is unwilling or unable to adhere to an agreement regarding arrears that is acceptable to Santander UK, after the above options have been exhausted. In most cases, this will occur when a customer reaches three instalments in arrears and has been in the collections category for at least 90 days. The following specifically trigger customers to be referred to litigation:

Three or more missed instalments and having reached the end of strategy.

Upon breaking an agreement while having more than three missed instalments. Accounts are given at least 15 business days to make up the payment missed under the agreement before being passed to litigation as per the pre-action protocol.

Legal disputes.

Voluntary repossession.

 

Forbearance

A programme of forbearance designed to enable borrowers experiencing short to medium term repayment difficulties to remain in their home has been in place since 2009. Santander UK will consider delaying referral to litigation, or delaying action once in litigation (also known as forbearance) under certain circumstances, such as where the customer presents evidence that the mortgage will be redeemed or the arrears cleared, or where the mortgage has a very low balance and arrears, or where the customer is making a regular payment of at least the instalment amount. These forbearance policies exist to ensure that repossession is only used as a last resort for customers with an ability to repay and where mortgage arrears pose reduced risks to the Group.

Forbearance or repayment arrangements allow a mortgage customer to repay a monthly amount which is lower than their contractual monthly payment for a short period. This period is usually for no more than 12 months and is negotiated with the customer by the mortgage collectors.

During the period of forbearance, arrears management activity continues with the aim to rehabilitate accounts. There is no clearing down of arrears such that unless the customer is paying more than their contractual minimum payment, arrears balances will remain. When customers come to the end of their arrangement period they will continue to be managed as a mainstream collections case and if Santander UK is unable to recover any remaining arrears, then the account will move toward possession proceedings.

 

Application of impairment loss methodology to accounts in arrears and collection

Customer accounts that have had restructuring or forbearance policies applied continue to be reported in arrears until the arrears are capitalised. As a result, the impairment loss allowances on these accounts are calculated in the same manner as any other account that is in arrears. Once arrears are capitalised, the account is reclassified as a performing asset.

The accounts within the collections category classified as 'performing assets' continue to be assessed for impairment collectively under the Group's normal collective assessment methodology, as described in "Collective assessment" in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The accounts within the collections category classified as 'performing assets' have the loss propensity factor for the IBNO segment applied, rather than the loss propensity factor for the observed segment.

 

The remaining accounts in the collections category have the loss propensity factor for the observed segment applied, as they are individually impaired. The loss propensity factor for the observed segment is normally higher than for the IBNO segment.

In 2010, an adjustment was made to the loss propensity factor applied to the accounts in the collections category classified as 'performing assets' to reflect the higher risk that they will default, as compared with other performing assets. No adjustment is required to the loss factor or the loss per case. Previously, no adjustments were made in view of what were then lower volumes, as it was not considered material.

Separate adjustments to the loss propensity factors are made to the performing accounts within the collections category that were previously in arrears and the performing accounts within the collections category that have always been performing, to reflect their differing risk profiles. The full observed loss propensity factors are not applied to these accounts, as it is not expected that all accounts in the collections category will default, particularly as the Group's lending policies only permit a mortgage restructure, refinance or forbearance in circumstances where the customer is expected to be able to meet the related requirements and ultimately repay in full.

 

Repossessed collateral

 

The following tables set forth information on properties in possession, at 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008 for Retail Banking compared to the industry average as provided by the Council of Mortgage Lenders, as well as the carrying amount of assets obtained as collateral.

 

Group

Group

Group

CML (unaudited)

Properties in possession

Number of properties

Value

£m

Percentage of total mortgage loans by number

%

%

31 December 2008

969

130

0.06

0.21

31 December 2009

820

110

0.05

0.14

31 December 2010

873

123

0.05

0.11

 

Mortgage Representations and Warranties

 

The majority of the Group's exposure to representation and warranty claims relates to its residential mortgage securitisation activities and covered bond transactions which are described in Note 18 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The remaining exposures to representations and warranties principally arise in connection with the sale of subsidiaries as described in Note 38 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

In connection with the Group's securitisation and covered bond transactions, the Group makes various representations and warranties relating to the mortgage loans sold as of the date of such sale which cover, among other things:

 

The Group's ownership of the loan.

The validity of the legal charge securing the loan.

The effectiveness of title insurance on the property securing the loan.

The loan's compliance with any applicable loan criteria established under the transaction structure.

The loan's compliance with applicable laws.

Whether the mortgage property was occupied by the borrower.

Whether the mortgage loan was originated in conformity with the originator's lending criteria.

The detailed data concerning the mortgage loan that was included on the mortgage loan schedule.

 

The specific representations and warranties in relation to the mortgage loans made by the Group depend on the nature of the transaction and the requirements of the transaction structure. The Group is principally a retail prime lender and has no appetite or product offering for any type of sub-prime business. The Group's credit policy explicitly prohibits such lending. Market conditions and credit-rating agency requirements may also affect representations and warranties the Group may agree to make upon the sale of the mortgage loans.

Details of the outstanding balances under mortgage-backed securitisation transactions sponsored by the Group's SPEs are described in Note 18 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. These outstanding transactions are collateralised by prime residential mortgage loans.

The Group's representations and warranties regarding the sold mortgage loans are generally not subject to stated limits in amount or time of coverage. However, contractual liability may arise when the representations and warranties are breached. In the event of a breach of these representations and warranties, the Group may be required to either repurchase the mortgage loans (generally at unpaid principal balance plus accrued interest) with the identified defects or reduce its share in the trust holding the mortgage loans by an amount equivalent to the repurchase price. In the case of a repurchase, the Group may bear any subsequent credit loss on the mortgage loan.

The Group manages and monitors its securitisation activities closely to minimise potential claims. To date, the Group has only identified a very small number of non-compliant mortgage loans in its securitisation transactions.

 

Banking and Consumer Credit

 

Retail Banking also grants bank account facilities and overdrafts, and provides unsecured personal loans and finance leases. Retail Banking uses systems and processes to manage the risks involved. These include the use of application and behavioural scoring systems to assist in the granting of credit facilities as well as regular monitoring of scorecard performance and the quality of the unsecured lending portfolios. Behavioural scoring examines the lending relationships that a customer has with Retail Banking and how the customer uses their bank account. This information generates a score that is used to assist in deciding the level of risk (in terms of overdraft facility amount, card facilities granted and preferred unsecured personal loan value) for each customer that Retail Banking is willing to accept. Individual customer scores are normally updated on a monthly basis. Retail Banking has successfully extended the use of behavioural scoring into other areas of the business, including the refinement of debt management strategies and bank account transaction processing.

 

Business Banking

 

Business Banking provides a range of products to assist with the finance requirements of small businesses, including overdrafts and loans. Risk management policies are specific to and reflect the risks inherent in each product set. Approval processes for credit risk include the use of credit scoring and decision models, supported by judgemental analysis for larger exposure, assisted by the use of probability of default and loss given default data. Business Banking operates within policies and authority levels approved by the Chief Risk Officer. Business Banking has a dedicated risk team, reflecting the desire for risk control to be close to the business needs and risks. Business Banking provides mortgages to borrowers on a range of mainly non-residential property. Agreed credit assessment criteria include serviceability ratios, loan-to-value ratios, and quality of tenants, with stress testing against interest rate movements. Concentration limits per borrower and business sector are also employed to ensure a balanced loan portfolio. The management of defaulting accounts and the repossession and sale of properties is handled by a dedicated function within the risk operation.

The Risk Management Framework is reviewed periodically to ensure that it provides the structure to support existing business volumes as well as the planned expansion in the UK market.

 

The tables below analyse the non-performing banking and consumer credit, and Business Banking loans into unsecured loans and finance leases and other secured loans.

 

Unsecured loans - Non-performing loans and advances

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Total unsecured non-performing loans and advances(1,2)

236

260

397

Total unsecured customer assets(2)

7,693

4,979

6,251

Total impairment loan loss allowances for unsecured loans and advances

637

394

292

%

%

%

Non-performing loans as a percentage of unsecured customer assets

3.07

5.22

6.35

Coverage ratio(3)

269.92

151.54

73.55

(1) Unsecured loans and advances are classified as non-performing when the counterparty fails to make a payment when contractually due for three months or longer.

(2) Includes UPLs, overdrafts, cahoot, consumer finance and credit cards. Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

(3) Impairment loan loss allowances as a percentage of non-performing loans and advances.

 

In 2010, unsecured non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of unsecured customer assets decreased to 3.07% from 5.22% at 31 December 2009. The decrease was predominantly driven by low unsecured non-performing loans and advances from the Santander Cards and Santander Consumer businesses acquired in 2010 and an improvement in the quality of new business written in 2010 and the latter part of 2009. The level of unsecured non-performing loans and advances reduced to £236m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £260m). However, impairment loss allowances increased to £637m (2009: £394m), principally due to the IBNO balances transferred on the acquired businesses. The coverage ratio increased to 269.92% in 2010 (2009: 151.54%) due to both higher impairment loss allowances and the decrease in unsecured non-performing loans and advances.

In 2009, unsecured non-performing loans as a percentage of unsecured customer assets decreased to 5.22% from 6.35% at 31 December 2008, despite challenging market conditions in 2009, as a result of the write-off of a portion of the transferred Alliance & Leicester portfolio. Impairment loss allowances at 31 December 2009 increased to £394m (2008: £292m) principally due to the IBNO balances transferred on the acquired businesses.

The coverage ratio increased from 73.55% to 151.54% due to both higher impairment loss allowances and the decrease in unsecured non-performing loans and advances.

 

Finance leases and other secured loans - Non-performing loans and advances

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Total finance leases and other secured non-performing loans and advances(1,2)

204

208

94

Total finance leases and other secured customer assets(2)

4,314

2,216

2,276

Total impairment loan loss allowances for finance leases and other secured loans and advances(3)

90

57

44

%

%

%

Non-performing loans as a % of finance leases and other secured customer assets

4.73

9.39

4.13

Coverage ratio(4)

44.12

27.40

46.81

(1) Finance leases and other secured loans are classified as non-performing when the counterparty fails to make a payment when contractually due for three months or longer.

(2) Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

(3) Excludes impairment loss allowances on commercial mortgages that are managed within Corporate Banking.

(4) Impairment loan loss allowances as a percentage of non-performing loans and advances.

 

In 2010, finance leases and other secured non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of the finance leases and other secured customer assets decreased to 4.73% from 9.39% at 31 December 2009. The decrease was predominantly driven by higher quality business acquired in 2010 which has significantly lower non-performing loans as a percentage of finance leases and other secured customer assets as compared to the Group's existing portfolio. The level of finance leases and other secured non-performing loans and advances reduced to £204m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £208m) due to the write off in the commercial mortgages portfolio and partially offset by the non-performing loans from the acquired business in 2010. Impairment loss allowances increasedto £90m (2009: £57m) due to the growth in finance leases and other secured customer asset. The coverage ratio increased from 27.40% to 44.12% due to both higher impairment loss allowances and the decrease in finance leases and other secured non-performing loans and advances.

In 2009, finance leases and other secured non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of the finance leases and other secured customer asset increased to 9.39% from 4.13% at 31 December 2008. This was driven by the deterioration in market conditions which resulted in a reduction in commercial property prices. Similarly, the level of finance leases and other securednon-performing loans and advances increased to £208m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £94m). Impairment loss allowances increased to £57m (2008: £44m) also reflecting the deterioration in market conditions, although the impact was reduced due to higher anticipated recoveries from the realisation of collateral held on new loans.

The coverage ratio decreased from 46.81% to 27.40% due to the larger increase in non-performing loans and advances compared to the increase in impairment loss allowances.

 

Private Banking

 

Santander UK offers private banking and other specialist banking services in the UK, through Cater Allen and Abbey Sharedealing, and offshore banking through Abbey National International Limited, Alliance & Leicester International Limited and Bradford & Bingley International Limited. Prior to its sale in 2010 as described in Note 23 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, Santander UK also offered other specialist banking services in the UK through James Hay.

Cater Allen provides a limited range of products to assist with the finance requirements of individuals and businesses. Risk management policies are specific to and reflect the risks inherent in each product set. Approval processes for credit risk include the use of judgement, assisted by the use of credit scoring and credit ratings. Cater Allen operates within policies and authority levels approved by the Chief Risk Officer. Cater Allen has a dedicated risk team, reflecting the desire for risk control to be close to the business needs and risks.

Abbey National International Limited uses the Abbey International brand. Its office is in Jersey. Alliance & Leicester International Limited and Bradford & Bingley International Limited arebased in the Isle of Man. All the offshore deposit-taking businesses focus on attracting deposits from both retail and corporate customers via savings accounts denominated in sterling, US dollars and euro. There is no credit risk associated in taking deposits.

Cater Allen Limited, trading as Cater Allen Private Bank, provides financial services products to individuals and businesses. The business attracts clients by marketing to introducers, including independent financial advisers.

Abbey Stockbrokers Limited, trading as Abbey Sharedealing, provides a direct share dealing service for customers. Customers buy and sell shares on their account with the help of the dealers at Abbey Sharedealing. No advice is provided and all trades are on an execution-only basis. Account customers are required to provide funds before settlement. As such there is no credit risk associated with this type of activity.

James Hay provided administration services for self-invested pension plans and the WRAP portfolio management product (which combines all of a client's investments into a single manageable account) to end customers mainly via independent financial advisers and branded financial service providers. With the exception of fees receivable, there is no credit risk associated with this type of service. As noted above, this business was sold on 10 March 2010.

 

Impairment losses on loans and advances to customers

 

The Group's impairment loss allowances policy for retail assets is set out in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Retail Banking analysis of impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of the Retail Banking impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers is presented below.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Observed impairment loss allowances

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

369

313

174

74

45

Finance leases - UK

2

-

-

-

1

Other secured advances - UK

55

50

37

32

73

Unsecured advances - UK

381

341

227

250

243

Total observed impairment loss allowances

807

704

438

356

362

Incurred but not yet observed impairment loss allowances

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

157

171

184

102

60

Finance leases - UK

16

-

-

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

22

12

11

8

3

Unsecured advances - UK

256

53

65

85

111

Total incurred but not yet observed impairment loss allowances

451

236

260

195

174

Total impairment loss allowances

1,258

940

698

551

536

 

Retail Banking movements in impairment loss allowances on loans and advances

An analysis of movements in the Retail Banking impairment loss allowances on loans and advances is presented below.

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Impairment loss allowances at 1 January

940

698

551

536

394

Amounts written off

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

(42)

(84)

(32)

(9)

(11)

Finance leases - UK

(2)

-

-

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

(48)

(17)

(9)

(25)

(27)

Unsecured advances - UK

(448)

(399)

(262)

(339)

(205)

Total amounts written off

(540)

(500)

(303)

(373)

(243)

Observed impairment losses charged against/(released into) profit

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

98

223

132

38

35

Finance leases - UK

4

-

-

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

53

30

14

(17)

(25)

Unsecured advances - UK

488

513

239

346

289

Total observed impairment losses charged against profit

643

766

385

367

299

Incurred but not yet observed impairment losses (released into)/charged against profit

(6)

(24)

(17)

21

86

Total impairment losses charged against profit (including discontinued operations)

637

742

368

388

385

Assumed through transfers of entities under common control

221

-

82

-

-

Impairment loss allowances at the end of the year

1,258

940

698

551

536

 

Retail Banking recoveries

An analysis of the Retail Banking recoveries is presented below.

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Advances secured on residential properties - UK

1

1

1

2

2

Finance leases - UK

1

-

-

-

-

Other secured advances - UK

-

-

12

6

7

Unsecured advances - UK

20

30

33

36

32

Total amount recovered

22

31

46

44

41

 

Retail Banking non-performing loans and advances (1)

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Retail Banking non-performing loans and advances that are impaired(2)

1,166

1,124

746

296

375

Retail Banking non-performing loans and advances that are not impaired

1,617

1,780

1,235

596

451

Total Retail Banking non-performing loans and advances(3)

2,783

2,904

1,981

892

826

Total Retail Banking customer assets(4)

177,779

167,747

161,870

111,396

103,328

Total Retail Banking impairment loan loss allowances(5)

1,253

935

694

551

536

%

%

%

%

%

Non-performing loans and advances as a % of customers assets

1.57

1.73

1.22

0.80

0.80

Coverage ratio(6)

45.02

32.20

35.03

61.77

64.89

(1) Loans and advances are classified as non-performing typically when the counterparty fails to make payments when contractually due for three months or longer.

(2) Non-performing loans against which an impairment loss allowance has been established.

(3) All non-performing loans are UK and continue accruing interest.

(4) Excludes accrued interest. 

(5) Excludes the portion of impairment loss allowances on commercial mortgages that are managed within Corporate Banking.

(6) Impairment loan loss allowances as a percentage of non-performing loans and advances.

 

In 2010, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of customers assets decreased to 1.57% from 1.73% at 31 December 2009. The decrease reflected a reduction in non-performing loans to £2,783m at 31 December 2010 (2009: £2,904m) across the main Retail Banking products (i.e. mortgages, unsecured loans, and finance leases and other secured loans). This was principallydriven by effective mortgage collection processes, the high quality of the mortgage portfolio, stable unemployment and persistently low interest rates. However, impairment loss allowances increased to £1,253m (2009: £935m), principally due to the higher number of loans and advances subject to the Group's forbearance process, which require higher levels of impairment loss allowances to reflect their increased risk characteristics. The coverage ratio increased to 45.02% in 2010 (2009: 32.20%) due to both higher impairment loss allowances and the decrease in non-performing loans and advances. The amounts written off on unsecured advances increased from £399m to £448m at 31 December 2010 reflecting the combined effect of the transferred Alliance & Leicester portfolio in 2009 and further acquisitions in 2010.

In 2009, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of loans and advances to customers increased from 1.22% to 1.73%. This primarily reflected the impact of the continued market deterioration on the performance of the residential mortgage portfolio. This also further increased the proportion of non-performing loans secured against residential property in the non-performing loan balance, which in turn further reduced the overall impairment loss allowances coverage as the distribution shifted towards mortgages that require a lower level of coverage due to inherent securities held against the non-performing loans.

In 2008, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of loans and advances to customers increased from 0.80% to 1.22%. This primarily reflected the impact of the deteriorating market environment on the performance of the residential mortgage portfolio. This also increased the proportion of non-performing loans secured against residential property in the non-performing loan balance, which in turn further reduced the average impairment loss allowances coverage required in respect of the eventual credit losses expected to emerge from these loans.

In 2007, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of loans and advances to customers remained unchanged at 0.80%. This reflected the continued strength in the credit quality of the Group's loans. The overall impairment loss allowances coverage ratio decreased from 64.89% to 61.77% due to the change in the proportions of mortgages and unsecured loans in the non-performing loan balance, where a greater proportion represented mortgages (which have a lower impairment loss allowance as a percentage of the asset).

In 2006, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of loans and advances to customers decreased from 0.92% to 0.80%. This reflected the continuing strength of the credit quality of the Group's loans, particularly on the secured mortgages. Impairment loss allowances as a percentage of total non-performing loans and advances increased from 44.67% to 64.89% in 2006, which reflected the change in macro-economic factors such as interest rate rises.

Interest income recognised on impaired loans amounted to £132m (2009: £101m, 2008: £51m).

 

Retail Banking restructured loans

 

As described above, loans have been restructured or renegotiated by capitalising the arrears on the customer's account, as a result of a revised payment arrangement (i.e. adherence to a repayment plan over a specified period) or a refinancing (either a term extension or an interest only concession). The value of capitalised arrears on these loans during 2010 was £12m (2009: £6m, 2008: £7m).

The table below shows Retail Banking's loans not included in non-performing loans that have been restructured or renegotiated by capitalising the arrears.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

Restructured loans(1)

607

514

(1) Loans are included within the year that they were restructured.

 

As at 31 December 2010, the carrying amount of financial assets that would otherwise be past due or impaired whose terms have been renegotiated was £1,275m (2009: £806m).

 

Credit Risk - Corporate Banking

 

Definition

 

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from the default of a customer or counterparty to which the Group has directly provided credit, or for which the Group has assumed a financial obligation, after realising collateral held. Credit risk arises by Corporate Banking making loans, investing in other financial instruments or entering into financing transactions or derivative contracts.

 

Managing credit risk

 

Corporate Banking aims to actively manage and control credit risk. The Board has approved a set of risk appetite limits to cover different types of risk, including credit risk, arising in Corporate Banking. The Group's credit risk appetite is measured and controlled by a maximum Economic Capital value, which is defined as the maximum level of unexpected loss that the Group is willing to sustain over a one-year period. Within these limits, credit mandates and policies are approved to cover detailed industry, sector and product limits. All transactions falling within these mandates and policies are accommodated under credit limits approved by the appropriate credit authority. Specific approval is usually required by the CAC for any transaction that falls outside the mandates.

Analysis of credit exposures and credit risk trends are provided each month to the Corporate and Commercial Banking Risk Oversight Forum, with key issues escalated to the Risk Committee as required. Large Exposures (as defined by the UK Financial Services Authority) are reported quarterly to the Risk Committee and the UK Financial Services Authority.

Credit risk on derivative instruments is calculated using the potential future mark-to-market exposure of the instruments at a 97.5% statistical confidence level and adding this value to the current value. The resulting "loan equivalent" or credit risk is then included against credit limits, along with other non-derivative exposures. In addition, there is a policy framework to enable the collateralisation of derivative instruments including swaps. If collateral is deemed necessary to reduce credit risk, any unsecured risk threshold, and the nature of any collateral to be accepted, is determined by management's credit evaluation of the counterparty.

Corporate Banking is an area where the Group aims to achieve controlled growth, mainly through the expansion of a regional network supporting lending to the Corporate (including SME), Real Estate, Education and Health sectors. Focus is continuing to be given to the control of credit risks within this expansion based on robust Credit Policy Mandates and models covering both risk appetite and ratings.

 

Corporate Banking customer assets

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

SME(1)

6.2

4.5

3.5

Social housing(2)

6.6

6.3

6.0

Real estate(3)

3.3

2.9

2.4

Other(4)

2.6

2.6

2.6

18.7

16.3

14.5

Non-core:

- Aviation

0.9

1.0

1.1

- Shipping

1.2

1.7

1.8

- Other (5)

1.7

2.2

3.2

 

3.8

4.9

6.1

Total

22.5

21.2

20.6

(1) Includes corporate loans and commercial mortgages (within other secured loans) classified as Loans and advances to customers in Note 17.

(2) Includes loans held at amortised cost shown in Note 17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements and loans designated at fair value through profit or loss. Also excludes social housing bonds of £0.3bn (2009: £0.3bn, 2008: £0.2bn) designated at fair value through profit or loss.

(3) Includes corporate loans classified as Loans and advances to customers in Note 17.

(4) Includes corporate loans and finance leases classified as Loans and advances to customers in Note 17 and Operating lease assets in Note 26.

(5) Includes corporate loans and finance leases classified as Loans and advances to customers in Note 17.

 

Corporate Banking customer commitments

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

SME

5.6

4.2

Social housing

9.2

8.6

Real estate

6.1

4.6

Other

4.8

4.2

25.7

21.6

Non-core:

- Aviation

1.0

1.0

- Shipping

1.4

2.0

- Structured Finance

2.1

2.5

- Other

0.7

0.8

 

5.2

6.3

Total

30.9

27.9

 

Corporate Banking committed facilities exposure by credit rating of the issuer or counterparty(1)(2) 

 

In Corporate Banking, credit risk arises on assets and off-balance sheet transactions. Consequently, the credit risk exposure below arises from on balance sheet assets, and off-balance sheet transactions such as committed and undrawn credit facilities or guarantees.

 

 

2010

Corporate - SME

£m

Corporate - Other

£m

 Real Estate

£m

Social Housing

£m

Non-core

£m

Total

£m

AAA

-

26

92

-

-

118

AA

182

-

-

1,865

-

2,047

A

227

604

798

6,153

321

8,103

BBB

814

3,195

2,527

1,206

2,207

9,949

BB

1,515

909

2,478

10

1,883

6,795

B

40

107

82

-

334

563

CCC

36

-

7

-

63

106

D

34

1

84

-

354

473

Other(3)

2,747

-

-

-

-

2,747

Total

5,595

4,842

6,068

9,234

5,162

30,901

 

2009

Corporate - SME

£m

Corporate - Other

£m

 Real Estate

£m

Social Housing

£m

Non-core

£m

Total

£m

AAA

-

27

89

-

-

116

AA

176

50

-

1,009

310

1,545

A

237

542

487

5,686

638

7,590

BBB

334

2,602

1,670

1,801

3,070

9,477

BB

647

832

2,080

100

1,727

5,386

B

27

97

180

-

204

508

CCC

11

5

5

-

67

88

D

38

73

99

-

199

409

Other(3)

2,767

-

-

-

-

2,767

Total

4,237

4,228

4,610

8,596

6,215

27,886

(1) The committed facilities exposure includes OTC derivatives and commercial mortgages.

(2) All exposures are internally rated. External ratings are taken into consideration in the rating process, where available.

(3) Individual exposures of £1m or less.

 

Corporate Banking committed facilities exposure by geographical area

 

2010

Corporate - SME

£m

Corporate - Other

£m

 Real Estate

£m

Social Housing

£m

Non-core

£m

Total

£m

UK

5,530

4,571

6,068

9,234

2,563

27,966

Rest of Europe

65

171

-

-

1,155

1,391

US

-

-

-

-

505

505

Other, including non-OECD

-

100

-

-

939

1,039

Total

5,595

4,842

6,068

9,234

5,162

30,901

 

 

2009

Corporate - SME

£m

Corporate - Other

£m

 Real Estate

£m

Social Housing

£m

Non-core

£m

Total

£m

UK

4,215

3,883

4,610

8,596

3,341

24,645

Rest of Europe

20

211

-

-

1,348

1,579

US

-

-

-

-

511

511

Other, including non-OECD

2

134

-

-

1,015

1,151

Total

4,237

4,228

4,610

8,596

6,215

27,886

 

The increase in SME Corporate and Real Estate exposures in 2010 arose from the continued development of a UK corporate banking franchise and was partially offset by a reduction in the non growth portfolios, both in the UK and overseas.

 

Corporate Banking - Watchlist

 

The entire corporate risk portfolio of new, emerging and serious circumstances relating to the portfolio (i.e. those loans on a 'watchlist') and those in 'workout' are managed at the FEVE Corporate Risk forum.

Summaries of the watchlist and workout cases at 31 December 2010 and 2009 by portfolio and assessment of risk are:

 

Impairment loss allowances(2)

2010

Portfolio£m

Monitor£m

Monitor

%

Active

£m

Active

%

Workout

£m

Workout

%

NPL(1)

£m

NPL

%

Observed

£m

IBNO

£m

Corporate - SME

5,595

302

5

145

3

290

5

242

4

62

22

Corporate - Other

4,842

155

3

131

3

114

2

54

1

5

4

Real Estate

6,068

454

7

408

7

609

10

417

7

99

31

Social Housing

9,234

179

2

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Non-core

5,162

1,097

21

377

7

424

8

353

7

139

71

Total

30,901

2,187

7

1,061

3

1,437

5

1,066

3

305

128

 

 

Impairment loss allowances(2)

2009

Portfolio£m

Monitor£m

Monitor

%

Active

£m

Active

%

Workout

£m

Workout

%

NPL(1)

£m

NPL

%

Observed

£m

IBNO

£m

Corporate - SME

4,237

332

8

121

3

204

5

163

4

56

17

Corporate - Other

4,228

236

6

22

1

84

2

70

2

36

-

Real Estate

4,610

586

13

376

8

213

5

206

4

40

20

Social Housing

8,596

500

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Non-core

6,215

1,232

20

539

9

434

7

368

6

130

136

Total

27,886

2,886

10

1,058

4

935

3

807

3

262

173

(1) Includes committed facilities and swaps.

(2) Includes impairment loss allowances on commercial mortgages managed by Corporate Banking Credit Risk.

 

Exposures are classified as 'workout' if they are non-performing loans or have been passed for management to the Risk Division. Exposures are classified as 'active' if they are included in the three categories (extinguish, secure and reduce) being actively managed. Exposures are classified as 'monitor' if they are being passively managed. These are described in 'Risk monitoring and control' above. Non-performing loans are discussed in 'Corporate Banking non-performing loans and advances' below.

 

Corporate Banking arrears

 

2010

£m

2009

 £m

2008£m

Total Corporate Banking customer assets in arrears

698

533

143

Total Corporate Banking customer assets(1)

23,353

22,167

21,475

Corporate Banking customer assets in arrears as a % of Corporate Banking customer assets

2.99%

2.40%

0.67%

(1) Corporate Banking customer assets include large corporate customer assets managed within Global Banking & Markets, social housing loans and finance leases.

Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

 

Loan arrears, collection and rehabilitation of accounts 

 

When a loan is in arrears, the account is considered due and classified in the "Workouts and Collections" category. The Workouts & Collectionsdepartment, as well as credit partners, are responsible for debt management initiatives on the loan portfolio for Corporate Banking. Debt management strategies, which include negotiating restructuring or repayment arrangements and concessions, often commence prior to actual payment default. Different collection strategies are applied to different segments of the portfolio subject to the perceived levels of risk and the individual circumstances of each case.

Workouts & Collections activities exist to ensure customers who have failed or are likely to fail to make their contractual payments when due or have exceeded their agreed credit limits are encouraged to pay back the required amounts, and in the event they are unable to do so to pursue recovery of the debt in order to maximise the net recovered balance.

The overall aim is to minimise losses whilst not adversely affecting brand, customer loyalty, fee income, or compliance with relevant legal and regulatory standards.

 

Restructuring approaches

Problem debt management activity is performed within Santander UK:

Initially by the relationship manager and, for non standardised cases, the credit partner, and

Subsequently by Workouts & Collections where the circumstances of the case become more critical or specialist expertise is required.

 

Santander UK seeks to detect weakening financial performance early through close monitoring of regular financial and trading information, periodic testing to ensure compliance with both financial and non-financial covenants and regular dialogue with corporate clients.

The FEVE process is used proactively on cases which need enhanced management activity ranging from increased frequency and intensity of monitoring through to more specific activities to reduce the Group's exposure, enhance the Group's security or in some cases seek to exit the position altogether.

Once categorised as FEVE, a strategy is agreed with Credit Risk and this is monitored through monthly FEVE meetings for each portfolio. Where circumstances dictate a more dedicated debt management expertise is required or where the case has been categorised as non-performing (be that through payment arrears or through management judgement that a payment default is likely), the case is transferred to Workouts & Collections Department.

 

Loans restructured or renegotiated

Loans may be restructured or renegotiated by capitalising the arrears on the customer's account. Strategies are bespoke to each individual case and achieved through negotiation with the customer. The aim of agreeing to a restructuring with a customer is to bring the Group's exposure back within acceptable risk levels by negotiating suitable revised terms, conditions and pricing, including reducing the amount of the outstanding debt or increasing the amount of collateral provided to the Group. The Group seeks to retain the customer relationship where possible, provided the Group's risk position is not unduly compromised.

Solutions in a restructuring may include:

a)

Payment arrangements - discretion exists to vary the repayment schedule to allow customers to bring the account up to date. Repayments may be re-profiled to better reflect the forecast cashflows of the business or pending asset disposals. The objective is to bring the account up to date as soon as possible.

 

 

b)

Refinancing - The Group may offer a term extension or interest only concession provided that the forecasts indicate that the borrower will be able to meet the revised payment arrangements.

 

Term Extensions - the term of the credit facility may be extended to reduce the regular periodic repayments if all other collections tools have been exhausted, and where as a minimum, the interest can be serviced and there is a realistic prospect of full or improved recoveries in the foreseeable future. Customers may be offered a term extension where they are up-to-date but showing evidence of financial difficulties, or are already in the Workouts & Collections process.

 

Interest Only Concessions - the regular periodic repayment may be reduced to interest payment only for a limited period with capital repayment deferred if all other collections tools have been exhausted and a term extension is either not possible or affordable. Customers may be offered an interest only concession where they are up-to-date but showing evidence of financial difficulties, or are already in the Workouts & Collections process. Periodic reviews of the customer financial situation are undertaken to assess when the customer can afford to return to the repayment method.

c)

Other - The Group may also pursue other solutions, in limited circumstances, as follows:

 

Provision of additional security or guarantees - Where a borrower has unencumbered assets, these may be charged as new or additional security in return for the Group restructuring existing facilities. Alternatively, the Group may take a guarantee from other companies within the borrower's group and/or major shareholders provided it can be established the proposed guarantor has the resources to support such a commitment.

 

Resetting of covenants and trapping surplus cashflow - Financial covenants may be reset at levels which more accurately reflect the current and forecast trading position of the borrower. This may also be accompanied by a requirement for all surplus cash after operating costs to be trapped and used in reduction of the Group's lending.

 

Seeking additional equity - Where a business is over-leveraged, fresh equity capital will be sought from existing or new investors to adjust the capital structure in conjunction with the Group agreeing to restructure the residual debt.

 

Debt-for-equity swaps - In circumstances where a borrower's balance sheet is materially over-leveraged but the underlying business is viewed as capable of being turned around, the Group may agree to reduce the debt by exchanging a portion of it for equity in the company. This will typically only be done alongside new cash equity being raised, the implementation of a detailed business plan to effect a turnaround in the prospects of the business, and satisfaction with management's ability to deliver the strategy.

 

Where a restructuring has been agreed, the case is initially retained in the "non-performing" loan category, if it was so categorised prior to the restructuring until evidence of consistent compliance with the new terms is demonstrated (typically a minimum of three months) before being reclassified as "substandard". If the loan was not categorised as non-performing at the time the revised arrangements were agreed, the case is considered to be a renegotiation and may be reclassified to substandard. Once a substandard case has demonstrated continued compliance with the new terms and the risk profile is deemed to have improved it may be reclassified as "performing".

The majority of corporate loan restructurings to date have been by way of term extensions and payment reprofiling (e.g. interest only concessions), with only a limited number of debt for equity swaps. Loan loss allowances are assessed on a case by case basis taking into account amongst other factors, the value of collateral held as confirmed by third party professional valuations as well as the cashflow available to service debt over the period of the restructuring. These loan loss allowances are assessed regularly and are independently reviewed both at quarterly provision review forum, as well as by the internal audit department. In the case of a debt for equity conversion, the converted debt is written off against the existing loan loss allowance upon completion of the restructuring. The value of the equity acquired is reassessed periodically in light of subsequent performance of the restructured company. At 31 December 2010, the restructured corporate loans remain in compliance with the revised terms agreed.

 

Exit the position consensually

Where it is not possible to agree a restructuring, the Group may seek to exit the position consensually by:

Agreeing with the borrower an orderly sale of assets outside insolvency to pay down the Group's debt;

Arranging for the refinance of the debt with another lender; or

Sale of the debt where a secondary market exists (either individual loans or on occasion as a portfolio sale).

 

Litigation and recovery

Where it is not possible to agree a restructuring or to exit the position consensually, the Group will pursue recovery by:

Pursuing its rights through an insolvency process;

Optimising the sale proceeds of any collateral held; and

Seeking compensation from third parties, as appropriate.

 

Where the Group has to pursue recovery through the appointment of an Administrator (or a Receiver under the Law of Property Act in the case of real estate security), the Group's shortfall is assessed against the Administrator's estimate of the outcome and an appropriate loan loss allowance is raised. In cases where a sale of the debt is deemed to offer the optimum recovery outcome, the shortfall, if the debt is sold below its par value, is written off upon sale.

 

 

Impairment losses on loans and advances to customers

 

The Group's impairment loss allowances policy for corporate assets is set out in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Corporate Banking analysis of impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of the Corporate Banking impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers is presented below.

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2007

£m

2006

£m

Observed impairment loss allowances

Corporate loans - UK

271

185

13

-

-

Finance leases - UK

-

1

-

-

-

Total observed impairment loss allowances

271

186

13

-

-

Incurred but not yet observed impairment loss allowances

Corporate loans - UK

125

172

289

-

-

Finance leases - UK

1

1

1

-

-

Total incurred but not yet observed impairment loss allowances

126

173

290

-

-

Total impairment loss allowances

397

359

303

-

-

 

Corporate Banking movements in impairment loss allowances on loans and advances:

An analysis of movements in the Corporate Banking impairment loss allowances on loans and advances is presented below.

 

2010

£m

2009£m

2008£m

2007

 £m

2006

 £m

Impairment loss allowances at the start of the year

359

303

-

-

-

Amounts written off:

- Corporate loans - UK

(68)

-

-

-

-

- Finance leases - UK

(3)

(4)

-

-

-

Total amounts written off

(71)

(4)

-

-

-

Observed impairment losses charged against profit:

- Corporate loans - UK

154

172

13

-

-

- Finance leases - UK

2

5

-

-

-

Total observed impairment losses charged against profit

156

177

13

-

-

Incurred but not yet observed impairment losses charged against/ (released into) profit

(47)

(117)

13

-

-

Total impairment losses charged against profit

109

60

26

-

-

Assumed through transfers of entities under common control

-

-

277

-

-

Impairment loss allowances at the end of the year

397

359

303

-

-

 

Corporate Banking recoveries

An analysis of the Corporate Banking recoveries is presented below.

 

2010

£m

2009

 £m

2008£m

Corporate loans - UK

12

23

-

Finance Leases - UK

-

1

-

Total amount recovered

12

24

-

 

Corporate Banking non-performing loans and advances(1)

 

 

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Corporate Banking non-performing loans and advances that are impaired

677

490

397

Corporate Banking non-performing loans and advances that are not impaired

257

219

-

Total Corporate Banking non-performing loans and advances(2)

934

709

397

Total Corporate Banking customer assets(3)

23,353

22,167

21,475

Total Corporate Banking impairment loan loss allowances(4)

402

363

307

%

%

%

Non-performing loans and advances as a % of customer assets

4.00%

3.20%

1.85%

Coverage ratio(5)

43.04%

51.20%

77.33%

(1) Loans and advances are classified as non-performing typically when the counterparty fails to make payments when contractually due for three months or longer or where it is deemed unlikely that the counterparty will be able to maintain payments.

(2) All non-performing loans continue accruing interest.

(3) Corporate Banking customer assets include large corporate customer assets managed within Global Banking & Markets, social housing loans and finance leases.

Accrued interest is excluded for purposes of these analyses.

(4) Includes impairment loss allowances on commercial mortgages.

(5) Impairment loan loss allowances as a percentage of non-performing loans and advances.

In 2010, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of customer assets increased to 4.00% from 3.20% at 31 December 2009 due to some deterioration arising from market conditions. This particularly affected customers in the real estate and certain aviation and shipping sectors, many of which were classified in the non-core portfolios.

In 2010, both non-performing loans and advances and impairment loss allowances increased. While the level of new non-performing loans was broadly in line with expectations, the options available for managing them were reduced compared to 2009, particularly the ability to raise equity capital, to sell the asset or to conclude refinancing. The real estate market became more challenging as the year progressed, with reduced sales activity, especially for development finance and land-bank transactions and for older transactions underwritten in 2008 and earlier years. The Group's real estate development finance exposure represented less than 8% (2009: 8%) of the total core real estate book. The year-end position was also influenced by a small number of large value transactions which defaulted late in the year but are expected to be restructured during 2011. In the aviation sector, 'incurred but not yet observed' impairment losses were associated with a reduction in the value of collateral at the maturity of deals where the final bullet repayment was dependent on refinance or sale of the aircraft. The shipping sector continued to experience stress especially with regards to older vessels and the tanker segments, where achieving sufficiently profitable re-employment on expiry of charters has proven to be challenging and the limited number of buyers and the shortage of finance which has impacted on potential recovery levels for distressed assets. The increase in write-offs in 2010 compared to 2009 principally reflected the maturing of the former Alliance & Leicester Corporate Lending business which included assets with generally higher risk characteristics as well as the continued challenging economic environment.

In 2009, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of customer assets increased to 3.20% as market conditions continued to deteriorate. This reflected the consolidation of the Alliance & Leicester Corporate Lending business which included assets with generally higher risk characteristics as well as the more challenging economic environment on customers especially in the real estate and shipping markets.

In 2008, non-performing loans and advances as a percentage of customer assets increased to 1.85%. This reflected the impact of the deteriorating market environment on the performance of the corporate and real estate portfolios, and the transfer of Alliance & Leicester's Corporate Banking portfolio.

Interest income recognised on impaired loans amounted to £9m (2009: £4m, 2008: £2m).

 

Credit risk mitigation

 

Collateralisation

The Social Housing portfolio is secured on residential real estate owned and let by UK Housing Associations. In the real estate portfolio, collateral is in the form of commercial real estate assets. The corporate portfolio is largely unsecured but typically incorporates guarantee structures underpinned by both financial and non-financial covenants and in the case of SME clients debenture security is typically held. Within the non-core portfolios of assets inconsistent with the Group's future strategy, collateral is regularly held through a charge over the underlying asset and in some circumstances, cash (the Group held £535m (2009: £448m) of cash collateral at the year end). There are also a small number of Private Finance Initiative ('PFI') transactions where collateral is held in the form of a charge over the underlying concession contract.

Lending to commercial real estate is undertaken against an approved mandate setting minimum criteria including such aspects as the quality (e.g. condition and age) and location of the property, the quality of the tenant, the terms and length of the lease, and the experience and creditworthiness of the sponsors. Properties are viewed by the Group prior to lending and annually thereafter. An independent professional valuation is obtained prior to lending, providing both a value and an assessment of the property, tenant and future demand for the property (e.g. market rent compared to the current rent). Loan agreements permit bi-annual valuations thereafter or more frequently if it is likely that the covenants may be breached.

When a commercial real estate loan is transferred to FEVE or Workouts and Collections, the Group typically undertakes a revaluation of the collateral as part of the process for determining the strategy to be pursued (e.g. whether to restructure the loan or to realise the collateral). An assessment is made of the need to establish an impairment loss allowance based on the valuation in relation to the loan amount outstanding while also taking into consideration any loan restructuring solution to be adopted (e.g. whether provision of additional security or guarantees is available, the prospects of additional equity and the ability to enhance value through asset management initiatives).

The Group obtains independent third party valuations on other fixed charge security such as aircraft or shipping assets. These valuations are undertaken in accordance with industry guidelines. An assessment is made of the need to establish an impairment loss allowance based on the valuation in relation to the loan amount outstanding (i.e. the LTV) whether the loan in question continues to perform satisfactorily, whether or not the reduction in value is assessed to be temporary and whether other forms of recourse exist.

As at 31 December 2010, the Group held collateral against impaired loans amounting to 58% (2009: 47%) of the carrying amount of impaired loan balances.

 

Restructured loans

 

As described above, loans may be restructured or renegotiated where customers in arrears have maintained an agreed monthly repayment for a specified period. As at 31 December 2010, the carrying amount of financial assets that would otherwise be past due or impaired whose terms have been renegotiated was £160m (2009: £88m).

 

 

Credit Risk - Global Banking & Markets

 

Definition

 

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from the default of a customer or counterparty to which the Group has directly provided credit, or for which the Group has assumed a financial obligation, after realising collateral held. Credit risk arises by Global Banking & Markets making loans, investing in debt securities or other financial instruments or entering into financing transactions or derivative contracts.

 

Managing credit risk

 

Global Banking & Markets aims to actively manage and control credit risk. The Board has approved a set of risk appetite limits to cover different types of risk, including credit risk, arising in Global Banking & Markets. The Group's credit risk appetite is measured and controlled by a maximum Economic Capital value, which is defined as the maximum level of unexpected loss that the Group is willing to sustain over a one-year period. Global Banking & Markets exposures, including intra-group items, are captured on the global risk management systems and fall within limits approved by Santander Risk Division.

All transactions are accommodated under credit limits approved by the appropriate credit authority. For transactions that fall under Santander UK's delegated authority, approval is required from the CAC or those individuals directly mandated by CAC. Transactions or exposures above this local limit will be referred by CAC to the relevant approval authorities in Santander. The Wholesale Credit Risk department is responsible for managing credit risk in Global Banking & Markets portfolios.

Analysis of credit exposures and credit risk trends are provided each month to the Wholesale Risk Oversight and Control Forum with key issues escalated to the Risk Committee as required. Large Exposures (as defined by the UK Financial Services Authority) are reported monthly to the Risk Committee and the UK Financial Services Authority.

Credit risk on derivative instruments is calculated using the potential future mark-to-market exposure of the instruments at a 97.5% statistical confidence level and adding this value to the current value. The resulting "loan equivalent" or credit risk is then included against credit limits, along with other non-derivative exposures.

In addition, there is a policy framework to enable the collateralisation of derivative instruments including swaps. If collateral is deemed necessary to reduce credit risk, any unsecured risk threshold, and the nature of any collateral to be accepted, is determined by management's credit evaluation of the counterparty.

 

Global Banking & Markets assets

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

£bn

Short-term markets (1)

24.3

26.6

19.8

Customer Assets (2)

1.8

1.1

0.9

Derivatives

20.1

16.0

21.3

Other (3)

3.8

1.1

2.5

Total

50.0

44.8

44.5

(1) Comprises reverse repos and government debt securities.

(2) Includes loans and advances to customers.

(3) Principally comprises UK treasury bills and equities.

 

Global Corporates in Global Banking & Markets

 

During 2010, following an alignment of portfolios across the Banco Santander, S.A. group, Global Banking & Markets' activities in the UK expanded to include the granting of credit facilities and the provision of treasury services to major corporations based in the UK.

 

Global Banking & Markets exposure by credit rating of the issuer or counterparty(1)

 

In Global Banking & Markets, credit risk arises on both assets and liabilities and on both on and off-balance sheet transactions. Consequently, the credit risk exposure below arises from on balance sheet assets, securities financing trades classified as liabilities, OTC derivatives and off-balance sheet assets such as committed and undrawn credit facilities or guarantees.

 

 

2010

Sovereign

£m

Global Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

18,420

-

9

18,429

AA

87

194

287

568

A

-

1,815

643

2,458

BBB and below

-

2,439

236

2,675

Total

18,507

4,448

1,175

24,130

 

 

2009

Sovereign

£m

Global Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

11,857

-

228

12,085

AA

2

-

592

594

A

26

69

2,433

2,528

BBB and below

-

219

358

577

Total

11,885

288

3,611

15,784

(1) External ratings are applied to all exposures where available.

 

Global Banking & Markets exposure by geographical area

 

 

2010

Sovereign

£m

Global Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

 

Total

£m

UK

14,875

3,857

755

19,487

Rest of Europe

3,496

453

344

4,293

US

-

-

44

44

Rest of the world

136

138

32

306

Total

18,507

4,448

1,175

24,130

 

2009

Sovereign

£m

Global Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

UK

10,207

150

2,366

12,723

Rest of Europe

1,313

66

729

2,108

US

182

1

193

376

Rest of the world

183

71

323

577

Total

11,885

288

3,611

15,784

 

OTC derivative exposure by credit rating of the issuer or counterparty(1)

 

2010

Sovereign

£m

Global Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

34

-

-

34

AA

-

-

75

75

A

-

53

164

217

BBB and below

-

273

66

339

Total

34

326

305

665

 

2009

Sovereign

£m

Global Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

50

-

8

58

AA

-

-

54

54

A

-

-

181

181

BBB and below

-

150

226

376

Total

50

150

469

669

(1) External ratings are applied to all exposures where available.

 

Global Banking & Markets - Watchlist

 

In order to ensure adequate credit quality control, in addition to the tasks performed by the internal audit division, the Wholesale Credit Risk Department analysts monitor the exposures within their assigned portfolios through an ongoing process of observation to enable early detection of any incidents that might arise in the evolution of the risk, the transactions, the customers and their environment, with a view to implement mitigating actions.

For this purpose, the Wholesale Credit Risk Department follows the Group's risk monitoring and control processes for FEVE, where risks are classified into four levels of monitoring, three of which are considered as Active (through the implementation of actions that can be classified as extinguish, secure and reduce) and one of which is considered Passive (monitor). This is further explained in the 'Credit risk cycle - Risk monitoring and control' section above. Global Banking & Markets Banks and Financial Institutions, and Global Corporates exposures are managed at the FEVE Corporate Risk forum.

At 31 December 2010 and 2009, there were no impaired or non-performing loans or exposures and the assets in the Active category were £573m (2009: £166m).

 

Credit risk mitigation in Global Banking & Markets

 

(i) Netting arrangements for derivative transactions

The Group restricts its credit risk by entering into transactions under industry standard agreements (i.e. the International Swaps and Derivatives Association ('ISDA') Master Agreements) which facilitate netting of transactions in the jurisdictions where netting agreements are recognised and have legal force. The netting arrangements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis.

However, there is scope for the credit risk associated with favourable contracts to be reduced by netting arrangements embodied in the agreements to the extent that if an event of default occurs, all amounts with the counterparty under the specific agreement can be terminated and settled on a net basis. Derivatives, repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions, stock borrowing/lending transactions and other securities financing transactions are generally governed by industry standard agreements that facilitate netting.

 

(ii) Collateralisation for derivative transactions

The Group also mitigates its credit risk to counterparties with which it primarily transacts financial instruments through collateralisation, using industry standard collateral agreements (i.e. the Credit Support Annex ('CSA')) in conjunction with the ISDA Master Agreement. Under these agreements, net exposures with counterparties are collateralised with cash, securities or equities. Exposures and collateral are generally revalued daily and collateral is adjusted accordingly to reflect deficits/surpluses. Collateral taken must comply with the Group's collateral parameters policy. This policy is designed to control the quality and concentration risk of collateral taken such that collateral held can be liquidated when a counterparty defaults. Cash collateral in respect of derivatives held at the year-end was £0.9bn (2009: £1.5bn), not all derivative arrangements being subject to collateral agreements. Collateral obtained during the year in respect of purchase and resale agreements (including securities financing) is equal to at least 100% of the amount of the exposure.

 

(iii) Collateralisation for lending activities

The Global Corporate portfolio is largely unsecured but credit agreements are underpinned by both financial and non-financial covenants. There is also a small number of acquisition financing transactions where collateral is held in the form of a charge over the assets being acquired.

 

Restructured loans

 

As at 31 December 2010 and 2009, there were no financial assets that would otherwise be past due or impaired whose terms have been renegotiated.

 

Credit Risk - Group Infrastructure

 

Definition

 

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from the default of a customer or counterparty to which the Group has directly provided credit, or for which the Group has assumed a financial obligation, after realising collateral held. Credit risk arises by Group Infrastructure making loans (including to other businesses within the Group) and investing in debt securities. Credit risk also arises by Group Infrastructure investing in other financial instruments (including assets held for liquidity purposes and assets held in the Treasury asset portfolio which is being run down) or entering into financing transactions or derivative contracts.

 

Managing credit risk

 

Group Infrastructure aims to actively manage and control credit risk. Credit risk is managed by the Wholesale Credit Risk Team in accordance with limits, asset quality plans and criteria approved by the Board with respect to risk appetite parameters, and as set out in other relevant policy statements. All exposures, including intra-group items, are captured on the global risk management systems and fall within limits approved by Santander Risk Division. Decisions are based on independent credit risk analysis, supplemented by the output of internal ratings tools and external rating agency analysis.

The Treasury asset portfolio is monitored for potential impairment through a detailed expected cashflow analysis taking into account the structure and underlying assets of each individual security. Once specific events give rise to a reasonable expectation that future anticipated cash flows may not be received, the asset originating these doubtful cash flows will be deemed to be impaired. Objective evidence of loss events includes significant financial distress of the issuer and default or delinquency in interest and principal payments (breach of contractual terms).

 

Group Infrastructure assets

 

2010

£bn

2009

£bn

2008

bn

Balances at central banks

25.6

3.5

3.2

Treasury asset portfolio

5.1

9.6

14.1

Collateral

9.1

6.0

4.7

Other assets

7.8

28.2

45.4

Total

47.6

47.3

67.4

 

The Group Infrastructure assets table above comprises gross asset balances. The table below shows the exposures in Group Infrastructure after taking into account the credit mitigation procedures described in Global Banking & Markets on page 109 above.

 

Group Infrastructure exposure by credit rating of the issuer or counterparty(1) 

 

2010

Sovereign

£m

Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

31,327

1,863

317

33,507

AA

184

172

468

824

A

-

61

2,435

2,496

BBB and below

-

216

584

800

Total

31,511

2,312

3,804

37,627

 

 

2009(2)

Sovereign

£m

Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

12,360

4,493

162

17,015

AA

89

914

6,176

7,179

A

-

114

11,091

11,205

BBB and below

-

986

2,267

3,253

Total

12,449

6,507

19,696

38,652

(1) External ratings are applied to all exposures where available.

(2) 2009 included exposures to subsidiaries previously outside the Santander UK plc Group, Santander Cards Limited and Santander Consumer (UK) plc. In 2010, the Company acquired those businesses and the Group's exposures to them were eliminated on consolidation. Following consolidation, credit exposures arising in those businesses have been reported within the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking divisions.

 

Group Infrastructure exposure by geographical area 

 

 

2010

Sovereign

£m

Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

UK

25,862

763

1,340

27,965

Rest of Europe

183

711

1,840

2,734

US

5,139

705

429

6,273

Rest of world

327

133

195

655

 Total

31,511

2,312

3,804

37,627

 

 

2009(1)

Sovereign

£m

Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

UK

10,525

607

6,875

18,007

Rest of Europe

1,085

4,247

9,958

15,290

US

448

615

1,768

2,831

Rest of world

391

1,038

1,095

2,524

Total

12,449

6,507

19,696

38,652

(1) External ratings are applied to all exposures where available.

(2) 2009 included exposures to subsidiaries previously outside the Santander UK plc Group, Santander Cards Limited and Santander Consumer (UK) plc. In 2010, the Company acquired those businesses and the Group's exposures to them were eliminated on consolidation. Following consolidation, credit exposures arising in those businesses have been reported within the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking divisions.

 

The increase in exposure to issuers and counterparties rated AAA during 2010 principally reflected increased holdings of liquid assets.

 

OTC derivative exposure by credit rating of the issuer or counterparty(1)

 

 

2010

Sovereign

£m

Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

5,314

-

-

5,314

AA

-

-

316

316

A

-

-

1,132

1,132

BBB and below

-

-

-

-

 Total

5,314

-

1,448

6,762

 

 

2009(2)

Sovereign

£m

Corporates

£m

Banks and Financial Institutions

£m

Total

£m

AAA

7,083

-

-

7,083

AA

-

-

534

534

A

-

-

2,419

2,419

BBB and below

-

-

-

-

Total

7,083

-

2,953

10,036

(1) External ratings are applied to all exposures where available.

(2) 2009 included exposures to subsidiaries previously outside the Santander UK plc Group, Santander Cards Limited and Santander Consumer (UK) plc. In 2010, the Company acquired those businesses and the Group's exposures to them were eliminated on consolidation. Following consolidation, credit exposures arising in those businesses have been reported within the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking divisions.

 

Group Infrastructure - Watchlist

 

The Group Infrastructure exposures are managed by the Wholesale Credit Risk Department using the same process as for the Global Banking & Markets Banks and Financial Institutions and Global Corporates exposures described in 'Global Banking & Markets - Watchlist' above. Group Infrastructure exposures are managed at the FEVE Corporate Risk forum.

At 31 December 2010 and 2009, there were no impaired or non-performing loans or exposures and the assets in the Active category were £13m (2009: £38m).

 

Restructured loans

 

As at 31 December 2010 and 2009, there were no financial assets that would otherwise be past due or impaired whose terms have been renegotiated.

 

Market Risk

 

Definition

 

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in economic value or reported income resulting from a change in the variables of financial instruments including interest rate, equity, credit spread, property and foreign currency risks. Market risk consists of trading and non-traded market risks. Trading market risk includes risks on exposures held with the intention of benefiting from short term price differences in interest rate variations and other market price shifts. Non-traded market risk includes, inter alia, interest rate risk in investment portfolios.

Interest rate risks primarily result from exposures to changes in the level, slope and curvature of the yield curve, the volatility of interest rates and mortgage prepayment rates. Equity risks result from exposures to changes in prices and volatilities of individual equities, equity baskets and equity indices. Credit spread risk arises from the possibility that changes in credit spreads will affect the value of financial instruments. Property risks result from exposures to changes in property prices. Foreign currency risks result from exposures to changes in spot prices, forward prices and volatilities of currency rates. The Group accepts that market risk arises from its full range of activities.

 

Managing market risk

 

The Group aims to actively manage and control market risk by limiting the adverse impact of market movements whilst seeking to enhance earnings within clearly defined parameters. The Market Risk Manual, which is reviewed and approved by the Head of Wholesale Risk on an annual basis, sets the framework under which market risks are managed and controlled. Business area policies, risk limits and mandates are established within the context of the Market Risk Manual.

Executive directors are responsible for ensuring that they have sufficient expertise to manage the risks originated and retained within their business divisions. The business areas are responsible for ensuring that they have sufficient expertise to manage the risks associated with their operations. The independent Risk function, under the direction of the Head of Wholesale Risk, aims to ensure that risk-taking and risk control occur within the framework prescribed by the Market Risk Manual. The Risk function also provides oversight of all risk-taking activities through a process of reviews.

The Group aims to ensure that exposure to market risks is measured and reported on an accurate and timely basis to senior management. In addition to the regular reporting for the purposes of active risk management, the Board also receives reporting of all significant market risk exposures on a monthly basis where actual exposure levels are measured against limits. Market activity and liquidity of financial instruments are discussed in the relevant monthly Risk Forum as well as being part of the daily update given by each business at the start of the trading day. Senior management recognise that different risk measures are required to best reflect the risks faced in different types of business activities. In measuring exposure to market risk, the Group uses a range of complementary measures, covering both value and income as appropriate.

 

Market risk - Retail Banking

 

Market risks are originated in Retail Banking only as a by-product of writing customer business and are transferred out of Retail Banking insofar as possible. Only prepayment and launch risk exposures are retained within Retail Banking, as these behavioural risks are influenced by internal marketing and pricing activity and are managed by Asset Business and Customer Funds Committees. Other market risks are transferred to the ALM operation within Group Infrastructure, where they can be managed in conjunction with exposures arising from the funding, liquidity or capital management activities of ALM. Funds received with respect to deposits taken are lent on to Group Infrastructure on matching terms as regards interest rate re-pricing and maturity. Similarly, loans are funded through matching borrowings from Group Infrastructure. Market risks arising from structured products, including exposure to changes in the levels of equity markets, are hedged within Global Banking & Markets.

 

Market risk - Corporate Banking

 

Market risks arising in the Corporate Banking division are transferred from the originating business to ALM within Group Infrastructure, where they can be managed in conjunction with exposures arising from the funding, liquidity or capital management activities of ALM. Funds received with respect to deposits taken are lent on to Group Infrastructure on matching terms as regards interest rate repricing and maturity. Similarly, loans are funded though matching borrowings from Group Infrastructure. Any permitted retained market risk exposure is minimal, and is monitored against limits approved by the Head of Wholesale Risk.

 

Market risk - Global Banking & Markets

 

Market risk-taking is performed within the framework established by the Market Risk Manual. A major portion of the market risk arises from exposures to changes in the levels of interest rates, equity markets and credit spreads. Interest rate exposure is generated from most trading activities. Exposure to equity markets is generated by the creation and risk management of structured products by Global Banking & Markets for the personal financial services market and trading activities. Credit spread exposure arises indirectly from trading activities within Global Banking & Markets.

 

Managing market risk

 

Risks are managed within limits approved by the Head of Wholesale Risk or Banco Santander, S.A.'s Board Risk Committee and within the risk control framework defined by the Market Risk Manual. For trading activities the primary risk exposures for Global Banking & Markets are interest rate, equity, credit spread and residual exposure to property indices. Interest rate risks are managed via interest rate swaps, futures and options (caps, floors and swaptions). Equity risks are managed via equity stock, index futures, options and structured equity derivatives. Credit spread risks are managed via vanilla credit derivatives. Property index risk is managed via insurance contracts and property derivatives.

To facilitate understanding and communication of different risks, risk categories have been defined. Exposure to all market risk factors is assigned to one of these categories. The Group considers two categories:

 

Short-term liquid market risk covers activities where exposures are subject to frequent change and could be closed out over a short-time horizon. Most of the exposure is generated by Global Banking & Markets.

 

Structural market risk includes exposures arising as a result of the structure of portfolios of assets and liabilities, or where the liquidity of the market is such that the exposure could not be closed out over a short-time horizon. The risk exposure is generated by features inherent in either a product or portfolio and normally presented over the life of the portfolio or product. Such exposures are a result of the decision to undertake specific business activities, can take a number of different forms, and are generally managed over a longer-time horizon.

 

Global Banking & Markets operates within a market risk framework designed to ensure that it has the capability to manage risk in a well-controlled manner. A comprehensive set of policies, procedures and processes have been developed and implemented to identify, measure, report, monitor and control risk across Global Banking & Markets.

 

Trading market risk

For trading activities the standardised risk measure adopted is Value at Risk. From 1 January 2010, this has been calculated at a 99% confidence level over a one-day time horizon in accordance with the standard used throughout Santander. Prior to this date, a 95% confidence level was used. On a daily basis, market risk factor sensitivities, Value at Risk measures and stress tests are produced, reported and monitored against limits for each major activity and at the aggregate Global Banking & Markets level. These limits are used to align risk appetite with the business' risk-taking activities and are reviewed on a regular basis.

Measurement of risks can involve the use of complex quantitative methods and mathematical principles to model and predict the changes in instruments and portfolio valuation. These methods are essential tools to understand the risk exposures. Trading market riskexposurearises only in the Abbey National Treasury Services plc group. Exposures are managed on a continuous basis, and are marked to market daily.

The following table shows the Value at Risk-based consolidated exposures for the major risk classes at 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008, together with the highest, lowest and average exposures for the year. Exposures within each risk class reflect a range of exposures associated with movements in that financial market. For example, interest rate risks include the impact of absolute rate movements, movements between interest rate bases and movements in implied volatility on interest rate options. The range of possible statistical modelling techniques and assumptions mean these measures are not precise indicators of expected future losses, but are estimates of the potential change in the value of the portfolio over a specified time horizon and within a given confidence interval. Historical simulation models are used with appropriate add-ons to reflect unobservable inputs.

From time to time, losses may exceed the amounts stated where the movements in market rates fall outside the statistical confidence interval used in the calculation of the Value at Risk analysis. The 99% confidence interval means that the theoretical loss at a risk factor level is likely to be exceeded in one period in a hundred. This risk is addressed by monitoring stress-testing measures across the different business areas. For trading instruments the actual, average, highest and lowest value at risk exposures shown below are all calculated to a 99% level of confidence using a simulation of actual one day market movements over a one-year period. The effect of historic correlations between risk factors is additionally shown below. The use of a one-day time horizon for all risks associated with trading instruments reflects the horizon over which market movements will affect the measured profit and loss of these activities.

 

The amounts below represent the potential change in market values of trading instruments. Since trading instruments are recorded at market value, these amounts also represent the potential effect on income. All amounts presented below are based on a 99% confidence level and the comparatives have been updated accordingly.

 

Actual Exposure at 31 December

 

 Group trading instruments

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Interest rate risks

3.0

3.4

7.4

Equity risks

1.9

1.4

1.7

Credit spread risks

0.6

1.6

2.7

Property risks

2.9

8.5

9.6

Other risks(1)

0.3

0.6

1.3

Correlation offsets(2)

(1.4)

(3.3)

(3.5)

Total correlated one-day Value at Risk

7.3

12.2

19.2

 

Exposure for the year ended 31 December

Average exposure

Highest exposure

Lowest exposure

 Group trading instruments

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Interest rate risks

3.5

5.5

5.1

6.1

8.8

7.9

2.2

2.3

3.5

Equity risks

1.9

2.0

2.8

2.7

3.8

5.0

1.4

1.1

1.4

Credit spread risks

1.1

3.6

1.8

1.6

4.8

4.0

0.6

1.6

0.7

Property risks

5.6

8.6

6.6

9.1

9.8

10.5

2.9

7.8

4.5

Other risks(1)

0.3

1.0

0.9

0.8

1.4

1.4

0.2

0.4

0.3

Correlation offsets(2)

(2.2)

(4.4)

(3.1)

-

-

-

-

-

-

Total correlated one-day Value at Risk

10.2

16.3

14.1

15.4

19.8

20.5

6.6

11.7

11.3

(1) Other risks include foreign exchange risk.

(2) The highest and lowest exposure figures reported for each risk type did not necessarily occur on the same day as the highest and lowest total correlated one-day Value-at-Risk. A corresponding correlation offset effect cannot be calculated and is therefore omitted from the above table.

 

Property risks reduced significantly in 2010 due to the sale of a significant portion of one of the equity release portfolios to a third party. The increase in property risks between 2008 and 2009 was mainly due to higher equity release business funded by the Group during the two-year period. This was also due to the significant fall in interest rates (and consequently the discount rate used) in 2008 and 2009, which led to the increase in the present value of cash flows. As a result, there was an increase in sensitivity and hence, Value at Risk.

Value at Risk is not the only measure used by the Group. It is used because it is easy to calculate and because it provides a good reference of the level of risk incurred by the Group. However, other measures are also used to enable the Group to exercise greater risk control in the markets in which it operates.

One of these measures is scenario analysis, which consists of defining behaviour scenarios for various financial variables and determining the impact on results of applying them to the Group's activities. These scenarios can replicate past events (such as crises) or, conversely, determine plausible scenarios that are unrelated to past events. A minimum of three types of scenarios are defined (plausible, severe and extreme) which, together with Value at Risk, make it possible to obtain a more complete spectrum of the risk profile.

In addition, the market risk area, in accordance with the principle of independence of the business units, monitors daily the positions of each unit and the global positions, through an exhaustive control of changes in the portfolios, the aim being to detect possible incidents and correct them immediately. The daily preparation of an income statement is an important risk indicator, insofar as it allows the Group to identify the impact of changes in financial variables on the portfolios.

All activities are controlled daily using specific measures. Sensitivities to price fluctuations are calculated for cash instruments, while sensitivities to changes in underlyings, volatilities, correlations and time (theta) are calculated for derivatives.

 

Derivatives held for Trading Purposes

 

Global Banking & Markets is the only area of the Group actively trading derivative products and is additionally responsible for implementing most Group derivative hedging with the external market. For trading activities, Global Banking & Markets objectives are to gain value by marketing derivatives to end users and hedging the resulting exposures efficiently; and the management of trading exposure reflected on the Group's balance sheet. Trading derivatives include interest rate, cross currency, equity, residential property and other index related swaps, forwards, caps, floors, swaptions, as well as credit default and total return swaps, equity index contracts and exchange traded interest rate futures and equity index options.

Derivatives classified as held for trading or held for risk management purposes that have not been designated as in a hedging relationship (also known as economic hedges) are classified as derivatives held for trading in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Market risk - Group Infrastructure

 

Most market risks arising from the Retail Banking and Corporate Banking divisions are transferred from the originating business to the ALM function within Group Infrastructure, where they can be managed in conjunction with exposures arising from the funding, liquidity or capital management activities of ALM. As a consequence, non-trading risk exposures are substantially transferred to Group Infrastructure. Market risks mainly arise through the provision of banking products and services to personal and corporate/business customers, as well as structural exposures arising in the Group's balance sheet. These risks impact the Group's current earnings and economic value.

The most significant market risk in Group Infrastructure is interest rate risk which includes yield curve and basis risks. Yield curve risk arises from the timing mismatch in the repricing of fixed and variable rate assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet instruments, as well as the investment of non-interest-bearing liabilities in interest-bearing assets. Basis risk arises, to the extent that the volume of administered variable rate assets and liabilities are not precisely matched, which exposes the balance sheet to changes in the relationship between administered rates and market rates.

Other risks that are inherent in Group Infrastructure include credit spread, foreign currency, prepayment and launch risks. Credit spread risk arises principally on Group Infrastructure's holdings of mortgage-backed securities. Foreign exchange risk arises from differences in the present value of existing foreign-currency denominated assets and liabilities, and future known cashflows. The Group is also exposed to risks arising from features in retail products that give customers the right to alter the expected cash flows of a financial contract. This creates prepayment risk, for example where customers may prepay loans before their contractual maturity. In addition, the Group is exposed to product launch risk, for example where the customers may not take up the expected volume of new fixed rate mortgages or other loans.

 

Managing market risk

 

The Asset and Liability Management Committee is responsible for managing the Group's overall balance sheet position. Natural offsets are used as far as possible to mitigate yield curve exposures but the overall balance sheet position is generally managed using derivatives that are transacted through Global Banking & Markets and with external counterparties. The Treasurer is responsible for managing risks in accordance with the Asset and Liability Management Committee's direction. Risks are managed within a three-tier limit structure defined by the Market Risk Manual:

 

Global limits approved by Banco Santander, S.A.'s Board Risk Committee;

Limits and triggers approved by Head of Wholesale Risk; and

Local sub-limits set to control the exposures retained within individual business areas.

 

The key risk metrics, Net Interest Margin ('NIM') and Market Value of Equity ('MVE') measure the Group's exposure to yield curve risk. The following table shows the results of these measures at 31 December 2010 and 2009:

 

2010

£m

2009

£m

Net Interest Margin Sensitivity to +100 basis points shift in yield curve

309

(38)

Market Value of Equity Sensitivity to +100 basis points shift in yield curve

410

2

 

Net Interest Margin and Market Value of Equity sensitivities are calculated based on market rate paths implied by the current yield curve, and based on contractual product features including re-pricing and maturity dates. The NIM and MVE sensitivities reflect how the base case valuations would be affected by a 100 basis point parallel shift applied instantaneously to the yield curve, and provide complementary views of the Group's exposure to interest rate movements.

MVE Sensitivity provides a long-term view covering the present value of all future cash flows, whereas NIM Sensitivity considers the impact on net interest margin over the next 12 months. The calculations for NIM and MVE sensitivities involve many assumptions, including expected customer behaviour (e.g. early repayment of loans) and how interest rates will evolve. The assumptions are reviewed and updated on a regular basis.

The movements in the sensitivities between 2009 and 2010 are largely explained by enhancements made to the assumptions and the closer alignment of the sensitivity calculations on certain portfolios during 2010 with the Santander risk modelling approach. 

 

Derivatives

 

Derivative financial instruments ('derivatives') are contracts or agreements whose value is derived from one or more underlying indices or asset values inherent in the contract or agreement, which require no or little initial net investment and are settled at a future date. They include interest rate, cross-currency and equity related swaps, forward rate agreements, caps, floors, options and swaptions (see below). In Group Infrastructure, derivatives are used for economic hedging.

All derivatives are classified as held at fair value through profit or loss. For accounting purposes under IFRS, the Group chooses to designate certain derivatives as in a hedging relationship if they meet specific criteria set out in IAS 39 "Financial Instruments: Recognition and measurement".

The main hedging derivatives are interest rate and cross-currency swaps, which are used to hedge fixed-rate lending and structured savings products and medium-term note issuances, capital issuances and other capital markets funding.

Derivative products that are combinations of more basic derivatives (such as swaps with embedded option features), or that have leverage features, may be used in circumstances where the underlying position being hedged contains the same risk features. In such cases the derivative used will be structured to match the risks of the underlying asset or liability. Exposure to market risk on such contracts is therefore economically hedged.

The following table summarises the activities undertaken within Group Infrastructure, including those executed on its behalf by Global Banking & Markets, the related risks associated with such activities and the types of hedging derivatives used in managing such risks. These risks may also be managed using on-balance sheet instruments as part of an integrated approach to risk management. Further information is contained in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Activity

Risk

Type of hedge

Management of the return on variable rate assets financed by shareholders' funds and net non-interest-bearing liabilities.

 

Reduced profitability due to falls in interest rates.

Receive fixed interest rate swaps.

Management of the basis between administered rate assets and liabilities and wholesale market rates.

 

Reduced profitability due to adverse changes in the basis spread.

Basis swaps.

Management of repricing profile of wholesale funding.

Reduced profitability due to adverse movement in wholesale interest rates when large volumes of wholesale funding are repriced.

 

Forward rate agreements.

Fixed rate lending and investments.

Sensitivity to increases in interest rates.

 

Pay fixed interest rate swaps.

Fixed rate retail and wholesale funding.

Sensitivity to falls in interest rates.

 

Receive fixed interest rate swaps.

Equity-linked retail funding.

Sensitivity to increases in equity market indices.

 

Receive equity swaps.

Management of other net interest income on retail activities.

 

Sensitivity of income to changes in interest rates.

Interest rate swaps.

Issuance of products with embedded equity options.

 

Sensitivity to changes in underlying index and index volatility causing option exercise.

Interest rate swaps combined with equity options.

Lending and investments.

 

Sensitivity to weakening credit quality.

Purchase credit default swaps and total return swaps.

 

Lending and issuance of products with embedded interest rate options.

 

Sensitivity to changes in underlying rate and rate volatility causing option exercise.

Interest rate swaps plus caps/floors.

Investment in, and issuance of, bonds with put/call features.

Sensitivity to changes in rates causing option exercise.

Interest rate swaps combined with swaptions(1) and other matched options.

 

(1) A swaption is an option on a swap that gives the holder the right but not the obligation to buy or sell a swap.

 

Funding and Liquidity Risk

 

The Group views the essential elements of funding and liquidity risk management as controlling potential cash outflows, maintaining prudent levels of highly liquid assets and ensuring that access to funding is available from a diversity of sources. The Board targets a funding strategy that avoids excessive reliance on wholesale funding and attracts enduring commercial deposits by understanding the liquidity persistence of customer deposits under different scenarios, appropriately reflecting product features and types of customers. The funding strategy aims to provide effective diversification in the sources and tenor of funding as well as establishing the capacity to raise additional unplanned funding from those sources quickly. An excessive concentration in either liquid assets or contractual liabilities also contributes to potential liquidity risk, and so limits have been defined under the Liquidity Risk framework.

In line with the policy of Banco Santander, S.A., the Group manages its funding and maintains adequate liquidity on a stand-alone basis. Nevertheless, the Group co-ordinates issuance plans with Banco Santander, S.A., where appropriate. While the Group's liquidity risk is consolidated and centrally controlled, liquidity risk is also measured, monitored and controlled within the specific business area or the subsidiary where it arises.

 

Funding risk

 

Definition

 

Funding risk is the risk that the Group does not have sufficiently stable and diverse sources of funding or the funding structure is inefficient or a funding programme such as debt issuance subsequently fails. For example, a securitisation arrangement may fail to operate as anticipated or the values of the assets transferred to a funding vehicle do not emerge as expected creating additional risks for the Group and its depositors. Risks arising from the encumbrance of assets are also included within this definition. Primary sources of funding include:

Customer deposits;

Secured and unsecured money-market funding (including unsecured cash, repo, CD and CP issuance);

Senior debt issuance (including discrete bond issues and MTNs);

Mortgage-backed funding (including securitisation and covered bond issuance); and

Subordinated debt and capital issuance (although the primary purpose is not funding).

For accounting purposes, wholesale funding comprises deposits by customers, deposits by banks, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities. Retail and Corporate funding is primarily classified as deposits by customers.

 

Managing funding risk

 

Funding risk is managed by the Treasurer, Head of ALM who is responsible for the production of strategic and tactical funding plans as part of the Group's planning process. These funding plans are approved by the Board and the Asset and Liability Management Committee and are controlled on a day-to-day basis by the Treasurer and within the framework of the Liquidity Risk Manual. The plans are stressed to ensure adverse conditions can be accommodated via a range of management levers. Funding and liquidity management is the responsibility of the Finance Director who delegates day-to-day responsibility to the Treasurer. Liquidity risk control and oversight are provided by the Chief Risk Officer, supported by the Risk Division.

 

Wholesale funding 

 

The Group's wholesale funding is managed by the ALM function within Group Infrastructure, to maintain a balanced duration. At 31 December 2010, 46% (2009: 31%) of wholesale funding had a maturity of greater than one year with an overall residual duration for wholesale funding of 762 days (2009: 666 days). In 2010, £21bn of medium-term funding was issued, replacing £18bn which had matured. The Group continued to benefit both from the conservative proportion of retail assets that are funded in wholesale markets, as well as having entered the period of market stress in a strong liquidity position. The required 2011 issuance levels are expected to be lower than the 2010 levels. Further discussion on sources and uses of funding and an overview of market conditions during 2010 are disclosed within the 'Balance sheet business review - Funding and liquidity'.

 

2010

2009

£bn

£bn

Money market funding(1)

20.1

24.5

Securitisation(2)

18.1

16.1

Covered bonds(2)

9.8

4.6

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase and other funding(3)

15.5

18.6

Senior unsecured funding(2,4)

9.8

10.8

Capital instruments(5)

6.4

7.1

Total Wholesale funding

79.7

81.7

(1) Includes deposits by banks and customers (accounted for as trading liabilities), certificates of deposit and commercial paper.

(2) Includes derivatives hedging the debt issuances.

(3) Comprise securities sold under agreements to repurchase (including retained mortgage backed notes) primarily used for medium term funding.

(4) Includes debt securities in issue excluding securitisation, covered bond, commercial papers and certificate of deposits.

(5) Includes subordinated debt and certain instruments included in equity.

 

Liquidity risk

 

Definition

 

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have available sufficient financial resources to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure them only at excessive cost. Liquidity risks arise throughout the Group. Its primary business activity is commercial banking and, as such, it engages in maturity transformation, whereby callable and short-term commercial deposits are invested in longer-term customer loans.

 

Managing liquidity risk

 

Liquidity risk is managed under a comprehensive and prudent liquidity risk management framework. The primary objective of the framework is to ensure that Santander UK is liquidity risk resilient by holding sufficient financial resources to withstand regulatory and internal stresses.

The key ongoing liquidity risks are:

 

Key liquidity risk

Definition

Retail funding risk

Risk of loss of customer deposits.

 

Wholesale secured and unsecured funding risk

 

Risk of wholesale unsecured and secured deposits failing to roll over.

Intra-day liquidity risk

Risk of intra-day systems dislocation following direct or indirect participation in payment or settlement systems.

 

Off-balance sheet liquidity risk

Risk of insufficent financial resources required to service off-balance sheet assets or commitments.

 

Derivatives and contingent liquidity risks

Risk of ratings downgrades that could trigger events leading to increased outflows of financial resources, for example, to cover additional margin or collateral requirements.

 

 

Liquidity risk appetite

The Board's risk objective is to be a risk resilient institution at all times, and to be perceived as such by stakeholders, preserving the short and long term viability of the institution. While recognising that a bank engaging in maturity transformation cannot hold sufficient liquidity to cover all possible stress scenarios, the Board requires the Group to hold sufficient liquidity to cover extreme situations. Executive management has defined stress scenarios to enable the Board to establish its liquidity risk appetite. The requirements arising from the new regulatory liquidity regime are reflected in the Board's liquidity risk appetite.

The liquidity risk appetite has been recommended by the Chief Executive Officer and approved by the Board, under advice from the Risk Committee. The liquidity risk appetite, within the context of the overall Risk Appetite Statement, is reviewed and approved by the Board at least annually or more frequently if necessary (e.g. in the case of significant methodological change). This is designed to ensure that the liquidity risk appetite will continue to be consistent with the Group's current and planned business activities.

The Chief Executive Officer, under advice from the Risk Committee, approves more detailed allocation of liquidity risk limits. The Chief Risk Officer, supported by the Risk Division (including the Heads of Wholesale Risk and Banking Market Risk), is responsible for the ongoing maintenance of the liquidity risk appetite.

 

Governance and oversight

All key liquidity risks are identified and encompassed within the Group's Risk Framework and subject to the Group's three-tier risk governance framework. The Board delegates day-to-day responsibility for liquidity risk to the Chief Executive Officer. The Chief Executive Officer has in turn delegated the responsibilities for:

 

Liquidity Management ('Line 1') to the Finance Director, and

Liquidity Risk Control ('Line 2') to the Chief Risk Officer.

 

Risk Framework

Adherence to the Group's liquidity risk appetite is monitored on a daily, weekly and monthly basis through different committees and levels of management including the Asset and Liability Management Committee ('ALCO') and the Risk Committee, and quarterly by the Board and the Audit and Risk Committee. ALCO is responsible for overseeing the management of the Group's balance sheet in accordance with the Board-approved funding plan and adequacy of liquidity, consistent with the liquidity risk appetite. This includes consideration of relevant macro-economic factors and conditions in the financial markets.

 

Operating Framework

The Group operates centralised liquidity governance and control processes. The Treasurer is responsible for the day-to-day management of the Group's balance sheet, including the adequacy of liquidity. ALM operates two dedicated teams within a unified management and reporting structure: one focuses on the management of strategic liquidity risk (i.e. over one year) and the other focuses on the management of tactical liquidity (i.e. within one year).

Management also monitors the Group's compliance with limits set by the UK Financial Services Authority. Actual liquidity positions are tracked and reported daily against approved limits, triggers and other metrics through both Line 1 and Line 2. Any breaches are escalated according to the Group's Risk Framework. The adequacy of the agreed liquidity buffer is monitored through stress testing which is undertaken daily. Resilience to the defined stresses is reported monthly to ALCO, or more frequently depending on market conditions.

 

Liquid assets

The Group holds, at all times, an unencumbered liquid asset buffer to mitigate liquidity risk. The size and composition of this buffer is determined both by internal stress tests as well as the appropriate UK Financial Services Authority liquidity regime; a surplus is maintained in both cases. In 2010, the Group increased its holding of Individual Liquidity Adequacy Standards ('ILAS') eligible assets (as defined within the UK Financial Services Authority liquidity regime) ('core liquid assets'), held exclusively for liquidity purposes.

The table below shows the liquid assets held by the Group:

 

2010

2009

£bn

£bn

Cash at central banks

25

4

Government bonds

15

10

Core liquid assets

40

14

High quality bonds

6

13

Other liquid assets(1)

16

25

Total liquid assets

62

52

(1) Includes own issuances of £14.6bn at 31 December 2010 (2009: £19.1bn).

 

The key element of the Group's liquidity risk management is focused on holding sufficient liquidity to withstand a series of stress tests. Within the framework of prudent funding and liquidity management, Santander UK manages its activities to minimise liquidity risk, differentiating between short-term and strategic activities.

 

Short-term, tactical liquidity management:

Liquid assets - a buffer of liquid assets is held to cover unexpected demands on cash in extreme but plausible stress scenarios. In the Group's case, the largest stress events include large and unexpected deposit withdrawals by retail customers and a loss of unsecured wholesale funding.

Intra-day collateral management - to ensure that adequate collateral is available to support payments in each payment or settlement system in which the Group participates, as they fall due.

 

 

Strategic funding management:

Structural balance sheet shape - to manage the extent of maturity transformation (investment of shorter term funding in longer term assets), the funding of non-marketable assets with wholesale funding and the extent to which non-marketable assets can be used to generate liquidity.

Wholesale funding strategy - to avoid over-reliance on any individual counterparty, currency, market or product, or group of counterparties, currencies, markets or products that may become highly correlated in a stress scenario; and to avoid excessive concentrations in the maturity of wholesale funding.

Wholesale funding capacity - to maintain and promote counterparty relationships, monitor line availability and ensure funding capacity is maintained through ongoing use of lines and markets.

 

Collateral calls on derivatives positions can pose a significant liquidity risk. Collateral calls may arise at times of market stress and when asset liquidity may be tightening. The timing of the cash flows on a derivative hedging an asset may be different to the timing of the cash flows of the asset being hedged, even if they are similar in all other respects. Collateral calls may be triggered by a credit downgrading. The Group manages these risks by including collateral calls in stress tests on liquidity, and by maintaining a portfolio of assets held for managing liquidity risk.

Risk limits and triggers are set for the key tactical and strategic liquidity risk drivers. These are monitored by the Treasurer and Risk Division and reported monthly to the Asset and Liability Management Committee, Risk Committee and the Board.

 

Maturities of financial liabilities

The table below analyses the maturities of the undiscounted cash flows relating to financial liabilities of the Group based on the remaining period to the contractual maturity date at the balance sheet date. Deposits by customers are largely made up of Retail Deposits. In particular, the 'Demand' grouping includes current accounts and other variable rate savings products. The 'Up to 3 months' grouping largely constitutes wholesale funding of wholesale assets of a similar maturity. There are no significant financial liabilities related to financial guarantee contracts. This table is not intended to show the liquidity of the Group.

 

At 31 December 2010

Group

 

Demand

£m

Up to 3

months

£m

3-12

months

£m

1-5

years

£m

Over 5

years

£m

 Total

£m

Deposits by banks

3,478

876

48

3,230

211

7,843

Deposits by customers

104,664

9,124

24,282

15,146

526

153,742

Trading liabilities

1,329

35,088

4,229

1,770

705

43,121

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

-

1,331

542

861

1,058

3,792

Debt securities in issue

-

12,138

4,998

12,526

24,286

53,948

Loan commitments

14,886

3,149

815

3,165

8,643

30,658

Subordinated liabilities

-

533

309

1,639

9,733

12,214

124,357

62,239

35,223

38,337

45,162

305,318

Derivative financial instruments

-

74

19

201

2,070

2,364

Total financial liabilities

124,357

62,313

35,242

38,538

47,232

307,682

 

At 31 December 2010

Company

 

Demand

£m

Up to 3

months

£m

3-12

months

£m

1-5

years

£m

Over 5

years

£m

Total

£m

Deposits by banks

25,556

40,329

29,439

42,223

10,621

148,168

Deposits by customers

97,850

7,528

21,135

8,945

40,871

176,329

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

-

32

-

1

-

33

Debt securities in issue

-

1,337

214

1,633

-

3,184

Loan commitments

2,535

3,067

188

1,140

3,315

10,245

Subordinated liabilities

-

533

309

1,639

8,681

11,162

125,941

52,826

51,285

55,581

63,488

349,121

Derivative financial instruments

-

-

-

-

-

-

Total financial liabilities

125,941

52,826

51,285

55,581

63,488

349,121

 

At 31 December 2009

Group

Demand

£m

Up to 3

months

£m

3-12

months

£m

1-5

years

£m

Over 5

years

£m

Total

£m

Deposits by banks

3,716

1,918

25

159

-

5,818

Deposits by customers

105,157

7,169

18,228

13,476

654

144,684

Trading liabilities

2,864

37,554

3,204

2,430

443

46,495

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

-

1,012

619

2,318

487

4,436

Debt securities in issue

-

12,327

7,313

5,856

23,859

49,355

Loan commitments

35,723

11,835

963

1,734

2,323

52,578

Subordinated liabilities

-

260

330

1,750

10,406

12,746

147,460

72,075

30,682

27,723

38,172

316,112

Derivative financial instruments

-

54

341

1,723

255

2,373

Total financial liabilities

147,460

72,129

31,023

29,446

38,427

318,485

 

At 31 December 2009

Company

Demand

£m

Up to 3

months

£m

3-12 months

£m

1-5

years

£m

Over 5

years

£m

Total

£m

Deposits by banks

3,333

24,000

10,564

73,944

7,567

119,408

Deposits by customers

77,240

15,933

12,468

15,302

44,581

165,524

Loan commitments

8,441

-

34

-

-

8,475

Subordinated liabilities

-

198

290

1,540

7,994

10,022

89,014

40,131

23,356

90,786

60,142

303,429

Derivative financial instruments

-

-

-

-

437

437

Total financial liabilities

89,014

40,131

23,356

90,786

60,579

303,866

 

As the above table is based on contractual maturities, no account is taken of call features related to subordinated liabilities. The repayment terms of debt securities may be accelerated in line with the covenants, as described in Note 34 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. In addition, no account is taken of the possible early repayment of the Group's mortgage-backed non-recourse finance which is redeemed by the Group as funds become available from redemptions of the residential mortgages. The Group has no control over the timing and amount of redemptions of residential mortgages.

The maturity analyses above for derivative financial liabilities include the remaining contractual maturities for those derivative financial liabilities for which contractual maturities are essential for an understanding of the timing of the cash flows. These consist of interest rate swaps and cross-currency swaps which are used to hedge the Group's exposure to interest rates and exchange rates, and all loan commitments.

 

Operational Risk (Unaudited)

 

Definition

 

Operational risk is the risk of loss to the Group, resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external events. This includes regulatory, legal and compliance risk. Such risks can materialise as frauds, process failures, system downtime or damage to assets due to fire, floods etc. When such risks materialise they have not only immediate financial consequences for the Group but also an effect on its business objectives, customer service and regulatory responsibilities. Operational risk exposures arise across the Group's business divisions and operating segments, and are managed on a consistent basis.

 

Objectives

 

The basic aim pursued by the Group in operational risk control and management is to identify, measure/assess, control/mitigate and inform about this risk. The Group's priority, therefore, is to identify and eliminate any clusters of operational risk, irrespective of whether losses have been incurred. Measurement of this risk also contributes to the establishment of priorities in operational risk management.

For the purpose of calculating regulatory capital for operational risk, Santander UK currently employs the standardised approach provided for under the Basel II rules in line with the Banco Santander, S.A. group:

 

use of Risk Self-Assessments;

use of Key Risk Indicators to monitor risks and set tolerance levels;

capture and analysis of losses and incidents; and

scenario analysis.

 

The Group continues to assess the most appropriate time to shift to the advanced measurement approach ('AMA').

 

Managing operational risk

 

The Group undertakes extensive activity to minimise the impacts operational risks may have on business areas. An independent central operational risk function (Enterprise and Operational Risk) has responsibility for establishing the framework within which these risks are managed and is aligned to operational risk professionals within business areas (co-ordinated by IT and Operational Risk) to ensure consistent approaches are applied across the Group. The primary purpose of the framework is to define and articulate the Group-wide policy, processes, roles and responsibilities. The framework incorporates industry practice and regulatory requirements.

The day-to-day management of operational risk is the responsibility of business managers who identify, assess and monitor the risks, in line with the processes described in the framework. The operational risk function ensures that all key risks are regularly reported to Risk Fora, the Risk Committee and Board.

 

Key operational risk activity in 2010

During 2010, Santander UK continued to manage its key operational risk in the interest of all its stakeholders, responding to critical developments both within the Group and in the environment in which it operated.

Over recent years, the Group has grown significantly. It has integrated Abbey, the Bradford & Bingley savings business and Alliance & Leicester into its UK operations. In 2009, the Group concentrated on integrating the Bradford & Bingley savings business and Alliance & Leicester group systems, with further focus on Alliance & Leicester throughout 2010. This period of growth was challenging in a time of turbulence in financial markets and many actions were taken to minimise the operational risks arising whilst meeting key customer requirements. For example:

 

The creation of 1,000 UK-based customer-facing roles in branches and call centres to help improve customer service at the busiest times.

 

All of the Group's 25 million customers were brought together from the three different banks and given access to more than 1,400 branches (including agencies) in the UK.

 

A dedicated complaints helpline was set up, staffed by a team of complaints experts to deal with problems that arise both quickly and decisively.

 

Improvements to the bank account switcher process were made to make it quicker and simpler for customers, and to reduce the likelihood of errors.

 

The Group has taken advantage of the growth it has generated to make customer service a priority, striving to ensure its processes meet customers' requirements not only now, but also for the future.

 

In line with UK Financial Services Authority guidance and industry practice, the Group has crisis management and disaster recovery arrangements to ensure that critical business processes are maintained in the event of unforeseen interruptions. Insurance policies have been purchased to provide cover for a range of potential operational risk losses. In response to the increased threats of terrorism, flooding and pandemic disasters, contingency strategies continue to be refined and key progress has included the development of dispersed contingency sites and automated system switch over facilities.

The Group has also invested heavily in fraud prevention systems, processes and controls as well as in the education of front line and back office staff in order to counter the increasing threat of financial crime and to safeguard the investments of the Group's customers and assets.

 

Regulatory, legal and compliance risk

 

Regulatory, legal and compliance risk is the risk of reductions in earnings and/or value, through financial or reputational loss, from failing to comply with the laws, regulations or codes applicable.

Regulatory, legal and compliance exposure is driven by the significant volume of current legislation and regulation with which the Group has to comply, along with new legislation and regulation which needs to be reviewed, assessed and embedded into day-to-day operational and business practices across the Group as a whole. Following the financial crisis, the pace and extent of regulatory reform proposals both in the UK and internationally have increased significantly, and can be expected to remain at high levels. Future changes in regulation, fiscal or other policies are unpredictable and beyond the control of the Group, but could for instance affect the Group's future business strategy, structure or approach to funding. Further uncertainties arise where regulations are principles-based without the regulator defining supporting minimum standards either for the benefit of the consumer or firms. This gives rise to both the risk of retrospection from any one regulator and also to the risk of differing interpretation by individual regulators.

For legal and regulatory issues there are significant reputational impacts associated with potential censure which drive the Group's stance on the appetites referred to above. There are clear accountabilities and processes in place for reviewing new and changing requirements. Each division and significant business areas have a nominated individual with 'compliance oversight' responsibility under UK Financial Services Authority rules. The role of such individuals is to advise and assist management to ensure that each business has a control structure which creates awareness of the rules and regulations, to which the Group is subject, and to monitor and report on adherence to these rules and regulations.

 

Basel II

 

Santander UK's risk management complies with Basel principles. Throughout 2009 and 2010, the Group applied the retail internal ratings-based (IRB) approach for credit risk to its key retail portfolios. During the course of 2009, regulatory approval was received to apply a refined approach to the residential mortgage portfolio which addressed the effects of pro-cyclicality evident in the estimates for probability of default ('PD'). As a result, a combination of the advanced and foundation internal ratings-based approaches was employed for the principal portfolios. For the remaining credit exposures, currently on the Basel II standardised approach, a rolling programme of transition to the appropriate IRB approach is underway. The standardised approach for Operational Risk continued to be applied during 2010.

The Group applied Basel II to its Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process ('ICAAP') and to the risk and capital disclosures made to the market. This includes the amendments introduced to the Capital Requirements Directive that were applicable in 2010.

The Group has applied Banco Santander S.A.'s approach to risk management in its application of Basel II. Further information on the Group's capital position under Basel II is included in Note 51 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. Further information on the Basel II risk measurement of the Group's exposures will be included in Banco Santander S.A.'s Pillar 3 report.The Group's Pillar 3 disclosures are set out in the Balance Sheet Business Review on pages 59 to 61.

 

Forthcoming regulatory changes

 

In forecasting the Group's capital and liquidity positions, the implications of forthcoming regulatory changes (commonly referred to as Basel III), have been taken into account. In cases where proposed rules are still in the formative stage, the Group has applied appropriately conservative assumptions. Similarly, a conservative approach has been adopted in respect of the proposed implementation timescales, to allow for acceleration by the regulatory authorities.

 

Other Risks (Unaudited)

 

Business/strategic risk

 

Definition

Business/strategic risk is the current or prospective risk to earnings and capital arising from changes in the business environment and from adverse business decisions, improper implementation of decisions or lack of responsiveness to changes in the business environment. This includes pro-cyclicality and capital planning risk. The internal component is the risk related to implementing the strategy. The external component is the risk of the business environment change on the firm's strategy.

 

Managing business/strategic risk

Business/strategic risk is managed on a monthly basis by the Risk Committee via the Economic Capital model. This is further discussed in the 'Economic capital' section.

 

Reputational risk

 

Definition

Reputational risk is the risk of financial loss or reputational damage arising from treating customers unfairly, a failure to manage risk, a breakdown in internal controls, or poor communication with stakeholders. This includes the risk of decline in the value of the Group's franchise potentially arising from reduced market share, complexity, tenor and performance of products and distribution mechanisms.

 

Managing reputational risk

Reputational risk is managed within the operational risk framework and other internal control and approval processes.

 

Pension obligation risk

 

Definition

Pension obligation risk is the risk of an unplanned increase in funding required by the Group's pension schemes, either because of a loss of net asset value or because of changes in legislation or regulatory action.

 

Managing pension obligation risk

The Group has statutory funding obligations as the sponsoring employer for a number of defined benefit staff pension schemes. The schemes are managed by independent trustees in accordance with legislation and trust deeds and rules, for the benefit of members. The Group accepts that it is exposed to pension obligation risk that could give rise to an unexpected increase in the Group's obligations to fund the schemes, either because of a loss of net asset value or because of changes in legislation or regulatory action. The principal risks to the net asset value of the schemes are an increase in the value of the liabilities arising from adverse changes in the longevity assumptions, increases in inflation or reductions in the discount rate used, and scheme assets being adversely affected by market movements.

The Financial Controller is responsible for managing the Group's exposure to pension obligation risk, in conjunction with the trustees. Further information on pensions can be found in "Critical Accounting Policies" in Note 1 and in Note 37 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Residual value risk

 

Definition

Residual value risk is the risk that the value of an asset at the end of a contract may be worth less than that required to achieve the minimum return from the transaction that had been assumed at its inception. Residual value risk relates to the operating lease assets of the Group, which consist of commercial vehicles and other assets to it corporate customers, of which the Group is the lessor, and the finance lease assets, which consist mainly of office fixtures and equipment of which the Group is the lessee.

 

Managing residual value risk

Residual value risk is controlled through asset specific policies and delegated authorities agreed by the Risk Committee. An assessment of the revised residual value risk is undertaken each time a new lease is written or an existing lease renewed and extended. In addition, portfolio impairment reviews are undertaken and independently evaluated and signed-off by the Group's Risk Division, with impairment loss allowances being raised where appropriate.

 

Impact of the Current Credit Environment

 

Introduction

 

This section contains disclosures about the effect of the current credit environment on the Group's financial instruments including structured products. The Group aims to actively manage these exposures. Additional information on the Group's exposures by country is disclosed in 'Balance Sheet Business Review - Country risk exposure'.

The Group's financial instruments which have been most affected by the current credit environment include floating rate notes ('FRNs') (including the Group's exposures to Structured Investment Vehicles ('SIVs')), asset-backed securities ('ABS') (including mortgage-backed securities ('MBS') and the Group's exposures to monoline insurers), Collateralised Debt Obligations ('CDOs'), Collateralised Loan Obligations ('CLOs'), loans to banks, certain credit derivatives and off-balance sheet entities. Details of the Group's investing and lending arrangements with respect to these instruments are set out below.

In November 2010, the Group acquired a portfolio of loans to banks, asset-backed securities and certain credit derivatives, as part of an alignment of portfolios across the Banco Santander, S.A. group. The following disclosures include the financial instruments recognised as a result of the acquisition of that portfolio.

 

Classification in the Consolidated Balance Sheet

 

The classification of these assets in the Group consolidated balance sheet is as follows:

 

2010

Type of Financial Instrument analysed further

Sub-total

OECD Govt

debts

Bank & building society CDs

Total

Note

FRNs

ABS

CDO

CLO

Loans

Deriv-atives

Other

Balance sheet line item

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Trading assets - debt securities

13

10,901

-

-

-

-

-

-

10,901

6,630

290

17,821

Derivatives - equity & credit contracts

14

-

-

-

-

-

38

-

38

-

-

38

Financial assets designated at fair

value - debt securities

15

-

1,046

12

-

-

-

240

1,298

-

-

1,298

Loans and advances to banks

16

-

-

-

-

3,852

-

-

3,852

-

-

3,852

Available-for-sale - debt securities

21

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

125

-

125

Loans and receivables securities

22

1,652

1,772

37

112

-

-

37

3,610

-

-

3,610

12,553

2,818

49

112

3,852

38

277

19,699

6,755

290

26,744

 

2009

Type of Financial Instrument analysed further

Sub-total

OECD Govt

debts

Bank & building society CDs

Total

Note

FRNs

ABS

CDO

CLO

Loans

Deriv-atives

Other

Balance sheet line item

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Trading assets - debt securities

13

11,128

-

-

-

-

-

-

11,128

2,869

1,935

15,932

Financial assets designated at fair

value - debt securities

15

-

3,446

50

-

-

-

263

3,759

-

2,220

5,979

Loans and advances to banks

16

-

-

-

-

9,151

-

-

9,151

-

-

9,151

Available-for-sale - debt securities

21

342

-

-

-

-

-

-

342

405

-

747

Loans and receivables securities

22

6,749

2,245

80

639

-

-

185

9,898

-

-

9,898

18,219

5,691

130

639

9,151

-

448

34,278

3,274

4,155

41,707

 

Additional analysis is presented below of the above financial instruments, except for the category "OECD Govt debts" and "Bank & building society CDs". Further detail on those assets is set out in Notes 13, 15 and 21 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The income statement movement below excludes the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates.

 

Summary

 

The balance sheet position at the year end and income statement movements during the year for these financial instruments may be summarised as follows. In respect of the income statement movement during the year, fair value changes relate to financial instruments accounted for at fair value, and impairment losses relate to financial instruments accounted for at amortised cost, subject to impairment loss allowances.

 

2010

Nominal

Book value

Fair value

2010 Income statement movement(1)

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Floating rate notes

12,519

12,553

12,490

47

-

Asset-backed securities

2,949

2,818

2,597

60

-

Collateralised debt obligations

84

49

52

(1)

-

Collateralised loan obligations

127

112

94

(3)

-

Loans

3,852

3,852

3,852

-

-

Derivatives

657

38

38

-

-

Other investments

282

277

276

2

-

20,470

19,699

19,399

105

-

 

2009

Nominal

Book value

Fair value

2009 Income statement movement(1)

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Floating rate notes

18,267

18,219

18,129

49

(6)

Asset-backed securities

5,893

5,691

5,424

1

(31)

Collateralised debt obligations

215

130

130

(15)

(3)

Collateralised loan obligations

703

639

606

(21)

-

Loans

9,151

9,151

9,151

-

-

Other investments

453

448

449

16

(4)

34,682

34,278

33,889

30

(44)

(1) Amounts in respect of assets held at the balance sheet date i.e. not including amounts relating to assets sold during the year.

 

The fair value of these financial instruments may be analysed by credit rating ofthe issuer or counterparty as follows:

 

2010(1)

FRNs

£m

Other

£m

Total

£m

AAA

10,794

2,847

13,641

AA+

-

348

348

AA

633

1,869

2,502

A

770

1,366

2,136

BBB

277

76

353

Below BBB

16

161

177

Unrated

-

242

242

Total

12,490

6,909

19,399

 

2009(1)

FRNs

£m

Other

£m

Total

£m

AAA

10,828

5,416

16,244

AA+

83

-

83

AA

2,271

7,250

9,521

A

3,803

2,335

6,138

BBB

550

306

856

Below BBB

594

191

785

Unrated

-

262

262

Total

18,129

15,760

33,889

(1) External ratings are applied to all exposures, where available.

 

The remainder of this section further analyses each major type of these financial instruments by:

 

Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty;

Vintage by geographical location of issuer or counterparty, where applicable;

Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty; and

>

Vintage by credit rating of issuer or counterparty, where applicable.

 

 

Floating Rate Notes

 

(a) Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

9,984

80

10,093

10,081

101

18

-

Italy

141

1

139

134

95

(3)

-

Spain

598

5

593

575

96

(11)

-

Rest of Europe

1,199

9

1,123

1,102

92

41

-

US

139

1

131

125

90

6

-

Rest of the world

458

4

474

473

103

(4)

-

Total

12,519

100

12,553

12,490

100

47

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

9,913

53

9,953

9,938

100

85

(6)

Italy

653

4

650

650

100

(3)

-

Spain

1,546

9

1,527

1,510

98

(16)

-

Rest of Europe

3,943

22

3,910

3,897

99

1

-

US

699

4

651

633

91

(24)

-

Rest of the world

1,513

8

1,528

1,501

99

6

-

Total

18,267

100

18,219

18,129

99

49

(6)

 

(b) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

10,728

86

10,794

10,794

101

26

-

AA

647

5

642

633

98

(14)

-

A

810

7

797

770

95

30

-

BBB

302

2

295

277

92

4

-

Below BBB

32

-

25

16

50

1

-

Total

12,519

100

12,553

12,490

100

47

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

10,757

59

10,828

10,828

101

135

-

AA+

83

-

83

83

100

-

-

AA

2,297

13

2,270

2,271

99

(16)

-

A

3,925

21

3,865

3,803

97

(52)

-

BBB

589

3

570

550

94

(16)

-

Below BBB

616

4

603

594

96

(2)

(6)

Total

18,267

100

18,219

18,129

99

49

(6)

 

Substantially all the AAA-rated FRNs held are issued by UK banks and guaranteed by the UK Government. The other FRNs held are principally issued by other banks and financial institutions. On average, the FRNs have 13 months to maturity (2009: 18 months).

 

Structured Investment Vehicles

As at 31 December 2010, the Group had no holdings in SIVs. As at 31 December 2009, the Group had SIV holdings with a nominal value of £14m against which impairment loss allowances of £11m had been raised, giving a book value of £3m. These SIV holdings were sold in 2010. The SIVs were formerly classified as floating rate notes in the balance sheet and included in the tables above.

 

Asset-Backed Securities

 

(a) Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

ABS

218

7

226

226

104

(2)

-

MBS

941

31

953

910

97

15

-

1,159

38

1,179

1,136

98

13

-

US

ABS

520

18

474

439

84

(5)

-

MBS

227

8

181

124

55

21

-

747

26

655

563

75

16

-

Rest of Europe

ABS

253

9

245

234

93

35

-

MBS

576

20

548

476

83

(2)

-

829

29

793

710

86

33

-

Rest of the world

ABS

43

1

35

35

81

-

-

MBS

171

6

156

153

89

(2)

-

214

7

191

188

88

(2)

-

Total

2,949

100

2,818

2,597

88

60

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

ABS

142

2

141

140

99

-

-

MBS

912

16

878

791

87

(26)

-

1,054

18

1,019

931

88

(26)

-

US

ABS

553

9

506

483

87

(41)

(5)

MBS

292

5

218

125

43

(26)

(20)

845

14

724

608

72

(67)

(25)

Rest of Europe

ABS

300

5

288

283

94

12

(6)

MBS

3,542

60

3,511

3,463

98

85

-

3,842

65

3,799

3,746

98

97

(6)

Rest of the world

MBS

152

3

149

139

91

(3)

-

152

3

149

139

91

(3)

-

Total

5,893

100

5,691

5,424

92

1

(31)

 

(b) Vintage of asset-backed securities by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Country

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

UK

ABS

218

12

-

6

-

53

41

-

MBS

941

51

-

23

6

44

27

-

1,159

63

-

20

5

45

30

-

US

ABS

520

21

-

23

70

7

-

-

MBS

227

20

-

19

40

23

18

-

747

41

-

23

61

11

5

-

Rest of Europe

ABS

253

6

-

20

33

15

32

-

MBS

576

31

-

23

2

30

45

-

829

37

-

22

12

26

40

-

Rest of the world

ABS

43

-

-

100

-

-

-

-

MBS

171

4

-

-

-

-

100

-

214

4

-

20

-

-

80

-

Total

2,949

145

-

21

21

28

30

-

 

(b) Vintage of asset-backed securities by geographical location of issuer or counterparty (continued)

 

2009

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Country

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

UK

ABS

142

3

-

27

4

54

15

-

MBS

912

68

-

35

10

26

29

-

1,054

71

-

34

9

30

27

-

US

ABS

553

31

-

27

66

6

1

-

MBS

292

35

11

23

37

26

14

-

845

66

11

26

56

13

5

-

Rest of Europe

ABS

300

5

-

25

3

42

30

-

MBS

3,542

46

-

80

1

9

10

-

3,842

51

-

76

1

11

12

-

Rest of the world

MBS

152

6

-

34

3

3

60

-

152

6

-

34

3

3

60

-

Total

5,893

194

11

60

11

15

14

-

 

(c) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

ABS

742

25

689

651

88

21

-

MBS

1,333

45

1,327

1,245

93

12

-

2,075

70

2,016

1,896

91

33

-

AA+

ABS

108

4

106

106

98

7

-

MBS

234

8

218

215

92

3

-

342

12

324

321

94

10

-

AA

ABS

12

-

10

7

58

(1)

-

MBS

133

5

120

93

70

-

-

145

5

130

100

69

(1)

-

A

ABS

79

3

86

84

106

-

-

MBS

47

1

40

30

64

(2)

-

126

4

126

114

90

(2)

-

BBB

ABS

19

-

17

15

79

-

-

MBS

20

1

15

12

60

3

-

39

1

32

27

69

3

-

Below BBB

ABS

74

3

72

71

96

1

-

MBS

148

5

118

68

46

16

-

222

8

190

139

63

17

-

Total

2,949

100

2,818

2,597

88

60

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

ABS

803

14

761

734

91

(21)

-

MBS

3,730

63

3,667

3,553

95

58

-

4,533

77

4,428

4,287

95

37

-

AA

ABS

10

-

8

7

70

(1)

-

MBS

364

6

348

313

86

(8)

-

374

6

356

320

86

(9)

-

A

ABS

56

1

51

50

89

(4)

-

MBS

582

10

574

564

97

(5)

-

638

11

625

614

96

(9)

-

BBB

ABS

67

1

66

65

97

(1)

-

MBS

51

1

42

34

67

(7)

-

118

2

108

99

84

(8)

-

Below BBB

ABS

59

1

49

49

83

(1)

(11)

MBS

171

3

125

55

32

(9)

(20)

230

4

174

104

45

(10)

(31)

Total

5,893

100

5,691

5,424

92

1

(31)

(d) Vintage of asset-backed securities by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Credit rating

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

AAA

ABS

742

31

-

18

51

18

12

-

MBS

1,333

73

-

24

5

36

36

-

2,075

104

-

22

21

29

28

-

AA

ABS

120

6

-

30

55

3

12

-

MBS

367

15

-

9

3

34

54

-

487

21

-

14

16

27

43

-

A

ABS

79

1

-

45

1

54

-

-

MBS

47

4

-

10

58

2

30

-

126

5

-

32

22

34

12

-

BBB

ABS

19

1

-

50

34

16

-

-

MBS

20

2

-

1

99

-

-

-

39

3

-

25

67

8

-

-

Below BBB

ABS

74

-

-

22

-

-

78

-

MBS

148

12

-

25

25

28

22

-

222

12

-

25

17

18

40

-

Total

2,949

145

-

21

21

28

30

-

 

2009

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Credit rating

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

AAA

ABS

803

37

-

27

45

18

10

-

MBS

3,730

115

-

71

4

9

16

-

4,533

152

-

63

11

11

15

-

AA

ABS

10

1

-

29

41

30

-

-

MBS

364

15

5

5

6

65

24

-

374

16

5

6

7

63

24

-

A

ABS

56

1

-

-

-

100

-

-

MBS

582

3

-

95

3

-

2

-

638

4

-

86

3

9

2

-

BBB

ABS

67

-

-

55

-

11

34

-

MBS

51

4

-

49

40

11

-

-

118

4

-

53

17

11

19

-

Below BBB

ABS

59

-

-

-

27

47

26

-

MBS

171

18

6

22

23

35

20

-

230

18

6

16

24

38

22

-

Total

5,893

194

11

60

11

15

14

-

 

Included above are ALT-A US asset-backed securities with book values of £111m (2009: £185m) and fair values of £75m (2009: £107m).

 

Collateral supporting asset-backed securities including mortgage-backed securities

The following table shows the vintages of the collateral assets supporting the Group's holdings of asset-backed securities and mortgage-backed securities at 31 December 2010 and 2009.

 

2010

Original vintage

Nominal

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Asset Type

£m

%

%

%

%

%

Prime lending

2,795

21

21

28

30

-

ALT-A

154

17

46

11

26

-

Total

2,949

21

21

28

30

-

 

2009

Original vintage

Nominal

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Asset Type

£m

%

%

%

%

%

Prime lending

5,663

61

10

15

14

-

ALT-A

224

34

40

17

9

-

Sub-prime

6

-

-

-

100

-

Total

5,893

60

11

15

14

-

 

Monoline Insurers  

The Group has a £99m (2009: £219m) exposure to corporate bonds and securitisations which are wrapped by monoline insurers. The principal risk exposures are recorded against the securitisations, with the monoline wraps being viewed as contingent exposures. The exposures to monoline insurers are classified as asset-backed securities in the balance sheet and are included in the tables above.

 

Collateralised Debt Obligations

 

(a) Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Fair value

as % of nominal

2010 Income statement movement

Original exposure to sub-prime

Original

credit

enhancement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

%

%

UK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Rest of Europe

1

1

1

1

100

-

-

-

-

US

83

99

48

51

61

(1)

-

-

13

Total

84

100

49

52

62

(1)

-

-

13

 

2009

Fair value

as % of nominal

2010 Income statement movement

Original exposure to sub-prime

Original

credit

enhancement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

%

%

UK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Rest of Europe

2

1

2

2

100

(1)

-

-

-

US

213

99

128

128

60

(14)

(3)

11

30

Total

215

100

130

130

60

(15)

(3)

11

30

 

(b) Vintage of collateralised debt obligations by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Country

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

ABS CDO

UK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Rest of Europe

1

-

-

-

100

-

-

-

US

21

3

-

100

-

-

-

-

22

3

-

95

5

-

-

-

Synthetic CDO

US

16

4

-

-

100

-

-

-

16

4

-

-

100

-

-

-

Other CDO

US

46

6

-

49

1

21

29

-

46

6

-

49

1

21

29

-

Total

84

13

-

52

21

11

16

-

 

2009

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Country

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

ABS CDO

UK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Rest of Europe

2

-

-

50

50

-

-

-

US

48

15

14

33

65

2

-

-

50

15

14

34

64

2

Synthetic CDO

US

95

11

-

100

-

-

-

-

95

11

-

100

-

-

-

-

Other CDO

US

70

8

1

38

5

24

33

-

70

8

1

38

5

24

33

-

Total

215

34

15

64

17

8

11

-

 

 (c) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Fair value

as % of nominal

2010 Income statement movement

Original exposure to sub-prime

Original

credit

enhancement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

%

%

AAA

10

12

5

8

80

(1)

-

-

-

AA

12

14

10

10

83

-

-

-

13

A

15

18

11

8

53

(1)

-

-

23

BBB

6

7

3

5

83

(1)

-

-

18

Below BBB

41

49

20

21

51

2

-

-

9

Total

84

100

49

52

62

(1)

-

-

13

 

 

 (c) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty (continued)

 

 

2009

Fair value

as % of nominal

2010 Income statement movement

Original exposure to sub-prime

Original

credit

enhancement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

%

%

AAA

16

7

8

8

50

(1)

-

-

26

AA

64

30

48

48

75

(5)

-

1

13

A

17

8

7

7

41

(1)

-

10

-

BBB

23

11

15

15

65

(1)

-

1

1

Below BBB

95

44

52

52

55

(7)

(3)

6

2

Total

215

100

130

130

60

(15)

(3)

11

30

 

(d) Vintage of collateralised debt obligations by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Credit rating

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

ABS CDO

AAA

1

-

-

4

96

-

-

-

BBB

6

1

-

100

-

-

-

-

Below BBB

15

2

-

100

-

-

-

-

22

3

-

95

5

-

-

-

Synthetic CDO

Below BBB

16

4

-

-

100

-

-

-

16

4

-

-

100

-

-

-

Other CDO

AAA

9

-

-

100

-

-

-

-

AA

12

2

-

97

3

-

-

-

A

15

4

-

1

2

7

90

-

Below BBB

10

-

-

7

-

93

-

-

46

6

-

49

1

21

29

-

Total

84

13

-

52

21

11

16

-

 

2009

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Credit rating

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

ABS CDO

AAA

12

6

-

-

100

-

-

-

AA

12

3

2

100

-

-

-

-

A

1

-

-

100

-

-

-

-

BBB

5

1

2

100

-

-

-

-

Below BBB

20

5

10

-

95

5

-

-

50

15

14

34

64

2

-

-

Synthetic CDO

A

15

1

-

100

-

-

-

-

BBB

16

3

-

100

-

-

-

-

Below BBB

64

7

-

100

-

-

-

-

95

11

-

100

-

-

-

-

Other CDO

AAA

4

1

-

67

-

33

-

-

AA

52

7

1

39

-

11

50

-

A

1

-

-

-

100

-

-

-

BBB

2

-

-

50

50

-

-

-

Below BBB

11

-

-

31

-

69

-

-

70

8

1

38

5

24

33

-

Total

215

34

15

64

17

8

11

-

 

In addition, in the ordinary course of business, the Group entered into long-term interest rate hedging contracts with five investment vehicles whose underlying assets comprise debt securities, bank loans and energy and infrastructure financings. Although the vehicles themselves are not externally rated, the counterparty exposure ranks super-senior to the most senior notes issued by the vehicles and these notes are rated AAA or AA. The total mark-to-market exposure at 31 December 2010 was £81m (2009: £100m).

 

 

Collateralised Loan Obligations

 

(a) Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

17

13

15

10

59

(3)

-

Rest of Europe

37

29

32

26

70

(1)

-

US

73

58

65

58

79

1

-

Total

127

100

112

94

74

(3)

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

93

13

87

82

88

(5)

-

Rest of Europe

42

6

36

28

67

(5)

-

US

568

81

516

496

87

(11)

-

Total

703

100

639

606

86

(21)

-

 

(b) Vintage of collateralised loan obligations by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Country

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

UK

17

9

-

25

-

75

-

-

Rest of Europe

37

6

-

24

-

30

46

-

US

73

41

-

41

-

26

33

-

Total

127

56

-

34

-

34

32

-

 

2009

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-

prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Country

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

UK

93

13

-

14

59

14

13

-

Rest of Europe

42

8

-

22

5

42

31

-

US

568

122

-

82

4

10

4

-

Total

703

143

-

70

11

12

7

-

 

 

(c) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

3

2

3

3

100

(1)

-

AA

26

21

23

19

73

(3)

-

A

36

28

32

29

81

1

-

BBB

59

47

51

41

69

(1)

-

Below BBB

3

2

3

2

67

1

-

Total

127

100

112

94

74

(3)

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

202

29

185

176

87

(7)

-

AA

254

36

225

218

86

(1)

-

A

181

26

161

157

87

(4)

-

BBB

56

8

49

39

70

(7)

-

Below BBB

10

1

19

16

160

(2)

-

Total

703

100

639

606

86

(21)

-

 

(d) Vintage of collateralised loan obligations by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2010

Credit rating

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

AAA

3

3

-

-

-

92

8

-

AA

26

20

-

33

-

-

67

-

A

36

20

-

57

-

43

-

-

BBB

59

13

-

18

-

42

40

-

Below BBB

3

-

-

100

-

-

-

-

Total

127

56

-

34

-

34

32

-

 

2009

Nominal

Original credit enhancements

Original sub-

prime exposure

Original vintage

Pre-2005

2005

2006

2007

2008-2009

Credit rating

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

%

%

AAA

202

41

-

43

28

24

5

-

AA

254

51

-

92

6

2

-

-

A

181

38

-

84

-

8

8

-

BBB

56

12

-

24

-

34

42

-

Below BBB

10

1

-

70

30

-

-

-

Total

703

143

-

70

11

12

7

-

 

 

Loans to banks

 

In November 2010, the Group acquired a portfolio of loans to banks, asset-backed securities and related credit derivatives, as part of an alignment of portfolios across the Banco Santander, S.A. group. The following disclosures relate to all the loans to banks held by the Group, including those recognised as a result of the acquisition of that portfolio.

 

(a) Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

1,461

38

1,461

1,461

100

-

-

Spain

646

16

646

646

100

-

-

France

727

19

727

727

100

-

-

Rest of Europe

24

1

24

24

100

-

-

US

970

25

970

970

100

-

-

Rest of the world

24

1

24

24

100

-

-

Total

3,852

100

3,852

3,852

100

-

-

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

UK

1,405

15

1,405

1,405

100

-

-

Spain

5,995

66

5,995

5,995

100

-

-

France

2

-

2

2

100

-

-

Rest of Europe

1,472

16

1,472

1,472

100

-

-

US

118

1

118

118

100

-

-

Rest of the world

159

2

159

159

100

-

-

Total

9,151

100

9,151

9,151

100

-

-

 

(b) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

939

25

939

939

100

-

-

AA

1,704

44

1,704

1,704

100

-

-

AA-

36

1

36

36

100

-

-

A+

151

4

151

151

100

-

-

A

1,007

26

1,007

1,007

100

-

-

BB+

2

-

2

2

100

-

-

D

13

-

13

13

100

-

-

Total

3,852

100

3,852

3,852

100

-

-

 

(b) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty (continued)

 

2009

2009 Income statement movement

Nominal value

Book value

Fair value

Fair value as

% of nominal

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

AAA

955

10

955

955

100

-

-

AA

6,482

71

6,482

6,482

100

-

-

AA-

19

-

19

19

100

-

-

A+

142

2

142

142

100

-

-

A

1,415

15

1,415

1,415

100

-

-

BBB-

138

2

138

138

100

-

-

Total

9,151

100

9,151

9,151

100

-

-

 

 

 

Certain credit derivatives

 

In November 2010, the Group acquired a portfolio of loans to banks, asset-backed securities and related credit derivatives, as part of an alignment of portfolios across the Banco Santander, S.A. group. The following disclosures relate to the credit derivatives recognised as a result of the acquisition of that portfolio. Further information on all the Group's holdings of derivatives (including these credit derivatives) is set out in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

(a) Income statement movement by geographical location of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Contract/notional amount

Fair value

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Country

£m

%

£m

£m

£m

UK

-

-

-

-

-

Rest of Europe

584

89

25

-

-

US

73

11

13

-

-

Total

657

100

38

-

-

 

(b) Income statement movement by credit rating of issuer or counterparty

 

2010

2010 Income statement movement

Contract/notional amount

Fair value

Fair value changes

Impairment losses

Credit rating

£m

%

£m

£m

£m

AA

559

85

21

-

-

A

98

15

17

-

-

Total

657

100

38

-

-

 

No comparatives are presented as the Group acquired these financial instruments during the year.

 

 

Other investments

 

Book value

Fair value

Book value

Fair value

2010

£m

2010

£m

2009

£m

2009

£m

Principal Protected Notes

37

35

24

26

Other

240

241

424

423

277

276

448

449

 

The Principal Protected Notes are backed by highly rated bank counterparties and are due to mature by the end of 2016. Other investments of £240m (2009: £424m) consisted primarily of reversionary property securities and, in 2009, a debenture issued by a fellow subsidiary in the Banco Santander, S.A. group that matured in 2010.

 

 

Exposure to Off-Balance Sheet Entities sponsored by the Group 

 

Certain Special Purpose Entities ('SPE's) are formed by the Group to accomplish specific and well-defined objectives, such as securitising financial assets. The Group consolidates these SPEs when the substance of the relationship indicates control, as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. Details of SPEs sponsored by the Group (including SPEs not consolidated by the Group) are set out in Note 19 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The only SPEs sponsored but not consolidated by the Group are SPEs which issue shares that back retail structured products. The Group's arrangements with these entities comprise the provision of equity derivatives and a secondary market-making service to those retail customers who wish to exit early from these products. Further information on these entities is described in Note 19 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Board of Directors

As at 31 December 2010

 

Chairman

 

Lord Burns

Lord Burns (age 67) was appointed Joint Deputy Chairman on 1 December 2001 and Chairman on 1 February 2002. He is also Chairman of Channel 4 Television Corporation and a Non-Executive Director of Banco Santander, S.A.. His current professional roles include President of the Society of Business Economists, Fellow of the London Business School, Companion of the Institute of Management, President of the National Institute of Economic and Social Research and Vice President of the Royal Economic Society. He was formerly Permanent Secretary to the Treasury and chaired the Parliamentary Financial Services and Markets Bill Joint Committee. He was a Non-Executive Director of British Land plc (2000-2005), Pearson plc (1999-2010) and Legal & General Group plc (1991-2001). He was also Chairman of the National Lottery Commission (2000-2001), Marks and Spencer Group plc (2006-2008) and Glas Cymru Cyfyngedig (Welsh Water) (2000-2010).

 

 

Executive Directors

 

Ana Botín

Chief Executive Officer

Ana Botín (age 50) was appointed as Chief Executive Officer on 1 December 2010. She joined the Banco Santander, S.A. group in 1988, directed Banco Santander, S.A.'s Latin American international expansion in the 1990's and was responsible for the Latin American, Corporate Banking, Asset Management and Treasury areas. Ana was Chief Executive Officer of Banco Santander de Negocios and has been a member of Banco Santander, S.A.'s Board and Executive Committee since 1989 and of its Management Committee since 1994. In 2002 Ana was appointed Executive Chairman of Banco Español de Credito, S.A. in Spain, leading the bank towards clear improvements in profitability, efficiency and brand recognition as well as showing a commitment towards product innovation, SMEs and service quality.

 

José María NusChief Risk Officer

José MaríaNus (age 60) was appointed as an Executive Director on 17 March 2011 and is responsible for the Risk Division. Previously, José María was Chief Risk Officer at Banco Español de Credito, S.A., where he was a member of the Board and member of the Executive Committee. Prior to joining Banco Español de Credito, S.A. he held senior positions at Bankinter, S.A. and Banco de Negocios Argentaria, S.A. where he was Managing Director of Risk.

 

Alison BrittainExecutive Director, Retail DistributionAlison Brittain (age 46) was appointed Executive Director, Retail Distribution on 2 January 2008. She is responsible for Branch Distribution (including Bancassurance and Mortgages), Telephone Distribution, e-commerce, Business Banking and Specialist Distribution. She was previously Managing Director of the Barclays and Woolwich Retail Network and the Small Business Banking division of Barclays Bank plc.

 

 

Non-Executive Directors Juan Rodríguez Inciarte

Deputy Chairman

Juan Inciarte (age 58) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 1 December 2004. He joined Banco Santander, S.A. in 1985. After holding various positions, he was appointed to the Board of Directors in 1991, holding this office until 1999. He is currently a member of the Boards of Banco Banif, S.A., Santander Consumer Finance S.A., and Banco Santander's International Advisory Board. He was a Director of the Royal Bank of Scotland plc and National Westminster Bank plc (from 1998 - 2004) and has served on the Board of Directors of ABN AMRO Holding N.V., First Fidelity Bancorp and First Union Corporation (now part of Wells Fargo), San Paolo - IMI in Italy, Sovereign Bancorp in the US (from 2006 - 2008), NIBC Bank N.V. in the Netherlands (from 2005 - 2007) and Compañía Española de Petróleos, S.A. of Spain. Mr Inciarte is Chairman of the US-Spain Council, Member of the Spain-Japan Council Foundation, Member of the Board of Trustees of the Carlos V International Centre of the Autonomous University of Madrid and a Fellow of The Chartered Institute of Bankers in Scotland.

 

Non-Executive Directors continued Jane Barker

Jane Barker (age 61) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 21 October 2008. She is Chief Executive Officer of Equitas Limited, the company set up to re-insure and run-off the 1992 and prior years' non-life liabilities of Lloyd's of London syndicates and a Non-Executive Director of Marsh Limited. She is Deputy Chairman of the Royal College of Music, an external member of the Appeal Panel for Scotland and Northern Ireland Banknote Regulation Regime and was previously a member of the council and chair of the Audit Committee of the Open University. Her other previous roles have included being Finance Director of the London Stock Exchange.

 

Roy Brown

Roy Brown (age 64) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 21 October 2008. He is a Chartered Engineer and is Chairman of GKN plc, Governor of Tonbridge School and Chairman of the Tonbridge School Foundation. Formerly, he was a Senior Independent Director of HMV Group plc, Executive Director of Unilever plc and NV, a Non-Executive Director of Brambles Industries plc, the British United Provident Association Ltd (BUPA) and the Franchise Board of Lloyd's of London.

 

José María Carballo

José María Carballo (age 66) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 1 December 2004. He is Chairman of La Unión Resinera Española, Chairman of Vista Desarrollo, Director of Vista Capital Expansion S.A. S.G.E.C.R. and Director of Teleférico Pico del Teide S.A.. He is also Vice President and Honorary Treasurer of the Iberoamerican Benevolent Society (UK). He was Executive Vice President of Banco Santander, S.A. from 1989-2001 and Chief Executive Officer of Banco Santander de Negocios from 1989 to 1993. Until 1989 he was Executive Vice President responsible for Europe at Banco Bilbao Vizcaya. He was also Executive Vice President of Banco de Bilbao in New York until 1983.

 

José María Fuster

José María Fuster (age 52) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 1 December 2004. He is Executive Vice President of Operations and Technology, and Chief Information Officer of Banco Santander, S.A. and Non-Executive Director of Banco Español de Credito, S.A.. He joined Banco Español de Credito, S.A.,in 1998 and was appointed as Chief Information Officer of Banco Santander, S.A. in 2003. He started his professional career with International Business Machines, S.A. and Arthur Andersen as a consultant. He has also worked for Citibank España, S.A. and National Westminster Bank plc.

 

Rosemary Thorne

Rosemary Thorne (age 59) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 1 July 2006. She is also a Non-Executive Director on the Board of Smurfit Kappa Group plc. She was Group Finance Director of Ladbrokes plc until April 2007, Non-Executive Director of Cadbury Schweppes plc until September 2007 and Senior Independent Director on the Board of Virgin Radio Holdings Limited until June 2008. Previously, she was Group Financial Controller of Grand Metropolitan Public Limited Company (prior to its merger with Guinness plc to become Diageo plc) and spent almost eight years as the Group Finance Director of J Sainsbury plc. She joined the Board of Bradford & Bingley plc in 1999 as Group Finance Director, initially working on its demutualisation and flotation, resulting in a place in the FTSE 100 in December 2000. She remained in this role for a further five years. She was a member of the Financial Reporting Council and Financial Reporting Review Panel for nine years and a member of The Hundred Group of Finance Directors Main Committee for 15 years.

 

Keith Woodley

Keith Woodley (age 71) was appointed Non-Executive Director on 5 August 1996. He was made Senior Independent Non-Executive Director in April 1999 and was Deputy Chairman from 6 April 1999 until November 2004. He is a former Non-Executive Director of National and Provincial Building Society and a former partner of Deloitte Haskins & Sells. A past President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales, he is a Council Member and Pro-Chancellor of the University of Bath.

 

Directors' Report

Corporate Structure

 

Santander UK plc (the 'Company') is a subsidiary of Banco Santander, S.A.. The ordinary shares of the Company are not traded on the London Stock Exchange. Banco Santander, S.A. is incorporated in Spain and has its registered office at Paseo de Pereda 9-12, Santander, Spain. Note 23 to the Consolidated Financial Statements provides a list of the principal subsidiaries of the Company, the nature of each subsidiary's business and details of branches. Note 39 to the Consolidated Financial Statements provides details of the Company's share capital including the increase in share capital during the year.

 

Corporate Governance

 

The Company is subject to the Listing Rules and the Disclosure & Transparency Rules of the UK Financial Services Authority, because it has preference shares listed on the London Stock Exchange. As a result of its preference share listing, the Company is not required to make certain disclosures that are normally part of the continuing obligations of equity listed companies in the UK. However, a number of voluntary disclosures have been introduced in this Directors' Report relating to remuneration (see pages 141 to 143).

Additionally, the Company will comply with any remuneration disclosure requirements in the UK Financial Services Authority's Prudential Sourcebook for Banks, Building Societies and Investment Firms by way of separate and distinct reporting to those disclosures contained in this Annual Report. This report will be made available on the website www.aboutsantander.co.uk.

Principal Activities and Business Review

 

The principal activity of Santander UK plc, company number 2294747, and its subsidiaries (together 'Santander UK' or the 'Group') continues to be the provision of an extensive range of personal financial services. In addition, Santander UK provides a wide range of banking and financial services to business and public sector customers. The Company is authorised and regulated by the UK Financial Services Authority.

The Company is required to set out in this report a fair review of the development and performance of the business of the Group during the year ended 31 December 2010 and of the position of the Group at the end of the year, as well as factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position. The information that fulfils this requirement can be found in the Chief Executive Officer's Review on pages 2 to 4 and the relevant sections of the Business and Financial Review referred to below, which are incorporated into and form part of this Directors' Report. When reading the Chief Executive Officer's Review and the Business and Financial Review, reference should be made to the Forward-looking Statements section on page 5.

 

Information on the development and performance of the business of the Group, both at a consolidated level and analysed by division can be found in the Chief Executive Officer's review and in the following sections:

An analysis of the Group's development and performance during the year is contained in the "Business Review - Summary" on pages 11 to 21.

A further detailed analysis of the business divisions is contained in the "Business Review - Divisional results" on pages 25 to 38.

 

Information on the position of the Group at the end of the year can be found in the Chief Executive Officer's review and in the following sections:

An analysis of the Group's business volumes is contained in the "Business Review - Divisional results" on pages 27 to 29.

The Balance Sheet Business Review can be found on pages 42 to 66, including details of capital expenditure on page 54, contractual obligations and off-balance sheet arrangements on page 58, a review of capital management and resources on pages 59 to 61, and funding and liquidity on pages 61 to 64.

The Group's key performance indicators are described in the "Business Review - Summary" on pages 22 to 24.

 

The Company is also required to describe the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group. Financial risks are described in the Risk Management Report by type of risk, with further analysis by segment on pages 67 to 134, and material risk factors are described in the Risk Factors section on pages 266 to 276.

 

Results and Dividends

 

The results of the Group are discussed in the Principal Activities and Business Review above. The Directors do not recommend the payment of a final dividend (2009: £nil). An interim dividend of £400m was declared on 30 September 2010 on the Company's ordinary shares in issue and this was paid in December 2010. A further Interim dividend of £375m was declared and authorised on 21 December 2010 and this will be paid in the first half of 2011. An interim dividend of £500m was declared in 2009 and paid in 2010.

 

Events after the balance sheet date

 

None.

 

Going Concern

 

The Directors confirm that they are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in business for the foreseeable future. For this reason, they continue to adopt a going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

As outlined above, the Group's business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in the Chief Executive Officer's Review on pages 2 to 4 and in the Business Review on pages 11 to 38. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the Balance Sheet Business Review on pages 42 to 66. In addition, Note 51 to the Consolidated Financial Statements includes the Group's objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk. As also outlined above, in respect of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group, financial risks are described in the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134, and material risk factors are described in the Risk Factors section on pages 266 to 276.

In assessing going concern, the Directors take account of all information of which they are aware about the future, which is at least, but is not limited to, twelve months from the date that the balance sheet is signed. This information includes the Group's results forecasts and projections, estimated capital, funding and liquidity requirements as well as contingent liabilities, and possible economic, market and product developments, taking account of reasonably possible changes in trading performance.

 

Budgets and forecasts

Since the acquisition of the Company by Banco Santander, S.A., the Group has a history of profitable operations. Management prepares a 3-year plan (the '3-Year Plan') that forecasts balance sheet, income and margin, by product, with a particular focus on the forthcoming year.

> 

Review and reforecast

The 3-Year Plan, its assumptions, forecast results and key sensitivities are reviewed by senior management and presented to the Executive Committee, the Board of Directors and to senior executives of Banco Santander, S.A.. The budget is reforecast frequently and reviewed by the Executive Committee and the Board of Directors. As part of the budgets and planning process, a particular emphasis is placed on ensuring the sustainability of earnings, and achieving and maintaining a high level of operating efficiency in the Group (measured by the trading cost:income ratio) to enable competitive products to be developed for customers.

> 

Stress testing

To assess the Group's ability to adapt to various market challenges, the budgets are "stress tested" as part of the Group's internal capital adequacy assessment process ('ICAAP') under Basel II. Different scenarios are modelled, including a severe scenario, and senior management makes an assessment of how this would affect the Group's profit and funding plans.

 

> 

Borrowing requirements and liability management

The Group's financial plans are constructed to ensure that they allow the Group to meet its financial obligations as they fall due, both with respect to maturing existing liabilities and future borrowing requirements. On 3 August 2010, Banco Santander, S.A. through a Spanish-based subsidiary Santusa Holding, S.L., injected £4,456m of equity capital into the Company. The capital was used to support the reorganisation of certain Banco Santander, S.A. group companies in the UK as described in Note 49 to the Consolidated Financial Statements and will be used to support organic and inorganic growth.

The Group's funding requirements are met from a variety of sources, with a significant majority being sourced from retail and corporate deposits (i.e. the commercial bank's customers). At 31 December 2010, commercial bank customer assets as a percentage of commercial bank customer liabilities and shareholders' equity stood at 123% (2009: 126%). The balance of the Group's funding is sourced from the wholesale markets with reference to prevailing and expected market conditions and the desired balance sheet structure. The Board considers it appropriate to balance cost effective short-term financing with medium and long-term funds, which have less refinancing risk, all within the context of maintaining a diverse range of sources of wholesale funding.

Asset and Liability Management produce strategic and tactical funding plans as part of the Group's planning process. These funding plans are approved by the Board and the Asset and Liability Management Committee and are controlled on a day-to-day basis by the Treasurer, Head of ALM and within the framework of the Liquidity Risk Manual. The plans are stressed to ensure adverse conditions can be accommodated via a range of management levers. Funding and liquidity management is the responsibility of the Finance Director who delegates day-to-day responsibility to the Treasurer, Head of ALM. Liquidity risk control and oversight are provided by the Chief Risk Officer, supported by the Risk Division. See the Risk Management Report for further details on Liquidity Risk Management.

 

> 

Contingent liabilities

The Directors, via the Audit and Risk Committee, also consider the Group's exposure to contingent liabilities. This consideration addresses contingent liabilities experienced by the Group in the past, such as legal proceedings, guarantees, operating lease commitments, product misselling liabilities, and those arising in respect of the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme, but also considers whether there are any new contingencies. Contingent liabilities are captured on a timely basis for purposes of disclosure in the Annual Report and Accounts, and the interim financial statements. Information about guarantees to third parties, tax contingencies and other contingencies are gathered and disclosed. Data about the Group's operating lease commitments are also captured.

 

 

Non-trading guarantees require the approval of the Chief Executive Officer or the Financial Controller or, in their absence, the Finance Director or any two Company Executive Directors or one Company Executive Director and the Company Secretary. This provision forms part of the Company's Corporate Governance Framework (other Financial Delegated Authorities).

 

> 

Products and markets

The Directors review information about the major aspects of the economic environment within which the Group operates at monthly Board meetings. This information includes an economic update which contains data on key economic and market trends. In addition, the Group's Economic Analysis team monitors and provides information to the Board on current and prospective economic and market developments. Retail financial markets, such as the housing market, are a major focus for analysing current trends and potential developments.

The Directors also receive regular briefings on market share for the Group's major products and six-monthly competitor analyses.

Wholesale market conditions are reviewed daily by the Treasurer, Head of ALM and presented monthly to the Asset and Liability Management Committee by way of an update. The tactical and strategic funding plans are updated, if necessary, with reference to current and expected market conditions.

 

> 

Financial risk management

The Group's risk management focuses on major areas of risk, namely credit risk, market risk, liquidity risk, and operational risk. The Risk Management Report sets out in detail how the Group manages these risks.

 

> 

Financial adaptability

The Directors also consider the ability of the Group to take effective action to alter the amounts and timing of cash flows so that it can respond to unexpected needs or opportunities. Such financial adaptability mitigates the areas of financial risk above in considering the appropriateness of the going concern presumption in relation to the Group. In determining the financial adaptability of the Group, the Directors have considered the ability of the Group to:

Obtain new sources of finance

The Group minimises refinancing risk by sourcing funds from a variety of markets as appropriate and subject to consideration of the appropriate leverage ratio and funding mix for the Group, and in particular customer deposit levels and medium-term financing. The Group actively manages its relationships with existing providers of funding and considers new sources of funds as and when they arise.

Day-to-day sources of finance consist primarily of retail deposits. To the extent that wholesale funding is required, a variety of sources are usually available from a range of markets, including:

-

money markets: both unsecured (including interbank and customer deposits, and issuances of certificates of deposit and commercial paper) and secured (including repos in open market operations);

-

debt capital markets (including discrete bond issues and medium term notes);

-

mortgage-backed funding (including securitisation and covered bond issuance); and

-

capital instruments (although primarily issued to maintain capital ratios). 

In addition to day-to-day funding sources, the Group has access to contingent sources from Central Banks, including the Bank of England, the Swiss National Bank, and the US Federal Reserve. The Group ensures that it has access to these contingent facilities as part of its prudent liquidity risk management. See the Risk Management Report for further details on Liquidity Risk Management. The Group minimises reliance on any one market by maintaining a diverse funding base, and avoiding concentrations by maturity, currency and institutional type.

> 

Obtain financial support from other group companies

For liquidity purposes, the Group operates on a stand-alone basis. However, in case of stress conditions, it would consult with its ultimate parent company, Banco Santander, S.A., about financial support.

> 

Continue business by making limited reductions in the level of operations or by making use of alternative resources

The Group maintains and regularly updates a Contingency Funding Plan to cover potential extreme scenarios. In addition, the 3-Year Plan is stressed, as part of the ICAAP process, to ensure that the Group can accommodate extreme scenarios and the impact this would have on the 3-Year Plan and profits. In accommodating these extreme scenarios, various management levers would be utilised, including the encashment of certain liquid assets and a reduction in new business in Retail and Corporate Banking.

 

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the Annual Report and Accounts.

 

Directors

 

The members of the Company's board (the 'Board') at 31 December 2010 are named on pages 135 to 136. For each Director, the date of appointment is shown. As at 31 December 2010, the Board comprised a Chairman, two Executive Directors including the Chief Executive Officer, and seven Non-Executive Directors. At the date of publication of this report, the Board composition comprised a Chairman, three Executive Directors including the Chief Executive Officer, and seven Non-Executive Directors. The roles of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer are separated and clearly defined. The Chairman is primarily responsible for the working of the Board and the Chief Executive Officer for the running of the business and implementation of Board strategy and policy. During the year, the following directors resigned:

 

Director

Title

Date of resignation

António Horta-Osório

Chief Executive Officer

1 December 2010

Antonio Lorenzo

Chief Finance Officer

1 December 2010

Juan Colombás

Chief Risk Officer

1 December 2010

 

Non-Executive Directors have been appointed for an indefinite term (other than Jane Barker, Roy Brown, Rosemary Thorne and Keith Woodley, who have been appointed for a three-year term, after which their appointments may be extended upon mutual agreement).

When they were appointed, the appointments of Ana Botín, Juan Rodríguez Inciarte, José María Fuster, José María Carballo and José María Nus were all proposed by Banco Santander, S.A.. The Company may pay an Executive Director instead of allowing them to work during their notice period.

 

Committees of the Board

 

The Board maintains two standing committees, which operate within written terms of reference.

 

Audit and Risk Committee

 

Membership of the Audit and Risk Committee is restricted to Non-Executive Directors. The Audit and Risk Committee's primary tasks are to review the scope of external and internal audit, to receive reports from the external auditors (currently Deloitte LLP) and the Chief Internal Auditor, and to review the interim information, annual financial statements and any other significant financial reports before they are presented to the Board, focusing in particular on accounting policies, compliance and areas of management judgement and estimates. The Audit and Risk Committee's scope also includes risk management and oversight and the review of the procedures in place for employees to raise concerns about possible wrongdoing in financial reporting and other matters. For a further discussion of the risk-control responsibilities of the Audit and Risk Committee, see the Risk Management section of the Annual Report and Accounts on page 72.

The Audit and Risk Committee more generally acts as a forum for discussion of internal control issues and contributes to the Board's review of the effectiveness of the Group's internal control and risk management systems and processes. The Audit and Risk Committee also conducts a review of the remit and reports of the internal audit function (which is a Banco Santander S.A. group function) in so far as it relates to the Group as well as the internal audit function's effectiveness, authority, resources and standing within the Group and management's response to their findings and recommendations.

The Audit and Risk Committee monitors the Group's relationship with, and the experience and qualifications of the external auditors, and reviews the external auditor's audit plans and audit findings. A framework for ensuring auditor independence has been adopted, which defines unacceptable non-audit assignments, pre-approval of acceptable non-audit assignments and procedures for approval of acceptable non-audit assignments.

The Audit and Risk Committee may make any recommendations to the Board as it sees fit and the Chairperson of the Audit and Risk Committee reports formally to the Board after each meeting. The Chairperson, Rosemary Thorne, has over 15 years of experience as Finance Director of FTSE 100 companies and was a member of the Financial Reporting Council, The Financial Reporting Review Panel and The Hundred Group of Finance Directors Main Committee. The Board has determined that Rosemary Thorne has the necessary qualifications and experience to qualify as an audit committee financial expert as defined in the rules promulgated under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the Board considers that she is independent in accordance with Section 303A.02 of the New York Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Rules.

The other members of the Audit and Risk Committee are José María Carballo, Keith Woodley, Roy Brown and Jane Barker. Pursuant to SEC Rule 10A-3(c)(2), which provides a general exemption from the requirement to have an audit committee for subsidiaries that are listed on a national securities exchange or market where the parent satisfies the requirement of SEC Rule 10A-3, the Company is exempt from the requirements of SEC Rule 10A-3. According to SEC Rule 10A-3(c)(2), additional listings of an issuer's securities are exempt from the audit committee requirements if the issuer is already subject to them as a result of listing any class of securities on any market subject to SEC Rule 10A-3. This exemption extends to listings of non-equity securities by a direct or indirect subsidiary that is consolidated or at least 50% beneficially owned by a parent company, if the parent is subject to the requirements as a result of the listing of a class of its equity securities.

 

Consequently, as applied to the current shareholding structure of the Company, (as a subsidiary of Banco Santander, S.A.), the Company is exempt from the audit committee requirements of SEC Rule 10A-3 since: (i) the Company is a subsidiary of Banco Santander, S.A., (ii) Banco Santander, S.A. has equity securities listed on the New York Stock Exchange and is therefore subject to SEC Rule 10A-3, and (iii) the Company does not have any equity securities listed on the New York Stock Exchange or any other national securities exchange in the United States of America.

 

Remuneration Oversight Committee

 

The Remuneration Oversight Committee was established with effect from 1 January 2010. The Remuneration Oversight Committee is primarily responsible for overseeing and supervising the Group's policies and frameworks covering remuneration and reward as applied in, or devolved to the UK. The members of the Remuneration Oversight Committee are Roy Brown (Chairman), José María Carballo, Keith Woodley, Rosemary Thorne and Jane Barker.

 

Directors' Remuneration (audited)

 

The aggregate remuneration received by the Directors of the Company in 2010 was:

 

£

Salaries and fees

4,270,326

Performance-related payments (1)

500,000

Other taxable benefits

-

Total remuneration excluding pension contributions

4,770,326

Pension contributions

-

Compensation for loss of office

-

4,770,326

(1) In line with the UK Financial Services Authority Remuneration Code, a proportion of the performance-related payment was deferred. Further details can be found in Note 46 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The table below reports the remuneration of each Director for the year ended 31 December 2010:

 

Salary and

fees

Other

Benefits(1)

Performance related payments(2)

LTIP

 

Total

Paid

Deferred

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

£'000

Executive Directors

Ana Botín (appointed 1 December 2010)

-

-

-

-

-

-

Alison Brittain

564

-

156

344

111

1,175

Juan Colombás (resigned 1 December 2010)

490

148

-

-

-

638

António Horta-Osório (resigned 1 December 2010)

797

665

-

-

-

1,462

Antonio Lorenzo (resigned 1 December 2010)

450

86

-

-

-

536

Sub total

2,301

899

156

344

111

3,811

Chairman

Terence Burns

520

-

-

-

-

520

Non-Executive Directors

Jane Barker

100

-

-

-

-

100

Roy Brown

120

-

-

-

-

120

José María Carballo

100

-

-

-

-

100

José María Fuster

-

-

-

-

-

-

Juan Rodriguez Inciarte

-

-

-

-

-

-

Rosemary Thorne

130

-

-

-

-

130

Keith Woodley

100

-

-

-

-

100

Sub total

1,070

-

-

-

-

1,070

Total

3,371

899

156

344

111

4,881

(1) Other benefits comprise cash and non-cash benefits.

(2) In line with the UK Financial Services Authority Remuneration Code, a proportion of the performance-related payment was deferred. Further details can be found in Note 46 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

These totals exclude emoluments received by Directors in respect of their primary duties as Directors or Officers of Banco Santander, S.A. in respect of which no apportionment has been made.

 

Santander Long-Term Incentive Plan (audited)

 

In 2010, Alison Brittain (2009: Alison Brittain, Juan Colombás, António Horta-Osório and Antonio Lorenzo) was granted a conditional award of shares in Banco Santander, S.A. under the Santander Long-Term Incentive Plan for a total fair value of £110,706 (2009: £944,404) based on a share price on 1 July 2010 of euro 5.57 (2009: euro 8.14). Under the Santander Long-Term Incentive Plans granted on 1 July 2010, 1 July 2009, 21 June 2008 and 31 December 2007, certain Executive Directors, Key Management Personnel (as defined in Note 45 to the Consolidated Financial Statements) and other nominated individuals were granted conditional awards of shares in Banco Santander, S.A.. The number of shares participants will receive depends on the performance of Banco Santander, S.A. during this period. All awards under the Santander Long-Term Incentive Plan will depend on Santander's Total Shareholder Return performance against a competitor benchmark group. Awards made prior to 2009 also depend on Santander's Earnings Per Share performance against a competitor benchmark group. 90.79% of the 40% of the 2007 conditional award of shares vested in July 2009 and 90.79% of the remaining 60% of the 2007 conditional award vested in July 2010. Subject to performance conditions being met, 100% of the 2008 conditional award will vest in July 2011, 100% of the 2009 conditional award will vest in July 2012 and 100% of the 2010 conditional award will vest in July 2013.

 

Remuneration of Highest Paid Director (audited)

 

In 2010, the remuneration, excluding pension contributions, of António Horta-Osório, the highest paid Director, was £1,462,066 (2009: £3,440,436) of which £nil (2009: £2,589,259) was performance related. There was no accrued pension benefit for the highest paid Director (2009: £nil), other than that accrued by, or treated to be accrued by a Spanish subsidiary of Banco Santander, S.A.. No conditional award of shares was made to the highest paid Director under the Long-Term Incentive Plan during 2010. A conditional award of shares was made to the highest paid director under the Long-Term Incentive Plan during 2009.

 

Retirement Benefits (audited)

 

Defined benefit pension plans are provided to certain of the Group's employees. See Note 37 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a description of the plans and the related costs and obligations. No retirement benefits are accruing for any directors under a defined benefit scheme (2009: nil) in respect of their qualifying services to the Group.

 

Non-Executive Directors (audited)

 

Fees were paid to Non-Executive Directors in 2010 totalling £550,360 (2009: £500,360); this amount is included above in the table of Directors' remuneration.

 

Directors' Interests and Related Party Transactions (audited)

 

In 2010, loans were made to no Directors (2009: two Directors), with a principal amount of £nil outstanding at 31 December 2010 (2009: £3,000). In 2010, loans were made to three members of the Group's Key Management Personnel (2009: two), with a principal amount of £677,823 outstanding at 31 December 2010 (2009: £834,730).

See Notes 45 and 46 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for disclosures of deposits and investments made and insurance policies entered into by the Directors, Key Management Personnel and their connected persons with the Group at 31 December 2010. Note 46 to the Consolidated Financial Statements also includes details of other related party transactions.

In 2010 and 2009, there were no other transactions, arrangements or agreements with the Group in which Directors or Key Management Personnel or persons connected with them had a material interest. No Director had a material interest in any contract of significance other than a service contract with the Group at any time during the year (2009: no Director).

No Director held any interest in the shares of any company within the Group at any time during the year (2009: no Director) and no Director exercised or was granted any rights to subscribe for shares in any company within the Group (2009: no Director). During 2010, no Directors exercised share options over shares in Banco Santander, S.A., the parent company of the Company (2009: no Director).

 

Bank Payroll Tax

 

£15,387,396 was paid in respect of Bank Payroll tax (for discretionary bonuses over £25,000 awarded to UK bank employees between 9 December 2009 and 5 April 2010). Full provision was made for this payment in 2009. This Bank Payroll tax is not applicable for the 2010 performance year.

 

FSA Remuneration Code

 

Following publication of the UK Financial Services Authority Revised Remuneration Code (the 'Code'), the Company operates a remuneration policy designed to promote effective risk management, applicable to all employees including a number of senior staff whose professional activities have a material impact on the Company's risk profile (known as 'Code Staff'). In accordance with the Code, an element of the 2010 variable remuneration of Code Staff was deferred. For Code Staff earning more than £500,000 in variable remuneration (comprising the annual bonus and Long Term Incentive Plan), at least 60% was deferred and for Code Staff earning less than £500,000 in variable remuneration, at least 40% was deferred, both for a period of three years .

 

Other Remuneration Disclosures (audited)

 

The remuneration of the five highest paid senior executive officers is detailed below. Senior executive officers are defined as members of the Company's Executive Committee (excluding Executive Directors).

 

Individual 1

£'000

Individual 2

£'000

Individual 3

£'000

Individual 4

£'000

Individual 5

£'000

Fixed remuneration

(including any non-cash and taxable benefits)

765

341

496

399

518

Variable remuneration (cash - paid)

149

147

128

142

116

Variable remuneration (cash - deferred)

341

503

262

308

134

2010 Remuneration

1,255

991

886

849

768

Long Term Incentive Plan

(outcome contingent on future performance)

101

34

100

104

54

Sign-on award

-

-

-

-

-

Severance award

-

-

-

-

-

 

Third Party Indemnities

 

Enhanced indemnities are provided to the Directors of the Company, its subsidiaries and associated companies by Santander UK plc against liabilities and associated costs which they could incur in the course of their duties to the Company. All of the indemnities remain in force at the date of this Annual Report and Accounts. A copy of each of the indemnities is kept at the registered address shown on page 278.

 

Financial Instruments

 

The financial risk management objectives and policies of the Group; the policy for hedging each major type of forecasted transaction for which hedge accounting is used; and the exposure of the Group to credit risk, market risk, and funding and liquidity risk are outlined in the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134.

 

Pension Funds

 

The assets of the pension schemes are held separately from those of the Group and are under the control of trustees.

Three of the Group's pension schemes have a common corporate trustee which, at 31 December 2010, had nine directors, comprising six Group-appointed directors (one of whom is an independent trustee director) and three member-elected directors. The National & Provincial Building Society Pension Fund has a different corporate trustee, the Board of which at 31 December 2010 comprised three Group-appointed directors (one of whom is an independent trustee director), and three member-elected directors. The above four pension schemes were, at 31 December 2010, invested in a Common Investment Fund which has a corporate trustee, comprising four Group-appointed directors and two scheme trustee appointed directors.

As at 31 December 2010 the Scottish Mutual Assurance plc Staff Pension Scheme had six trustees, of whom four are selected by the Group (two of whom are members and one of whom is an independent trustee) and two are elected by eligible members. In the case of the Scottish Provident Institution Staff Pension Fund, at 31 December 2010 there were eight trustees, of whom five (one of whom is a member and one of whom is an independent trustee) are selected by the Group and the remaining three are elected by eligible members.

As at 31 December 2010 the Alliance & Leicester Pension Scheme had nine trustees, of whom five are selected by the Group (one of whom is an independent trustee) and four are elected by eligible members.

Asset management of the schemes is delegated to a number of fund managers and the trustees receive independent professional advice on the performance of the managers. Legal advice to the trustees of the various schemes is provided by external firms of solicitors. The audits of the pension schemes are separate from that of the Group. The audits of the Amalgamated, Associated Bodies, Group and The National & Provincial Building Society Pension schemes are undertaken by Grant Thornton UK LLP. The audits of the Scottish Mutual Assurance plc Staff Pension Scheme, the Scottish Provident Institution Staff Pension Fund and the Alliance & Leicester Pension Scheme are undertaken by KPMG LLP.

 

In 2010, the Group and the trustees agreed a scheme-specific funding target, statement of funding principles, and a schedule of contributions for the principal pension schemes. This agreement forms the basis of the Group's commitment that the schemes have sufficient assets to make payments to members in respect of their accrued benefits as and when they fall due. Further information is provided in Note 37 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Market Value of Land and Buildings

 

On the basis of a periodic review process, the estimated aggregate market value of the Group's land and buildings was not significantly different from the fixed asset net book value of £941m (2009: £420m), as disclosed in Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. It is considered that, except where impairment losses have been recognised, the Group's land and buildings have a value in use that exceeds the estimated market value, and the net book value is not impaired.

 

Disability

 

The Group is committed to equality of access and quality of service for disabled people and embraces the spirit of the UK Equality Act 2010 throughout its business operations. The Group has processes in place to help train, develop, retain and promote employees with disabilities. It is committed to giving full and fair consideration to applications for employment made by disabled persons, and for continuing the employment of employees who have become disabled by arranging appropriate training and making reasonable adjustments within the workplace.

 

Employee Involvement

 

Employee share ownership

The Group operates share schemes for eligible employees. The main current schemes are the Sharesave Schemes and the Long Term Incentive Plan. The Group's other current arrangement and scheme, respectively, are free shares awarded to eligible employees and partnership shares. In addition, arrangements remain outstanding under the closed Executive Share Option scheme and the closed Alliance & Leicester Share Incentive Plan. All the share options and awards relate to shares in Banco Santander, S.A.. See Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a description of the plans and the related costs and obligations.

 

Communication

The Group wants to involve and inform employees on matters that affect them. The intranet is a focal point for communications with daily updates on what is happening across the Santander Group, 'UKTV' programmes, an online question and answer section and 'The Village' - a social networking site where staff can share information, ideas and best practice. The Group also uses face-to-face communication, such as team meetings, regional roadshows and an annual staff convention for strategic updates, as well as a quarterly staff magazine with in-depth business features. All these channels are designed to keep employees fully informed of news and developments which may have an impact on them, and also to keep them up to date on financial, economic and other factors which affect the Group's performance. The Group considers employees' opinions and asks for their views on a range of issues through regular company-wide surveys.

 

Consultation

The Group has a long history of trade union recognition governed by a partnership agreement with Advance, the independent trade union that it recognises to act as the voice of Santander UK employees. Within the former Alliance & Leicester parts of the business, we also work closely with our recognised independent trade union, the Communication Workers Union ('CWU'). Throughout 2010, the Public & Commercial Services Union ('PCS') was also recognised and following a favourable ballot of its members during 2010, PCS membership and recognition rights transferred to CWU with effect from 1 January 2011. Advance and CWU are affiliated to the Trades Union Congress. The Company consults senior trade union officials on significant proposals within the business at both national and local levels. Santander UK holds regular Joint Consultative and Negotiating Committee meetings to enable collaborative working and ensure that communication is open and two-way.

 

Donations

 

Santander UK Foundation Limited (the 'Foundation') supported disadvantaged people throughout the UK through the following two charitable priorities: education and financial capability. In 2010, Santander UK made total cash donations through the Foundation of £4,083,179 (2009: £3,281,596). Through the Staff Matched Donation Scheme, 1,568 staff donations to charities were matched during the year amounting to £1,590,979 (2009: £1,025,634).

 

Political Contributions

 

No contributions (2009: none) were made for political purposes and no political expenditure was incurred.

 

Suppliers

 

The Group has a Cost Management & Procurement Policy and process that is enforced across all significant purchases from suppliers to provide a consistent approach. Checks are made that our suppliers act in an ethical and responsible way, as part of the supplier selection process and by requiring suppliers to adhere to the Group's Corporate Social Responsibility Protocol, unless it is not relevant to the type of work being undertaken. The protocol covers human rights, labour standards, environment and anti-corruption, in line with the principles in the UN Global Compact.

 

Policy and Practice on Payment of Creditors

 

It is the Group's policy to ensure payments are made in accordance with the terms and conditions agreed, except where the supplier fails to comply with those terms and conditions. The Group's practice on payment of creditors has been quantified under the terms of Schedule 7 of The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008. Based on the ratio of the aggregate amounts owed to trade creditors at the end of the year to the aggregate amounts invoiced by suppliers during the year at 31 December 2010, trade creditor days for the Group were 15 days (2009: 17 days).

 

Code of Conduct

 

The Group is committed to maintaining high ethical standards - adhering to laws and regulations, conducting business in a responsible way and treating all stakeholders with honesty and integrity. The Group's practices in this regard are set out in Banco Santander, S.A.'s General Code of Conduct, the 'Code of Conduct'.

Under the Code of Conduct, staff are required to act at all times with the highest standards of business conduct in order to protect the Group's reputation and ensure a company culture which is free from any risk of corruption, compromise or conflicts of interest.

The Core Principles outlined in the Code of Conduct state that employees must:

 

Abide by all relevant laws and regulations.

Act with integrity in all their business actions on the Group's behalf.

Not use their authority or office for personal gain.

Conduct business relationships in a transparent manner.

Reject all improper practices or dealings they may be exposed to.

Be individually responsible for keeping to the Code of Conduct.

 

The Group also complies with the applicable code of ethics regulations of the United States Securities and Exchange Commission promulgated under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. Among other things, these regulations aim to protect investors by improving the accuracy and reliability of information that companies disclose. The rules require companies to disclose whether they have a code of ethics that applies to the Chief Executive Officer and senior financial officers that promotes honest and ethical conduct; full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosures; compliance with applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations; prompt internal reporting of violations; and accountability for adherence to such a code of ethics. The Group meets these requirements through the Code of Conduct, the whistleblowing policy, the UK Financial Services Authority's Principles for Businesses, and the UK Financial Services Authority's Principles and Code of Practice for Approved Persons (together, the 'Code of Ethics'), with which the Chief Executive Officer and senior financial officers must comply. These include requirements to manage conflicts of interest appropriately and to disclose any information the UK Financial Services Authority may want to know about. The Group provides a copy of the Code of Ethics to anyone, free of charge, on application to the address on page 278.

 

Supervision and Regulation

 

As a firm authorised by the UK Financial Services Authority, the Company is subject to UK financial services laws and regulations, which are discussed below. Recent significant regulatory developments which will affect the Group are also highlighted below.

 

UK

In the UK, the Financial Services Authority is the single independent regulator for the regulation of deposit taking, investment business, mortgages and insurance. The UK Financial Services Authority was set up by the government and exercises statutory powers under the UK Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 ('FSMA'). The Company, together with several of its subsidiaries, is authorised by the UK Financial Services Authority to carry on a range of regulated activities in the UK, which include mortgages, banking, insurance and investment business. The UK Financial Services Authority must adhere to four regulatory objectives, as prescribed in FSMA, which set out the parameters of regulation: market confidence; public awareness; the protection of consumers; and the reduction of financial crime. Based on these regulatory objectives, the UK Financial Services Authority has formulated an extensive handbook of rules and guidance to which authorised firms are subject.

 

Banks, insurance companies and other financial institutions in the UK are subject to the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the 'FSCS'). The FSCS covers claims made against authorised firms (or any participating EEA firms) where they are unable, or likely to be unable, to pay claims against them. In relation to both investments and mortgage advice and arranging, the FSCS provides cover for 100% of the first £50,000 of a claim, with £50,000 being the maximum amount payable per customer. In relation to deposits the FSCS provides cover for 100% of the first £85,000 of a claim, with £85,000 being the maximum amount payable per customer. The FSCS also extends (up to various amounts) to certain long-term and general insurance contracts, including general insurance advice and arranging.

The UK Government has announced a new regulatory framework which will take effect in 2012. The UK Financial Services Authority will be replaced by two regulatory bodies, the Prudential Regulatory Authority, which will have responsibility for the capital and liquidity of banks and insurance companies, and the Financial Conduct Authority, which will supervise conduct of business and maintain orderly financial markets for consumers. The UK Financial Services Authority will commence transition to the new structure on 4 April 2011.

 

UK Government Asset Protection Scheme

On 19 January 2009, the UK Government announced the implementation of a new asset protection scheme (the 'APS') pursuant to which, in return for a fee, the UK HM Treasury will provide to each participating institution protection against credit losses incurred on one or more portfolios of defined assets to the extent that credit losses exceed a "first loss" amount to be borne by the institution. The APS aims to target those assets where there is the greatest amount of uncertainty about their future performance including commercial and residential property loans and structured credit assets.

It was further announced on 26 February 2009 that UK HM Treasury protection will cover 90% of the credit losses which exceed the "first loss" amount, with each participating institution retaining a further residual exposure of 10% of any credit losses exceeding this amount. The APS is being offered, in the first instance, to those UK incorporated authorised deposit-takers (including UK subsidiaries of foreign institutions) with more than £25 billion of eligible assets. Following a detailed assessment of the potential benefits and costs of participation in the APS, Santander UK determined that it did not wish to participate in the APS at this time.

 

European Union

The Group is directly affected by laws emanating from the European Union, primarily through directives that must be implemented by the UK as a Member State of the European Union.

 Basel II

Basel II is a supervisory framework for the risk and capital management of banks and is structured around three pillars. Pillar 1 specifies minimum capital requirements for banks and new methodologies for calculating risk weighted assets. Pillar 2 describes the supervisory review process and outlines the ICAAP required by banks applying Pillar 1 methodologies. Pillar 3 requires disclosure of risk and capital information. The Group's capital and risk management disclosures are set out in Note 51 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

In the European Union, Basel II was implemented by the Capital Requirements Directive ('CRD') with effect from 1 January 2007. In the UK, the Financial Services Authority implemented the CRD by including it in UK Financial Services Authority rules. These new UK Financial Services Authority rules took effect from 1 January 2007. Throughout 2010 the Group has applied the Basel II framework to its capital calculations, its ICAAP and to its risk and capital disclosures to the market.

 

Liquidity

During 2009 Santander UK commenced a comprehensive programme of work to ensure compliance with the requirements of the UK Financial Services Authority's new liquidity regime as laid out in PS09/16. As part of this, during 2010 Santander UK completed an Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment as part of the UK Financial Services Authority's Supervisory Liquidity Review Process. This includes an assessment of liquidity requirements using the UK Financial Services Authority prescribed stresses. The sources of liquidity risk that are currently analysed within the liquidity risk and control framework are covered by the UK Financial Services Authority stresses.

 

Other Changes to Capital Adequacy and Liquidity Arrangements

A number of consultations are currently underway on proposals to change regulatory capital requirements in both a UK and international context. These include proposals from the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, (commonly referred to as Basel III) in respect of capital and liquidity as well as the proposition for recovery and resolution plans in the UK. Taken in aggregate, there is a potential for these reforms to have a significant effect. The Group is currently engaged in the assessment of their possible impact and any response that could be required.

 

Other Regulatory Developments

There are a number of other regulatory developments going through a consultation and implementation process which may have some effect on the Group's business. These include the Financial Services Compensation Scheme arrangements, consumer credit regulations, financial stability, and conduct of business arrangements such as those resulting from the Retail Distribution review, and the Mortgage Market review.

 

Disclosure Controls and Procedures

 

The Group evaluated with the participation of its Chief Executive Officer and Financial Controller, the effectiveness of the Group's disclosure controls and procedures as of 31 December 2010. There are inherent limitations to the effectiveness of any system of disclosure controls and procedures, including the possibility of human error and the circumvention or overriding of the controls and procedures. Accordingly, even effective disclosure controls and procedures can only provide reasonable assurance of achieving their control objectives.

Based upon the Group's evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and the Financial Controller concluded that, as of 31 December 2010, the Group's disclosure controls and procedures were effective to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by the Group in the reports that the Group files and submits under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms, and that it is accumulated and communicated to the Group's management, including the Group's Chief Executive Officer and Financial Controller, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding disclosure.

There has been no change in the Group's internal control over financial reporting during the Group's 2010 fiscal year that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect the Group's internal controls over financial reporting.

 

Management's Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

 

Internal control over financial reporting is a component of an overall system of internal control. The Group's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting, the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards ('IFRS') as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board, and as endorsed by the European Union.

The Group's internal control over financial reporting includes:

 

Policies and procedures that relate to the maintenance of records that fairly and accurately reflect the transactions and disposition of assets.

Controls providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS, and that receipts and expenditures are being made only as authorised by management.

Controls providing reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. In addition, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions or because the degree of compliance with policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over the financial reporting of the Group. Management assessed the effectiveness of the Group's internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2010 based on the criteria established in the Internal Control - Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on this assessment, Management believes that, as of 31 December 2010, the Group's internal control over financial reporting is effective.

 

Relevant Audit Information

 

Each of the Directors at the date of approval of this report confirms that:

 

so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Group's auditors are unaware; and

the Director has taken all steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Group's auditors are aware of that information.

 

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the UK Companies Act 2006.

 

British Bankers' Association Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

 

In September 2010, the British Bankers' Association published its new Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure. The new Code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance, consistent with the draft Code published in October 2009, which was voluntarily adopted by the Group in the 2009 financial statements. The principles are that UK banks will: provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures; review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest; assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures acknowledging the importance of such guidance; seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector; and clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.

The Group and other major UK banks voluntarily adopted the draft Code in 2009 and the final Code was adopted in their 2010 financial statements. The Group's 2010 financial statements have therefore been prepared in compliance with the new Code's principles.

 

Statement of Directors' Responsibilities

 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and Accounts including the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. The Directors are required by the International Accounting Standards ('IAS') Regulation to prepare the group financial statements under IFRS, as adopted by the European Union, and have also elected to prepare the parent company financial statements in accordance with IFRS, as adopted by the European Union. The financial statements are also required by law to be properly prepared in accordance with the UK Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. In addition, in order to meet certain US requirements, the Directors are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with IFRS, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

The Directors acknowledge their responsibility to ensure the financial statements give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss presented and that the management report, which is incorporated into this report, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and a description of the principal risks and uncertainties the business faces.

International Accounting Standard 1 requires that financial statements present fairly for each financial year the Company's financial position, financial performance and cash flows. This requires the faithful representation of the effects of transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income and expenses set out in the International Accounting Standards Board's 'Framework for the preparation and presentation of financial statements'.

In virtually all circumstances, a fair presentation will be achieved by compliance with all applicable IFRS. However, the Directors are also required to:

 

properly select and apply accounting policies;

present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information;

provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific requirements in IFRS are insufficient to enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity's financial position and financial performance; and

make an assessment of the Company's ability to continue as a going concern.

 

The Directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company's transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the UK Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company's website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

 

Auditors

 

Deloitte LLP have expressed their willingness to continue in office as auditors and a resolution to reappoint them will be proposed at the Company's forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

 

By Order of the Board

 

 

Karen M. Fortunato

Company Secretary

17 March 2011

2 Triton Square, Regent's Place, London NW1 3AN

 

 Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Santander UK plc

We have audited the financial statements of Santander UK plc (the ''Company'') and its subsidiaries (together the ''Group'') for the year ended 31 December 2010 which comprise the Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated and Company Statements ofComprehensive Income, the Consolidated and Company Balance Sheets, the Consolidated and Company Statements of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated and Company Cash Flow Statements, the related Notes 1 to 52 and the audited information in the Risk Management report in the Business and Financial Review (pages 67 to 134). The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union and, as regards the parent company financial statements, as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

This report is made solely to the Company's members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company's members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor's report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company's members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor

As explained more fully in the Directors' Responsibilities Statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board's Ethical Standards for Auditors.

 

Scope of the audit of the financial statements

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group's and the parent company's circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements.

 

Opinion on financial statements

In our opinion:

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group's and the parent company's affairs at 31 December 2010 and of the Group's profit for the year then ended;

the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union;

the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

 

Separate opinion in relation to IFRSs as issued by the IASB

As explained in the Accounting Policies section of the financial statements, the Group in addition to applying IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, has also applied IFRSs as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). In our opinion the Group financial statements comply with IFRSs as issued by the IASB.

 

Opinion on other matter prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion the information given in the Directors' Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements.

 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

certain disclosures of directors' remuneration specified by law are not made; or

we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

 

 

 

 

Caroline Britton (Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor

London, United Kingdom

17 March 2011

 

 

 

Consolidated Income Statement

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Interest and similar income

3

7,047

7,318

7,915

Interest expense and similar charges

3

(3,233)

(3,906)

(6,143)

Net interest income

3,814

3,412

1,772

Fee and commission income

4

902

986

768

Fee and commission expense

4

(203)

(162)

(97)

Net fee and commission income

699

824

671

Net trading and other income

5

521

460

561

Total operating income

5,034

4,696

3,004

Administration expenses

6

(1,793)

(1,848)

(1,343)

Depreciation and amortisation

7

(275)

(260)

(202)

Total operating expenses excluding provisions and charges

(2,068)

(2,108)

(1,545)

Impairment losses on loans and advances

9

(712)

(842)

(348)

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

9

(129)

(56)

(17)

Total operating provisions and charges

(841)

(898)

(365)

Profit before tax

2,125

1,690

1,094

Taxation charge

10

(542)

(445)

(275)

Profit for the year

1,583

1,245

819

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

1,544

1,190

811

Non-controlling interest

39

55

8

 

All profits during the year were generated from continuing operations.

 

 

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

 

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Profit for the year

1,583

1,245

819

Other comprehensive income/(expense):

Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit obligations

37

25

(606)

(44)

 (Losses)/gains on available-for-sale securities

21

(1)

(6)

8

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

-

(4)

28

Tax on above items

10

(9)

171

8

Net gain/(loss) recognised directly in equity

15

(445)

-

Gains on available-for-sale securities transferred to profit or loss on sale

(2)

(2)

-

Tax on items transferred to profit or loss

10

1

1

-

Net transfers to profit

(1)

(1)

-

Total other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year before tax

22

(618)

(8)

Tax relating to components of other comprehensive income/(expense)

10

(8)

172

8

Total comprehensive income for the year

1,597

799

819

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

1,558

 

744

811

Non-controlling interest

39

55

8

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Consolidated Balance Sheet

As at 31 December 2010 and 2009

 

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

Assets

Cash and balances at central banks

12

26,502

4,163

Trading assets

13

35,461

33,290

Derivative financial instruments

14

24,377

22,827

Financial assets designated at fair value

15

6,777

12,358

Loans and advances to banks

16

3,852

9,151

Loans and advances to customers

17

195,132

186,804

Available-for-sale securities

21

175

797

Loans and receivables securities

22

3,610

9,898

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

1,091

1,127

Investment in associated undertakings

24

2

75

Intangible assets

25

2,178

1,446

Property, plant and equipment

26

1,705

1,250

Current tax assets

277

85

Deferred tax assets

27

566

946

Other assets

28

1,155

1,074

Total assets

302,860

285,291

Liabilities

Deposits by banks

29

7,784

5,811

Deposits by customers

30

152,643

143,893

Derivative financial instruments

14

22,405

18,963

Trading liabilities

31

42,827

46,152

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

32

3,687

4,423

Debt securities in issue

33

51,783

47,758

Subordinated liabilities

34

6,372

6,949

Other liabilities

35

2,026

2,323

Provisions

36

185

91

Current tax liabilities

492

300

Deferred tax liabilities

27

209

336

Retirement benefit obligations

37

173

1,070

Total liabilities

290,586

278,069

Equity

Share capital

39

3,999

2,709

Share premium

39

5,620

1,857

Retained earnings

2,628

1,911

Other reserves

27

29

Total shareholders' equity

12,274

6,506

Non-controlling interests

41

-

716

Total equity

12,274

7,222

Total liabilities and equity

302,860

285,291

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The Financial Statements on pages 152 to 262 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 17 March 2011 and signed on its behalf by:

 

 

Ana Botín

Chief Executive Officer

 

Company Registered Number: 2294747

 

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

Other reserves

 

 

Notes

Share capital

£m

Share premium

£m

Available for sale reserve

£m

Foreign currency translation reserve

£m

Retained earnings

£m

Total

£m

Non-controlling interest

£m

Total

£m

 

1 January 2008

148

1,857

13

(7)

1,333

3,344

98

3,442

 

Profit for the year

-

-

-

-

811

811

8

819

 

Other comprehensive income for the year

-

-

8

28

(44)

(8)

-

(8)

 

Tax on other comprehensive income

-

-

(3)

-

11

8

-

8

 

Dividends

40

-

-

-

-

(450)

(450)

-

(450)

 

Issue of ordinary shares

39

1,000

-

-

-

-

1,000

-

1,000

 

Capital contribution

39

-

1,264

-

-

17

1,281

-

1,281

 

Assumed through business combinations

39

-

-

-

-

-

-

605

605

 

31 December 2008

1,148

3,121

18

21

1,678

5,986

711

6,697

 

 

1 January 2009

1,148

3,121

18

21

1,678

5,986

711

6,697

 

Profit for the year

-

-

-

-

1,190

1,190

55

1,245

 

Other comprehensive income for the year

-

-

(8)

(4)

(606)

(618)

-

(618)

 

Tax on other comprehensive income

-

-

2

-

170

172

-

172

 

Dividends and other distributions

40, 41

-

-

-

-

(521)

(521)

(50)

(571)

 

Reclassification of RCIs

39

297

-

-

-

-

297

-

297

 

Transfer to share capital

39

1,264

(1,264)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

31 December 2009

2,709

1,857

12

17

1,911

6,506

716

7,222

 

 

1 January 2010

2,709

1,857

12

17

1,911

6,506

716

7,222

 

Profit for the year

-

-

-

-

1,544

1,544

39

1,583

 

Other comprehensive income for the year

-

-

(3)

-

25

22

-

22

 

Tax on other comprehensive income

-

-

1

-

(9)

(8)

-

(8)

 

Dividends and other distributions

40, 41

-

-

-

-

(815)

(815)

(17)

(832)

 

Issue of preference shares

39

300

-

-

-

-

300

-

300

 

Redemption of A&L preference shares

41

-

-

-

-

-

-

(294)

(294)

 

Reclassification of Perpetual Preferreds

39, 41

297

-

-

-

-

297

(297)

-

 

Issue of ordinary shares

39

693

3,763

-

-

-

4,456

-

4,456

 

Acquisition of non-controlling interest

49

-

-

-

-

(28)

(28)

(147)

(175)

 

31 December 2010

3,999

5,620

10

17

2,628

12,274

-

12,274

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net cash flow from/(used in) operating activities

Profit for the year

1,583

1,245

819

Adjustments for:

Non cash items included in net profit

3,136

(24)

1,297

Change in operating assets

6,239

7,776

(30,381)

Change in operating liabilities

1,557

(2,351)

209

Income taxes (paid)/received

(131)

2

43

Effects of exchange rate differences

(1,000)

(3,719)

6,569

Net cash flow from/(used in) operating activities

42

11,384

2,929

(21,444)

Net cash flow (used in)/from investing activities

Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired

42,49

(1,418)

-

18,667

Dividends received from associates

-

-

2

Investment in associates

24

-

(35)

(8)

Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed

42

250

-

1,605

Purchase of tangible and intangible fixed assets

25, 26

(873)

(463)

(278)

Proceeds from sale of tangible and intangible fixed assets

91

60

15

Purchase of non-trading securities

(1,225)

(1,133)

(891)

Proceeds from sale of non-trading securities

1,851

3,004

290

Net cash flow (used in)/from investing activities

(1,324)

1,433

19,402

Net cash flow from/(used in) financing activities

Issue of ordinary share capital

39

4,456

-

1,000

Issue of loan capital

21,409

1,556

-

Repayment of loan capital

(15,973)

(5,895)

(7,786)

Dividends paid on ordinary shares

40

(900)

(225)

(574)

Dividends paid on preference shares classified in equity

40

(19)

-

-

Dividends paid on Reserve Capital Instruments

40

(21)

(21)

(21)

Interest paid on preference shares classified in non-controlling interest

-

(19)

-

Interest paid on Perpetual Preferred Securities classified in non-controlling interest

41

(17)

(17)

-

Net cash flow from/(used in) financing activities

8,935

(4,621)

(7,381)

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

18,995

(259)

(9,423)

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year

26,364

27,675

34,056

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

141

(1,052)

3,042

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

42

45,500

26,364

27,675

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Company Balance Sheet

As at 31 December 2010 and 2009

 

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

Assets

Cash and balances at central banks

12

21,408

3,266

Derivative financial instruments

14

2,994

2,539

Financial assets designated at fair value

15

5,126

37,145

Loans and advances to banks

16

115,957

109,658

Loans and advances to customers

17

179,223

131,749

Available-for-sale securities

21

38

30

Loans and receivables securities

22

5,378

2

Macro hedge of interest rate risk

114

-

Investment in subsidiary undertakings

23

6,869

7,038

Investment in associated undertakings

24

1

76

Intangible assets

25

1,407

552

Property, plant and equipment

26

1,204

561

Current tax assets

212

-

Deferred tax assets

27

379

428

Other assets

28

1,005

651

Total assets

341,315

293,695

Liabilities

Deposits by banks

29

146,240

116,414

Deposits by customers

30

170,579

159,187

Derivative financial instruments

14

1,099

3,353

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

32

30

-

Debt securities in issue

33

3,177

-

Subordinated liabilities

34

6,438

6,119

Other liabilities

35

1,796

1,611

Provisions

36

156

74

Current tax liabilities

14

92

Retirement benefit obligations

37

177

922

Total liabilities

329,706

287,772

Equity

Share capital

39

3,999

2,709

Share premium

39

5,620

1,857

Retained earnings

1,983

1,350

Available for sale reserve

7

7

Total shareholders' equity

11,609

5,923

Total liabilities and equity

341,315

293,695

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

 

The Financial Statements on pages 152 to 262 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 17 March 2011 and signed on its behalf by:

 

 

Ana Botín

Chief Executive Officer

 

Company Registered Number: 2294747

 

Company Statement of Comprehensive Income

 

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Profit for the year

1,391

747

1,328

Other comprehensive income/(expenses):

Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit obligations

37

67

(414)

(43)

Losses on available-for-sale securities

21

-

-

(4)

Tax on items taken directly to equity

(20)

116

12

Net loss recognised directly in equity

47

(298)

(35)

Gains on available-for-sale securities transferred to profit or loss on sale

-

-

-

Tax on items transferred to profit

-

-

-

Net transfers to profit

-

-

-

Total other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year before tax

67

(414)

(47)

Tax relating to components of other comprehensive income/(expense)

(20)

116

12

Total comprehensive income for the year

1,438

449

1,293

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

1,438

 

449

1,293

 

 

Company Statement of Changes in Equity

 

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

Notes

Share Capital

£m

Share Premium

£m

Available for sale reserve

£m

Retained earnings

£m

Total

£m

1 January 2008

148

1,857

11

575

2,591

Profit for the year

-

-

-

1,328

1,328

Other comprehensive income for the year

-

-

(4)

(43)

(47)

Tax on other comprehensive income

-

-

-

12

12

Issue of ordinary shares

39

1,000

-

-

-

1,000

Dividends

40

-

-

-

(450)

(450)

31 December 2008

1,148

1,857

7

1,422

4,434

1 January 2009

1,148

1,857

7

1,422

4,434

Profit for the year

-

-

-

747

747

Other comprehensive income for the year

-

-

-

(414)

(414)

Tax on other comprehensive income

-

-

-

116

116

Capital contribution

39

1,264

-

-

-

1,264

Dividends

40

-

-

-

(521)

(521)

Reclassification of Reserve Capital Instruments

39

297

-

-

-

297

31 December 2009

2,709

1,857

7

1,350

5,923

1 January 2010

2,709

1,857

7

1,350

5,923

Profit for the year

-

-

-

1,391

1,391

Other comprehensive income for the year

-

-

-

67

67

Tax on other comprehensive income

-

-

-

(20)

(20)

Issue of preference shares

39

300

-

-

-

300

Reclassification of Perpetual Preferred Securities

39

297

-

-

-

297

Issue of ordinary shares

39

693

3,763

-

-

4,456

Other movements

-

-

-

10

10

Dividends

40

-

-

-

(815)

(815)

31 December 2010

3,999

5,620

7

1,983

11,609

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

 

Company Cash Flow Statement 

 

For the years ended 31 December 2010, 2009 and 2008

 

 

 

 

Notes

2010

£m

2009

£m

2008

£m

Net cash flow from/(used in) operating activities

Profit for the year

1,391

747

1,328

Adjustments for:

Non cash items included in net profit

2,580

(207)

2,038

Change in operating assets

(35,575)

1,103

(80,636)

Change in operating liabilities

43,708

(6,166)

128,109

Income taxes (paid)/received

(99)

21

80

Effects of exchange rate differences

(27)

(268)

897

Net cash flow from/(used in) operating activities

42

11,978

(4,770)

51,816

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Increase in investment in subsidiaries

23

(1,451)

-

(598)

Investment in associates

24

-

(35)

(708)

Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed

772

-

111

Purchase of tangible and intangible fixed assets

25,26

(783)

(209)

(174)

Proceeds from sale of tangible and intangible fixed assets

47

18

11

Purchase of non-trading securities

-

(9)

(9)

Proceeds from sale and redemption of non-dealing securities

-

3

8

Net cash flow used in investing activities

(1,415)

(232)

(1,359)

Net cash flow from/(used in) financing activities

Issue of ordinary share capital

39

4,456

-

1,000

Repayment of loan capital

(2,804)

(557)

(253)

Dividends paid on ordinary shares

40

(900)

(225)

(574)

Dividends paid on preference shares classified in equity

40

(19)

-

-

Dividends paid on Reserve Capital Instruments

40

(21)

(21)

(21)

Net cash flow from/(used in) financing activities

712

(803)

152

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

11,275

(5,805)

50,609

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year

55,398

61,203

10,594

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

-

-

-

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

42

66,673

55,398

61,203

 

The accompanying Notes on pages 159 to 262 and the audited sections of the Risk Management Report on pages 67 to 134 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.


 

This information is provided by RNS
The company news service from the London Stock Exchange
 
END
 
 
FR GGURPWUPGGBM

Related Shares:

Sant Uk.10te%
FTSE 100 Latest
Value8,453.43
Change124.83